EP4105728B1

EP4105728B1 - Toner container and image forming system

Info

Publication number: EP4105728B1
Application number: EP21903518.5A
Authority: EP
Inventors: Goshi Ozaki; Hiroyuki Munetsugu; Teruhiko Sasaki; Tachio Kawai; Akinobu Hirayama; Toshiki Fujino
Original assignee: Canon Inc
Current assignee: Canon Inc
Priority date: 2020-12-07
Filing date: 2021-12-06
Publication date: 2024-02-07
Anticipated expiration: 2041-12-06
Also published as: CN116339091A; US20220413414A1; US20240036496A1; EP4155833A1; US20230017354A1; US11592766B2; EP4105728A4; CN116339090A; EP4155833B1; CN116339095A; WO2022124422A1; CN116339092A; JP2022090641A; EP4163730A1; EP4163731A1; US11662673B2; CN116339093A; EP4105728A1; CN115605812A; TW202229022A

Description

[TECHNICAL FIELD]

The present invention relates to a toner container which can be mounted to an image forming apparatus.

[BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION]

A structure using a dismountable toner container for an image forming apparatus is known in order to supply toner for the electrophotographic image forming apparatus to the image forming apparatus ( WO 2020/100699 A2 ).
Toner containers according to the preamble of claim 1 are shown in US 5 345 297 A , US 6 363 235 B1 , EP 0 854 395 A1 , EP 0 701 181 A2 and JP 2020-098280 A .

[SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION]

It is the object of the present invention to provide a new form of a toner container which can be mounted to an image forming apparatus.
The object of the present is achieved by a toner container having the features of claim 1.
Further advantageous developments of the present invention are defined in the dependent claims.
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a new form of a toner container which can be mounted to an image forming apparatus.

[BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWING]

Figure 1 is views of an image forming system according to Embodiment 1.
Figure 2 is a perspective view of an image forming apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
Figure 3 is exploded perspective views of a mounting portion in Embodiment 1.
Figure 4 is external perspective views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 1.
Figure 5 is top views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 1 as viewed from above.
Figure 6 is a view of the mounting portion in Embodiment 1 as viewed from below.
Figure 7 is perspective views of an apparatus-side shutter in Embodiment 1.
Figure 8 is a perspective view of a cover in Embodiment 1.
Figure 9 is cross-sectional views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 1 (when the shutter rotation on the apparatus-side is restricted).
Figure 10 is sectional views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 1 (when the restriction of the apparatus-side shutter rotation is released).
Figure 11 is perspective views of a restriction member in Embodiment 1.
Figure 12 is perspective views of the releasing member used in Embodiment 1.
Figure 13 is a perspective view and a front view of a unit in which the restriction member and the releasing member are assembled in Embodiment 1.
Figure 14 is sectional views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 1.
Figure 15 is sectional views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 1.
Figure 16 is front views of a toner pack according to Embodiment 1.
Figure 17 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 1.
Figure 18 is a perspective view and a bottom view of a neighborhood of a nozzle in Embodiment 1 (when the shutter on the pack side is closed).
Figure 19 is a perspective view and a bottom view of the neighborhood of the nozzle according to Embodiment 1 (when the shutter on the pack side is opened).
Figure 20 is a rear perspective view of the neighborhood of the nozzle in Embodiment 1.
Figure 21 is a front view of the neighborhood of the nozzle in Embodiment 1.
Figure 22 is a cross-section of a projecting portion of the nozzle in Embodiment 1.
Figure 23 is perspective views of the mounting portion and the toner pack in a state during mounting operation in Embodiment 1.
Figure 24 is a sectional view of the mounting portion and the toner pack in a state during mounting in Embodiment 1.
Figure 25 is cross-sectional views of the mounting portion and the toner pack in a state during mounting in Embodiment 1.
Figure 26 is an illustration of a process in which the rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack in Embodiment 1.
Figure 27 is sectional views of the mounting portion and the toner pack at the time when the mounting portion of the toner pack according to Embodiment 1 is completed.
Figure 28 is perspective views of the toner pack mounted on the mounting portion when an operating lever is in a closed position and an open position, as viewed from above.
Figure 29 is sectional views illustrating a toner movement path when the apparatus-side shutter and the pack-side shutter are closed and opened.
Figure 30 is perspective views of a neighborhood of the nozzle in Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 31 is perspective views of a neighborhood of the nozzle depending on Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 32 is a perspective view of the neighborhood of the nozzle in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 33 is a perspective view and a front view of a neighborhood of the nozzle in Modified Example 4 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 34 is front views of the toner pack in Modified Example 5 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 35 is perspective views of a neighborhood of the nozzle in Modified Example 6 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 36 is perspective views of a neighborhood of the nozzle in Modified Example 7 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 37 is perspective views of a neighborhood of the nozzle in Modified Example 8 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 38 is perspective views of the neighborhood of the nozzle and an attachment according to Modified Example 9 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 39 is enlarged views of a second slope of the restriction releasing portion in Embodiment 1 and Modified Examples 1-9 of Embodiment 1.
Figure 40 is exploded perspective views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 2.
Figure 41 is external perspective views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 2.
Figure 42 is views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 2 as viewed from above.
Figure 43 is a view of the mounting portion in Embodiment 2 as viewed from below.
Figure 44 is perspective views of an apparatus-side shutter in Embodiment 2.
Figure 45 is perspective views of a cover in Embodiment 2.
Figure 46 is perspective views of the restriction member in Embodiment 2.
Figure 47 is perspective views of a releasing member in Embodiment 2.
Figure 48 is perspective views of a unit in which a restriction member and a releasing member are assembled in Embodiment 2.
Figure 49 is a sectional view of a mounting portion in Embodiment 2 (when the shutter rotation on the apparatus-side is restricted).
Figure 50 is cross-sectional views illustrating a position of the releasing member relative to the restriction member in Embodiment 2.
Figure 51 is sectional views of the mounting portion in Embodiment 2 (when the apparatus-side shutter rotation restriction is released).
Figure 52 is sectional views illustrating a position of the releasing member relative to the restriction member in Embodiment 2.
Figure 53 is sectional views illustrating a position of the releasing member relative to the restriction member in Embodiment 2.
Figure 54 is cross-sectional views illustrating a position of the releasing member relative to the restriction member in Embodiment 2.
Figure 55 is a front view, a rear view, and a side view of a toner pack according to Embodiment 2.
Figure 56 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 2.
Figure 57 is a perspective view and a bottom view of the neighborhood of a nozzle in Embodiment 2 (when the shutter on the pack side is closed).
Figure 58 is a perspective view, a bottom view, and a front view of the neighborhood of the nozzle in Embodiment 2 (when the shutter on the pack side is opened).
Figure 59 is a rear perspective view of the neighborhood of the nozzle, an enlarged perspective view, and a front view of a projection in according to Embodiment 2.
Figure 60 is a perspective view and a bottom view of the projecting portion in Embodiment 2.
Figure 61 is a front view and a rear view of a neighborhood of the nozzle in Embodiment 2.
Figure 62 is a cross-sectional view of a projecting portion of the nozzle and a bottom view of the nozzle in Embodiment 2.
Figure 63 is perspective views of the toner pack and the mounting portion immediately before and at the time of completion of mounting of the toner pack according to Embodiment 2.
Figure 64 is cross-sectional views of the mounting portion and the toner pack during mounting of the toner pack according to Embodiment 2.
Figure 65 is an illustration showing a process in which the rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack in Embodiment 2.
Figure 66 is an illustration showing a process of releasing the rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion, by mounting the toner pack, in Embodiment 2.
Figure 67 is enlarged perspective views of the mounting portion showing how a releasing claw of the releasing member is exposed through the central hole of the cover of the mounting portion in Embodiment 2.
Figure 68 is sectional views of the mounting portion and the toner pack at the time of completing the mounting of the toner pack in Embodiment 2.
Figure 69 the perspective views of the toner pack mounted to the mounting portion when the operating lever is in the closed position and the open position, as viewed from above.
Figure 70 is sectional views illustrating a toner movement path when the apparatus-side shutter and the pack-side shutter are closed and opened.
Figure 71 is a perspective view and a bottom view illustrating a structure of a modified example of the inner peripheral surface of the projecting portion of the nozzle.
Figure 72 is a perspective view and a side view of an attachment according to the Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 73 is a top view and a cross-sectional view illustrating only the portions related with mounting of the attachment to the main assembly of the apparatus in Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 74 is sectional views illustrating a process of mounting the attachment to the apparatus main assembly according to Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 75 is sectional views illustrating a process of mounting the attachment to the apparatus main assembly according to Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 76 is a perspective view of the toner pack according to Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 77 is a side view and a sectional view of the toner pack mounted to the main assembly of the apparatus in Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 78 is a perspective view of an attachment including different shapes according to Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 79 is a perspective view and a side view of the attachment unit according to Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 80 is a perspective view of a shutter in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 81 is a perspective view of a projecting member in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 82 is an exploded perspective view of the attachment unit according to Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 83 is a cross-sectional view of a projecting member and a shutter when they are located at the first positions in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 84 is a side view of the neighborhood of the projecting member in the state in which the operating lever is between the closed position and the open position in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 85 is a cross-sectional view of the neighborhood of the projecting member in the state in which the operating lever is between the closed position and the open position in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 86 is a perspective view of the toner pack mounted to the main assembly of the apparatus, according to Modified Example 2 of embodiment 2.
Figure 87 is a perspective view of the attachment unit with the lid member mounted according to Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 88 is an illustration showing the detailed shapes of a first restriction releasing portion and the second restriction releasing portion in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 89 is an illustration showing a process in which the releasing member is rotated by the first slope of the first restriction releasing portion in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 90 is an illustration showing a process in which the releasing member is rotated by a second slope of a first restriction releasing portion in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 91 is illustrations showing the detailed shapes of the first restriction releasing portion and the second restriction releasing portion in another form in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 92 is illustrations showing a process in which the releasing member is rotated by the first restriction releasing portion and the second restriction releasing portion of another form of Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 93 is an external perspective view of a discharge unit according to Modified Example 4 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 94 is an exploded perspective view of the discharge unit according to Modified Example 4 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 95 is a perspective view of the toner pack equipped with the discharge unit according to Modified Example 4 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 96 is a perspective view of the toner pack according to Modified Example 5 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 97 is a perspective view and a sectional view of the nozzle in Modified Example 5 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 98 is a perspective view and a cross-sectional view of the nozzle in Modified Example 5 of Embodiment 2 in a state in which the discharge opening faces downward.
Figure 99 is a perspective view and a sectional view of the nozzle in Modified Example 5 of Embodiment 2 in a state in which the discharge opening faces a radially outer side.
Figure 100 is illustrations showing a detailed shape of the first restriction releasing portion and the second restriction releasing portion according to Modified Example 6 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 101 is a perspective view, a front view, a side view, and a rear view of the toner pack according to a Modified Example 7 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 102 is a perspective view of a toner pack and a mounting portion, and a perspective view of a rod used for opening a shutter on the apparatus-side, according to Modified Example 7 of Embodiment 2.
Figure 103 is an illustration showing an entire toner pack according to Embodiment 3.
Figure 104 is an exploded perspective view of a nozzle and the portions assembled to the nozzle in Embodiment 3.
Figure 105 is an exploded perspective view of the nozzle and the portions assembled to the nozzle in Embodiment 3.
Figure 106 is an illustration showing a detailed shape of the restriction releasing member in Embodiment 3.
Figure 107 is a sectional view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 3.
Figure 108 is an illustration showing a process of operating the toner pack in Embodiment 3.
Figure 109 is a sectional view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 3.
Figure 110 is illustrations showing a process in which the rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack according to Embodiment 3.
Figure 111 is an illustration showing a process in which the rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack in Embodiment 3.
Figure 112 is an illustration showing a detailed shape of the restriction releasing member according to Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 3.
Figure 113 is an illustration showing a detailed shape of the restriction releasing member in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 3.
Figure 114 is an illustration showing an entire toner pack according to Embodiment 4.
Figure 115 is an exploded perspective view of a nozzle and the portions assembled to the nozzle in Embodiment 4.
Figure 116 is a perspective view of the nozzle in Embodiment 4.
Figure 117 is a perspective view of a movement path in Embodiment 4.
Figure 118 is a perspective view of a cam member, an operating member, and a shaft member in Embodiment 4.
Figure 119 is an illustration showing the assembly of the movement path and the tension spring to the nozzle in Embodiment 4.
Figure 120 is an illustration showing a process of assembling the operation mechanism to the nozzle in Embodiment 4.
Figure 121 is perspective views in a state in which portions are assembled to the nozzle, in Embodiment 4.
Figure 122 is an illustration showing a state in which the pack-side shutter is in an open position and a closed position in a second position of the movement path in Embodiment 4.
Figure 123 is an illustration showing the operation of the movement path by operating the operating member in Embodiment 4.
Figure 124 is an illustration showing a process of inserting the toner pack into the mounting portion and operating the operation lever and the operating member according to Embodiment 4.
Figure 125 is sectional views in which the toner pack is mounted to an attachment portion and the operation lever is in the open position, in Embodiment 4.
Figure 126 is sectional views when the operating member is operated to move the movement path to the first position in Embodiment 4.
Figure 127 is a perspective view of a toner pack according to Embodiment 5.
Figure 128 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 5.
Figure 129 is a partially exploded perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 5.
Figure 130 is a partially exploded perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 5.
Figure 131 is a perspective view of a nozzle in Embodiment 5.
Figure 132 is a sectional view and a side view of the nozzle in Embodiment 5.
Figure 133 is a schematic perspective view illustrating the first operation of the user in Embodiment 5.
Figure 134 is side views illustrating the second operation of the user in Embodiment 5.
Figure 135 is a side view illustrating a third operation of the user according to Embodiment 5.
Figure 136 is sectional views illustrating a third operation of the user in Embodiment 5.
Figure 137 is a perspective view illustrating states before and after a toner seal is broken in Embodiment 5.
Figure 138 is an external view of a toner pack having a structure in which the toner seal is pulled out, according to Embodiment 5.
Figure 139 is an exploded perspective view illustrating an attachment of a toner seal of the toner pack in Embodiment 5.
Figure 140 is a partially exploded perspective view illustrating the mounting of the toner seal of the toner pack according to Embodiment 5.
Figure 141 is a sectional view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 5, which is structured to pull out the toner seal to the outside.
Figure 142 is an illustration showing an entire toner pack according to Embodiment 6.
Figure 143 is an exploded perspective view of the restriction releasing mechanism according to Embodiment 6.
Figure 144 is an illustration showing a detailed shape of the restriction releasing mechanism and a process of an assembling method in Embodiment 6.
Figure 145 is a sectional view of a toner pack according to Embodiment 6.
Figure 146 is an illustration showing operation of a restriction releasing mechanism in Embodiment 6.
Figure 147 is an enlarged perspective view of the neighborhood of a projecting portion of the toner pack according to Embodiment 6.
Figure 148 is an illustration showing an entire toner pack according to Embodiment 7.
Figure 149 is an exploded perspective view of a restriction releasing mechanism according to Embodiment 7.
Figure 150 is a detailed view of a first restriction releasing member and a second restriction releasing member in Embodiment 7.
Figure 151 is a sectional view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 7.
Figure 152 is an illustration showing operation of the restriction releasing mechanism in Embodiment 7.
Figure 153 is an illustration showing a process of releasing rotation restriction of a shutter on the apparatus-side by a rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion by mounting the toner pack, in Embodiment 7.
Figure 154 is a detailed view of a first restriction releasing member and a second restriction releasing member in Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 155 is an illustration showing a process in which rotation restriction of a shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack in Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 156 is an exploded perspective view of a restriction releasing mechanism according to Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 157 is an illustration showing operation of the restriction releasing mechanism according to Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 158 is an illustration showing a process in which rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the restriction releasing mechanism in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 160 is an illustration showing a process in which the rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 161 is an illustration showing a position of a pin provided on a straight portion when the toner pack is mounted on the mounting portion in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 7.
Figure 162 is an illustration showing an entire toner pack according to Embodiment 8.
Figure 163 is an exploded perspective view before a restriction releasing member and a shaft ring are assembled to the nozzle in Embodiment 8.
Figure 164 is a detailed view of the restriction releasing member in Embodiment 8.
Figure 165 is sectional views of the restriction releasing member in Embodiment 8.
Figure 166 is a sectional view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 8.
Figure 167 is an illustration showing a process of releasing rotation restriction of a shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion by mounting the toner pack, according to Embodiment 8.
Figure 168 is an illustration showing a process in which rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack, in Embodiment 8.
Figure 169 is an illustration showing a process in which rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack, in Embodiment 8.
Figure 170 is an illustration showing a process of releasing rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by a rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion by mounting the toner pack, according to Embodiment 8.
Figure 171 is an illustration showing a process in which rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack, in Embodiment 8.
Figure 172 is an illustration showing a process in which rotation restriction of the shutter on the apparatus-side by the rotation restriction mechanism of the mounting portion is released by mounting the toner pack, in Embodiment 8.
Figure 173 is a perspective view of a restriction releasing member in Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 8.
Figure 174 is a detailed view of the restriction releasing member in Modified Example 2 of Embodiment 8.
Figure 175 is a detailed view of a restriction releasing member according to Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 8.
Figure 176 is a perspective view of a toner pack according to Embodiment 9.
Figure 177 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 9.
Figure 178 is an exploded perspective view of a nozzle according to Embodiment 9.
Figure 179 is exploded perspective views of a pack-side shutter according to Embodiment 9.
Figure 180 is top views and side views illustrating a state in which the toner pack is mounted on the mounting portion in Embodiment 9.
Figure 181 is sectional views in a state in which the toner pack is mounted to the mounting portion in Embodiment 9.
Figure 182 is sectional views of the state in which the toner pack is mounted on the mounting portion according to Embodiment 9.
Figure 183 is a perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 10.
Figure 184 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 10.
Figure 185 is an exploded view of a nozzle in Embodiment 10.
Figure 186 is exploded perspective views of a pack-side shutter according to Embodiment 10.
Figure 187 is a side view and a sectional view of the toner pack according to Embodiment 10.
Figure 188 is a top view, a side view, and a sectional view illustrating a state in which the toner pack is mounted to the mounting portion in Embodiment 10.
Figure 189 is cross-sectional views illustrating a state in which the toner pack is mounted to the mounting portion in Embodiment 10.
Figure 190 is a top view, a side view, and a cross-sectional view illustrating a state in which toner in the toner pack is supplied into a toner accommodating chamber of a developer container in Embodiment 10.
Figure 191 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state in which the toner of the toner pack is supplied into the toner accommodating chamber of the developer container in Embodiment 10.
Figure 192 is a perspective view of a state in which a free end member of the toner pack is in a first attitude in Embodiment 11.
Figure 193 is a partially exploded perspective view of a toner pack according to Embodiment 11.
Figure 194 is an exploded perspective view of a projecting member in Embodiment 11.
Figure 195 is a side view and a sectional view illustrating a user operation of the projecting member in Embodiment 11.
Figure 196 is an illustration showing a structure in which only one restriction releasing portion of the projecting portion in Embodiment 2 and a structure in which the second restriction releasing portion has a shape of 190-degree rotational symmetry of the first restriction releasing portion.

[EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION]

Hereinafter, exemplary embodiments for implementing the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

(Image forming apparatus system)

Part (a) of Figure 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of an image forming system 1000 according to Embodiment 1. Part (b) of Figure 1 is a perspective view of the image forming system 1000.
The image forming system 1000 includes an image forming apparatus 1 and a toner pack 100 (toner container, toner cartridge) which can be mounted to the image forming apparatus 1. Figure 2 is a perspective view of the image forming apparatus 1 to which the toner pack 100 is not mounted.
The toner pack 100 is mountable to the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1 shown in Figure 2 and contains toner to be supplied to the image forming apparatus 1. The detailed structure of the toner pack 100 will be described hereinafter. The toner pack 100 is mounted by moving it in the mounting direction M shown in Figure 2. In this embodiment, the mounting direction M of the toner pack 100 is the direction of gravity, but the direction M may be inclined relative to the direction of gravity.

(Image forming apparatus)

The image forming apparatus 1 is a monochromatic printer which forms an image on the recording material P based on the image information inputted from an external device. The recording material P may be various sheet materials such as papers such as plain paper and thick paper, plastic films such as sheets for overhead projectors, sheets having a special shape such as envelopes and index papers, or various sheet materials made of different materials such as cloth.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 1 and part (b) of Figure 1, the image forming apparatus 1 has the following structure. It comprises an image forming portion 10 that forms a toner image on the recording material P, a pickup roller 65 that feeds the recording material P to the image forming portion 10, a fixing portion 70 that fixes the toner image formed by the image forming portion 10, on the recording material P, and the discharging roller pair 80.
The image forming portion 10 includes a scanner unit 11, an electrophotographic process unit 20a transfer roller 12 that transfers a toner image as a developer image formed on a photosensitive drum 21 of the process unit 20 to the recording material P. The process unit 20 includes a photosensitive drum 21, a charging roller 22, a pre-exposure portion 23, and a developing device 30 (developing unit, developing portion) including a developing roller 31.
The photosensitive drum 21 (image bearing member) is a photosensitive member molded into a cylindrical shape. The photosensitive drum 21 of this embodiment has a photosensitive layer formed of a negatively charged organic photosensitive member on a drum-shaped substrate made of aluminum. Further, the photosensitive drum 21 is rotationally driven by a motor in a predetermined rotational direction (clockwise direction in the Figure) at a predetermined process speed.
The charging roller 22 contacts the photosensitive drum 21 with a predetermined pressure contact force to form a charging portion. Further, by applying a desired charging voltage by a charging high voltage power source, the surface of the photosensitive drum 21 is uniformly charged to a predetermined potential. In this embodiment, the photosensitive drum 21 is charged by the charging roller 22 to the negative polarity. The pre-exposure portion 23 removes static electricity from the surface potential of the photosensitive drum 21 before reaching the charging portion in order to generate a stable discharge in the charging portion.
The scanner unit 11 as an exposure means scans and exposes a surface of the photosensitive drum 21 by irradiating the photosensitive drum 21 with a laser beam corresponding to image information inputted from an external device, using a polygonal mirror. By this exposure, an electrostatic latent image corresponding to the image information is formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum 21. The scanner unit 11 is not limited to the laser scanner device, and, for example, an LED exposure device including an LED array in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the photosensitive drum 21 may be employed.
The developing device 30 includes a developing roller 31 for supplying the developer to the developing roller 31 as a developer carrying member for carrying the developer, a developer container 32 (developing frame) which is the frame of the developing device 30, and a supply roller 33 capable of supplying the developer to the developing roller 31. The developing roller 31 and the supply roller 33 are rotatably supported by the developer container 32. In addition, the developing roller 31 is arranged in the opening of the developer container 32 so as to face the photosensitive drum 21. The supply roller 33 is rotatably in contact with the developing roller 31, and the toner as a developer contained in the developer container 32 is supplied to the surface of the developing roller 31 by the supply roller 33. The supply roller 33 is not always required, if the toner can be sufficiently supplied to the developing roller 31.
The developing device 30 of this embodiment uses a contact developing method as a developing method. That is, a toner layer carried on the developing roller 31 is in contact with the photosensitive drum 21 in a developing portion (developing region) where the photosensitive drum 21 and the developing roller 31 face each other. A developing voltage is applied to the developing roller 31 by a developing high voltage power source. Under the developing voltage, the toner carried on the developing roller 31 is transferred from the developing roller 31 to the drum surface in accordance with the potential distribution on the surface of the photosensitive drum 21, so that the electrostatic latent image is developed into a toner image. In this embodiment, a reverse development method is employed. That is, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged in the charging step and then a charge amount is attenuated by the exposure in the exposure step, and the toner adheres to the surface region of the photosensitive drum 21 having the attenuated charge amount, so that a toner image is formed.
Further, in this embodiment, a toner having a particle size of 6 µm and a negative regular charge polarity is used. As an example, the toner of this embodiment employs a polymerized toner produced by a polymerization method. In addition, the toner of this embodiment does not contain a magnetic component, and is a so-called non-magnetic one-component developer in which the toner is supported on the developing roller 31 mainly by an intermolecular force or an electrostatic force (mirror image force). However, a one-component developer containing a magnetic component may be used. In addition to the toner particles, the one-component developer may contain additives (for example, wax or silica fine particles) for adjusting the fluidity and charging performance of the toner. Furthermore, as the developer, a two-component developer comprising a non-magnetic toner and a magnetic carrier may be used. When a magnetic developer is used, for example, a cylindrical developing sleeve in which a magnet is arranged inside is used as the developer carrier.
The developer container 32 includes a toner accommodating chamber 36 (second accommodating portion, main assembly accommodating portion) for accommodating toner. A stirring member 34 (toner transporting member) is provided inside the toner accommodating chamber 36. The stirring member 34 is driven by a motor (not shown) to stir the toner in the developer container 32, and at the same time, feed the toner toward the developing roller 31 and the supply roller 33. In addition, the stirring member 34 functions to circulate the toner not used for development but stripped off the developing roller 31 in the developer container, thus making uniform the toner in the developer container. The stirring member 34 is not limited to the rotating type. For example, a stirring member including a swinging shape may be employed instead.
Further, a developing blade 35 that restricts the amount of toner carried on the developing roller 31 is arranged in the opening of the developer container 32 in which the developing roller 31 is arranged. The toner supplied to the surface of the developing roller 31 passes through the portion facing the developing blade 35 with the rotation of the developing roller 31, so that the toner is uniformly formed into a thin layer and is charged to the negative polarity by triboelectric charging.
Next, the image forming operation of the image forming apparatus 1 will be described. When a command for image formation is inputted to the image forming apparatus 1, the image forming process by the image forming portion 10 is started based on the image information inputted from an external computer connected to the image forming apparatus 1. The scanner unit 11 irradiates the photosensitive drum 21 with a laser beam based on the inputted image information. At this time, the photosensitive drum 21 is precharged by the charging roller 22, and the electrostatic latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum 21 by being irradiated with the laser beam. Thereafter, the electrostatic latent image is developed by the developing roller 31, and a toner image is formed on the photosensitive drum 21.
In parallel with the image forming process described above, the recording material P is fed out by the pickup roller 65 and is fed toward the transfer nip formed by the transfer roller 12 and the photosensitive drum 21.
The transfer roller 12 is supplied with a transfer voltage from a transfer high-voltage power source, so that the toner image carried on the photosensitive drum 21 is transferred onto the recording material P. When the recording material P now carrying the toner image passes through the fixing portion 70, the toner image is heated and pressed. By this, the toner particles are melted and then fixed, so that the toner image is fixed on the recording material P. The recording material P which has passed through the fixing portion 70 is discharged to the outside (outside the machine) of the image forming apparatus 1 by the discharging roller pair 80 as the discharging means, on the discharge tray 81 as a stacking portion provided at an upper portion of the image forming apparatus 1.
A top cover 82 as a stacking tray is provided at the upper portion of the image forming apparatus 1, and the discharge tray 81 as a stacking surface is formed at the upper surface of the top cover 82. As shown in part (b) of Figure 1 and Figure 2, the top cover 82 is provided with an opening/closing member 83 which is supported so as to be openable/closable around a rotation shaft 83a extending in the front-rear direction. The discharge tray 81 of the top cover 82 is provided with an opening 82a which opens upward. As shown in Figure 2, the mounting portion 106 for mounting the toner pack 100 is exposed through the opening 82a.
The opening/closing member 83 is movable between a closed position for covering the mounting portion 106 in which the toner pack 100 cannot be mounted to the image forming apparatus 1, and an open position in which the mounting portion 106 is exposed so that the toner pack 100 can be mounted to the image forming apparatus 1. The opening/closing member 83 functions as a part of the discharge tray 81 in the closed position. The opening/closing member 83 and the opening 82a are formed on the left side of the discharge tray 81 as viewed from the front of the image forming apparatus 1. The front side of the image forming apparatus 1 described here is the upstream side of the image forming apparatus 1 in the direction in which the recording material P is fed out by the pickup roller 65. In addition, the opening/closing member 83 is opened to the left by hooking a finger in the groove portion 82b provided in the top cover 82.
The opening 82a of the discharge tray 81 is opened so that the mounting portion 106 formed on the upper portion of the image forming apparatus 1 is exposed, and by opening the opening/closing member 83, the user can access the mounting portion 106. In this embodiment, the direct supply method in which the user supplies the toner from the toner pack 100 mounted on the mounting portion 106 to the developing device 30 while the developing device 30 is mounted in the image forming apparatus 1 is employed. At least a part of the toner pack 100 is exposed to the outside of the image forming apparatus 1 in a state of being mounted to the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1.
When the remaining amount of toner in the process unit 20 is low, it is not necessary to take out the process unit 20 from the image forming apparatus 1 and replace it with a new process unit, so that usability can be improved. Further, the toner can be replenished to the developer container 32 at a lower cost than replacing the entire process unit 20. In the direct supply method, it is not necessary to replace various rollers, gears, and so on, and therefore, the cost can be reduced, as compared with the case where only the developing device 30 of the process unit 20 is replaced, as well.

(Toner pack mounting portion)

First, referring to Figures 3 to 8, the structure of the mounting portion 106 will be described. In this embodiment, the mounting portion 106 is a unit for mounting the toner pack 100.
Part (a) of Figure 3 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting portion 106. Part (b) of Figure 3 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting portion 106 as viewed in a direction different from that of part (a) of Figure 3. Part (a) of Figure 4 and part (a) of Figure 5 are a perspective view illustrating the appearance of the mounting portion 106 when the operating lever 108 is in the closed position, and a view of the mounting portion 106 as viewed in the mounting direction M, respectively. Part (b) of Figure 4 and part (b) of Figure 5 are a perspective view illustrating the appearance of the mounting portion 106 when the operating lever 108 is in an open position, and a view of the mounting portion 106 as viewed in the mounting direction M, respectively. Figure 6 is a perspective view of the mounting portion 106 as viewed from the downstream side in the mounting direction M.
Part (a) of Figure 7 is a perspective view of the apparatus-side shutter 109 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 7 is a perspective view of the apparatus-side shutter 109 as viewed from a point different from that of part (a) of Figure 7. Part (a) of Figure 8 is a perspective view of a cover 110 as viewed from the downstream side of the cover 110 in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 8 is a perspective view of the cover 110 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M.
The mounting portion 106 shown in Figures 3 and 4 is provided with a base frame 2 including a first frame 107, a second frame 117, and the cover 110. The cover 110 and the second frame 117 are fixed to the first frame 107. As shown in Figure 8, the cover 110 includes an engaged portion 110h which engages with the engaging portion 107b (part (a) of Figure 3 of the first frame 107 so as not to rotate about the rotational axis B relative to the first frame 107. The first frame 107, the cover 110, and the second frame 117 may be integrally structured instead of being separate members. As shown in Figures 3 and 6, the second frame 117 is provided with an apparatus-side opening 117a (frame opening, receiving opening), and the apparatus-side opening 117a is in fluid communication with a toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developing device 30 (see part (a) of Figure 1).
The operating lever 108 and the apparatus-side shutter 109 (second shutter) are mounted to the base frame 2 so as to be rotatable about the rotational axis B (central axis).
The first frame 107 is provided with a positioning portion 107a. The positioning portion 107a projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the first frame 107 centered on the rotational axis B in the radial direction r of an imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis B. Further, the operating lever 108 is provided with a drive transmission portion 108a (lever projection) and an operating portion 108b. As shown in part (a) of Figure 3, the drive transmission portion 108a of the operating lever 108 a projection portion which projects inward beyond an inner peripheral surface centered on the rotational axis B of the operating lever 108 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis B.
The apparatus-side shutter 109 is a cylindrical member having an open upper portion, and as shown in Figure 7, it is provided with a receiving opening 109a (second shutter opening, apparatus-side shutter opening) in a lateral side surface, extending in the rotational axis B direction, of the apparatus side shutter, and it has a bottom surface 109b provided with a restricted rib 109c (rotation restricted portion). The apparatus-side shutter 109 further includes a center boss 109d (positioning shaft, shaft portion), a driven transmission portion 109e (pushed portion, apparatus-side shutter projection), a pack contact surface 109g (mounting direction positioning), and an inner peripheral surface 109h (positioning in the radial direction). The apparatus-side shutter 109 is structured to be rotatable about the rotational axis B relative to the base frame 2.
The restricted rib 109c projects upward from the bottom surface 109b in the direction of the rotational axis B. As shown in part (a) of Figure 7, the driven transmission portion 109e is a projection projecting inward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis B. An apparatus-side seal 111 is mounted around the receiving opening 109a (see part (b) of Figure 4.
Here, the apparatus-side shutter 109 is structured so as to be rotatable relative to the base frame 2 between a closed position in which the receiving opening 109a is covered by the apparatus-side seal 111 and the cover 110, and an open position in which it is open, not covered by the cover 110 and is opened. The closed position is the position shown in part (a) of Figure 4 and part (a) of Figure 5, and is a position (non-communication position) in which the receiving opening 109a of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is not in fluid communication with the apparatus-side opening 117a of the second frame 117. The open position is the position shown in part (b) of Figure 4 and part (b) of Figure 5 , and is a position (communication position) in which the receiving opening 109a of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is in fluid communication with the apparatus-side opening 117a of the second frame 117. By moving the apparatus-side shutter 109 to the open position, the toner can be supplied (supplied) from the toner pack 100 into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developing device 30 through the receiving opening 109a.
The drive of the operating lever 108 and the apparatus-side shutter 109 is not connected for drive transmission, and therefore, the apparatus-side shutter 109 does not rotate even if the operating lever 108 is operated without the toner pack 100 mounted.

(Apparatus-side shutter rotation restriction mechanism)

As shown in Figure 3, the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1 further comprises a rotation restricting mechanism 112 including a restricting member 113 (rotation restriction member), a releasing member 114, a restriction spring 115, and a release spring 116.
Referring to Figures 9 to 15, the rotation restricting mechanism 112 will be described. In Figures 9, 10 and 14, the cut surfaces of the cover 110, the restricting member 113, and the releasing member 114 are shaded for better illustration.
It may happen that in a state where the toner pack 100 is not mounted on the mounting portion 106, the apparatus-side shutter 109 is unintentionally moved from the closed position to the open position due to an impact during transportation of the image forming apparatus 1 or due to an erroneous operation by the user with the consequence that it is rotated beyond a predetermined degree. In such a case, it may be difficult for the user to mount the toner pack 100 on the mounting portion 106 when using the image forming apparatus 1. Details on this point will be described hereinafter. Therefore, the image forming apparatus 1 of this embodiment is provided with a rotation restricting mechanism 112 in order to prevent the shutter 109 on the apparatus side from rotating from the closed position to the open position.
Figures 9 and 10 are sectional views of the mounting portion 106. Part (a) of Figure 9 is a sectional view taken along a line parallel to the rotational axis B in a state in which the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 109 from the closed position to the open position is restricted by the rotation restricting mechanism 112. Part (b) of Figure 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in part (a) of Figure 9. Part (a) of Figure 10 is a sectional view taken along a line parallel to the rotational axis B in a state in which the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 109 by the rotation restricting mechanism 112 is released. Part (b) of Figure 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 of part (a) of Figure 10. Figure 10 shows, for convenience of the explanation, the state of the mounting portion 106 in which the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is released in the state in the toner pack 100 is not mounted.
Further, part (a) of Figure 11 is a perspective view of the restricting member 113 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 11 is a perspective view of the restricting member 113 as viewed from the downstream side in the mounting direction. Part (a) of Figure 12 is a perspective view of the releasing member 114 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 12 is a perspective view of the releasing member 114 as viewed from the downstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (a) of Figure 13 is a perspective view of a unit in which the restricting member 113 and the releasing member 114 are assembled. Part (b) of Figure 13 is a sectional view, taken along a line parallel to the rotational axis B, of a unit in which the restricting member 113 and the releasing member 114 are assembled.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 9, a restricting member 113, a releasing member 114, a restriction spring 115, and a release spring 116 are provided inside the apparatus-side shutter 109.
As shown in Figure 11, the restricting member 113 is an annular member provided with a central hole 113i centered on the rotational axis B. The restricting member 113 includes a lower surface 113a, a pair of first contact surfaces 113b, a second contact surface 113h, a second restricting surface 113c (rotation restriction portion), contacted surfaces 113e, and a pair of locked surfaces 113f, and a spring engagement portion 113g. The first contact surface 113b and second contact surface 113h constituting a pair are downstream end surfaces in the rotational direction D of the apparatus-side shutter 109. The second restricting surface 113c is an end surface on the downstream side in the rotational direction E of the apparatus-side shutter 109. The locked surface 113f is an end surface (upper surface) on the upstream side in the mounting direction M. The lower surface 113a is an end surface on the downstream side in the mounting direction M. The spring engagement portion 113g is a projection projecting in the rotational direction E.
As shown in Figure 12, the releasing member 114 (guided member) is provided with a pair of releasing claws 114e (engagement claws) extending upward, and is provided with a central hole 114i centered on the rotational axis B is provided. The releasing member 114 includes a pair of contact surfaces 114a, a contact surface 114b, a pair of rise restricted surfaces 114c, a pair of locking surfaces 114d, and a pair of releasing claws 114e (engaged portions), a pair of contact surfaces 114f and a spring engagement portion 114g. The pair of contact surfaces 114a are end surfaces on the downstream side in the rotational direction E of the apparatus-side shutter 109. The contact surface 114b is an end surface (upper surface) on the upstream side in the mounting direction M. The contact surface 114f is an end surface on the downstream side in the rotational direction E with respect to the contact surface 114a. The rise restricted surface 114c is a surface connecting the contact surface 114a and the contact surface 114f, and is an end (end surface facing upward) surface on the upstream side in the mounting direction M. The locking surface 114d is a surface (a surface facing downward) which projects from the outer peripheral surface of the releasing member 114 and faces in the mounting direction M.
As shown in Figure 13, when the restricting member 113 and the releasing member 114 are assembled, the locked surface 113f of the restricting member 113 is directly below the locking surface 114d of the releasing member 114, and faces the locking surface 114d. In addition, the releasing claw 114e projects upward from the central hole centered on the rotational axis B of the restricting member 113 beyond the upper surface of the restricting member 113.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 9 and part (b) of Figure 9, the restricting member 113 and the releasing member 114 are rotatably supported by the large diameter portion 109d1 of the center boss 109d of the apparatus-side shutter 109. Further, the rotation restricting mechanism 112 is covered by the upper surface 110i of the cover 110. The center boss 109d is provided coaxially with the rotational axis B of the apparatus-side shutter 109. The restricting member 113 is urged in the direction of arrow C of the direction of the rotational axis B by the urging force F1 of the restricting spring 115 (second elastic member, second urging member), and the lower surface 113a thereof contacts the bottom surface 109b of the apparatus-side shutter 109. The position of the restriction member at this time is a restriction position. The arrow C direction is the mounting direction M of the toner pack 100. Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 9, a release spring 116 (first elastic member, first urging member) is provided between the restricting member 113 and the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction of the apparatus-side shutter 109. One end and the other end of the release spring 116 are engaged with the spring engagement portion 113g of the restricting member 113 and the spring engagement portion 114g of the releasing member 114, respectively. By the urging force F2 of the release spring 116, the restricting member 113 receives moment M1 in the rotational direction D, So that at least one of the pair of first contact surfaces 113b contacts the corresponding first contact surface 110a of the cover 110. The second contact surface 113h of the restricting member 113 contacts the contacted surface 110j (see Figure 8) of the cover 110, so that the rotation in the rotational direction D is restricted. On the other hand, the releasing member 114 receives moment M2 in the rotational direction E by the urging force F3 of the release spring 116, so that at least one of the pair of contact surfaces 114a contacts the corresponding second contacted surface 110b of the cover 110.
Here, the cover 110 is integrally fixed to the first frame 107. Therefore, as shown in part (b) of Figure 9, the restricted rib 109c of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is between the first restriction surface 110c of the cover 110 and the second restricting surface 113c of the restricting member 113. Therefore, the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 109 in the rotational direction D (direction from the closed position to the open position) is restricted by the second restricting surface 113c of the restricting member 113. The rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 109 in the rotational direction E (direction from the open position to the closed position) is restricted by the first restriction surface 110c of the cover 110.

(Rotation restriction releasing method)

A method of releasing the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 109 by the rotation restricting mechanism 112 will be described. The first step of rotating the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction D against the moment M2 by the release spring 116 from the state of part (b) of Figure 9 is carried out, and then, the second step of moving the releasing member 114 is in an arrow G direction shown in part (a) of Figure 9 is carried out. The first step and the second step are performed by mounting the toner pack 100 onto the mounting portion 106, which will be described after the structure of the toner pack 100 is described. Here, the description will be made using only the structure of the mounting portion 106.
In the second step, the contact surface 114b of the releasing member 114 is brought into abutment to the contacted surface 113e of the restricting member 113, and the releasing member 114 and the restricting member 113 are integrally moved in the direction of arrow G against the urging force F1 of the restriction spring 115. By executing the second step, the rotation restriction is released as shown in Figure 10. The arrow G direction is the direction opposite to the mounting direction M of the toner pack 100.
In the state where the rotation restriction is released, as shown in part (b) of Figure 10, the second restricting surface 113c of the restricting member 113 retracts from the movement locus (rotation locus) of the restricted rib 109c of the apparatus-side shutter 109. The position of the restricting member 113 at this time is a restriction release position (release position). Then, the restricted rib 109c becomes movable between the first restriction surface 110c and the third restriction surface 110d of the cover 110. The distance between the first restriction surface 110c and the third restriction surface 1 10d is such that the apparatus-side shutter 109 can rotate and move between the closed position and the open position, and therefore, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is released. The apparatus-side shutter 109 becomes rotatable from the closed position to the open position in the rotational direction D about the rotational axis B. On the other hand, the rotation of the shutter 109 on the apparatus-side from the closed position in the direction opposite to the rotational direction D is restricted by the first restriction surface 110c of the cover 110. The amount of movement of the releasing member 114 in the arrow G direction (upward direction) suffices if it is not less than such an amount that the second restricting surface 113c of the restricting member 113 in during moving with the releasing member 114 does not overlap with the restricted rib 109c of the apparatus-side shutter 109, in the direction of the rotational axis B.
Here, the description will be made as to the structure of the rotation restricting mechanism 112 by which the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is not released when the rotation restricting mechanism 112 is carried out from the second step without carrying out the first step.
Part (a) of Figure 14 is a sectional view taken along a line X3-X3 in part (b) of Figure 9. Part (b) of Figure 14 is a sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 when the restricting member 113 is moved in the direction of arrow G without rotating the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction D from the state of part (a) of Figure 14.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 14 and part (a) of Figure 8 , the cover 110 is provided with a rise restricting surface 110e (rising restricting section). As shown in part (a) of Figure 14 and part (a) of Figure 12 , the releasing member 114 is provided with an rise restricted surface 114c (rising restricted portion). When the restricting member 113 moves in the direction of arrow G in a state in which the second contact surface 110b and the contact surface 114a are in contact with each other as shown in part (b) of Figure 9, the locked surface 113f of the restricting member 113 is brought into abutment to the locking surface 114d of the releasing member 114. The same structure is provided on the opposite side with respect to the rotational axis B as the center, and therefore, the restricting member 113 and the releasing member 114 are integrally moved in the direction of arrow G (upward). As a result, as shown in part (b) of Figure 14, the rise restricted surface 114c of the releasing member 114 abuts on the rise restricting surface 110e of the cover 110 so that the movement thereof in the G direction is restricted, by which the movement, in the arrow G direction, of the restricting member 113 integrally moving with the releasing member 114 is restricted. At this time, the restricted rib 109c of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is maintained in a rotation restricted state by the first restriction surface 110c and the second restricting surface 113c as shown in part (b) of Figure 9. The position (region), in the rotational direction about the rotational axis B, of the releasing member 114 at this time is the rise restriction position (rise restriction region). That is, the rise restricting position is the position (region) of the releasing member 114 at the time when the rise restricted surface 114c of the releasing member 114 overlaps with the rise restricting surface 110e of the cover 110 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B.
The first step is a step of rotating the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction D against the urging force of the release spring 116 to the rise restriction release position (rise restriction release region) in which the rise restricted surface 114c of the releasing member 114 does not abut to the rise restricting surface 110e of the cover 110.
Part (a) of Figure 15 is a cross-section taken along a line X22-X22 of part (a) of Figure 10. Part (a) of Figure 15 is an illustration showing a state in which the second step is performed after the first step. The second step of this embodiment includes the operation in which the releasing member 114 is rotated in the rotational direction E until at least one of the pair of contact surfaces 114f of the releasing member 114 abuts to the corresponding one of the pair of second contacted surfaces 110b of the cover 110. Part (b) of Figure 15 is a cross-section taken along a line X111-X111 of part (a) of Figure 15.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 15, as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B, the rise restricted surface 114c of the releasing member 114 and the rise restricting surface 110e of the cover 110 do not overlap with each other. Therefore, as shown in part (b) of Figure 15, the restricting member 113 can move integrally with the releasing member 114 in the direction of arrow G, the position of the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction about the rotational axis B is the rise restriction release position. That is, as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B, the rise restriction release position is the position of the releasing member 114 when the rise restricted surface 114c of the releasing member 114 does not overlap with the rise restricting surface 110e of the cover 110. The amount of rotation of the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction D in the first step suffices if the rise restricted surface 114c of the releasing member 114 does not overlap with the rise restricting surface 110e of the cover 110 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B.
The method of releasing the rotation restriction of the shutter 109 on the apparatus-side is a first step and a second step after the first step. The first step is a step of rotating the releasing member 114 from the rise restriction position to the rise restriction release position in the rotational direction D. The second step is a step of moving the releasing member upward together with the restricting member 113 so that the restricting member 113 moves from the restriction position to the restriction release position while the releasing member 114 is in the rise restriction release position. The second step may or may not include an operation of rotating the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction E until the contact surface 114f of the releasing member 114 abuts to the second contacted surface 110b of the cover 110.

(Toner pack)

Referring to Figures 16 and 17, the basic structure of the toner pack 100 will be described. Part (a) of Figure 16 is a front view of the toner pack 100 when the pack side shutter 103 is in the closed position. Part (b) of Figure 16 is a front view of the toner pack 100 when the pack side shutter 103 is in the open position. Figure 17 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack 100.
The toner pack 100 includes an accommodating portion 101 (first accommodating portion) for accommodating toner, a nozzle 102 (nozzle portion, pipe, tube, valve, discharging portion), and a pack-side shutter 103 (container shutter, rotatable member). As shown in Figure 16, the accommodating portion 101 is provided on the side of the first end portion in the first direction D1, and the nozzle 102 and the pack side shutter 103 are provided on the side of the second end portion opposite from the first end portion in the first direction. The accommodating portion 101 is a pouch formed by pouch processing from a flexible polypropylene sheet. The accommodating portion 101 is not limited to the pouch, and may be a resin bottle or a container made of paper or vinyl resin material.
On the side surface 102c (first outer surface) of the nozzle 102 extending along the first direction D1, there is provided a discharge opening 102a (nozzle opening, first opening) structured to be in fluid communication with an inside of the accommodating portion 101. The toner stored in the accommodating portion 101 is discharged to the outside of the toner pack 100 through the discharge opening 102a. The nozzle 102 may be integrally structured with the accommodating portion 101. In addition, a seal may be provided between the accommodating portion 101 and the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102, so that the accommodating portion 101 and the discharge opening 102a may be brought into fluid communication with each other when the seal is removed.
A pack-side shutter 103 (rotatable member) is provided on the outside of the side surface 102c of the nozzle 102. The pack-side shutter 103 is mounted so as to be rotatable around a rotational axis A (first rotational axis) extending in a direction along the first direction D1, and as shown in Figure 17, it is provided with an opening 103a (rotatable member opening, first shutter). The pack-side shutter 103 is provided outside the side surface 102c in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The side surface 102c of the nozzle 102 is a curved surface which is convex toward the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The inner surface of the pack-side shutter 103 (the surface facing the side surface 102c) is a curved surface along the side surface 102c of the nozzle 102, and a substantially rectangular pack-side seal 105 is mounted thereto. The side surface 102c of the nozzle 102 is also a surface extending along the rotational axis A.
As shown in Figure 16, the pack-side shutter 103 is structured to be rotatable around a rotational axis A between a closed position in which the pack-side seal 105 closes the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 and an open position in which the discharge opening 102a is opened. When the pack-side shutter 103 is in the open position, the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 is exposed through the opening 103 a.
Part (a) of Figure 16 and part (b) of Figure 16 show a state in which the pack-side shutter 103 is in the closed position and the open position, respectively. As shown in part (a) of Figure 16, when the pack-side shutter 103 in the closed position is rotated in an arrow K direction (first rotational direction) about the rotational axis A, the pack side shutter 103 becomes in the open position shown in part (b) of Figure 16. Conversely, when the pack-side shutter 103 is rotated from the open position in an arrow L direction (second rotational direction), it becomes in the closed position. In the rotational operation of the pack-side shutter 103, the pack-side shutter 103 rubs against the side surface 102c of the nozzle 102 by way of the pack-side seal 105.
Referring to Figures 18 to 21, the detailed structure of the nozzle 102 and the pack-side shutter 103 will be described. An arrow N indicates the direction from the accommodating portion 101 toward the nozzle 102, and an arrow U direction is opposite thereto. The arrow N direction and the arrow U direction are parallel to the rotational axis A.
Part (a) of Figure 18 is an enlarged view of the neighborhood of the nozzle 102 when the pack-side shutter 103 is in the closed position. Part (b) of Figure 18 is a view of the toner pack 100 as viewed in the direction of arrow U in part (a) of Figure 18. Part (a) of Figure 19 is an enlarged view of the neighborhood of the nozzle 102 when the pack-side shutter 103 is in the open position. Part (b) of Figure 19 is a side view of the toner pack 100 as viewed in the direction of arrow U in part (a) of Figure 19. Figure 20 is a view of the neighborhood of the nozzle 102 as viewed from the side opposite to the side from which Figure 18 views. Figure 21 is a view of the neighborhood of the nozzle 102 as viewed in a direction parallel to the surfaces 102d1 and 102d2 of the nozzle 102 (direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 18 and part (b) of Figure 18, the nozzles 102 is provided with a positioned portion 102d having a surface 102d1 (first nozzle surface, first facing surface) and a surface 102d2 (second nozzle surface, second facing surface) which are arranged in an arrow R direction (second direction D2) so as to face each other with a space therebetween and which extend in a direction perpendicular to the R direction. As shown in part (b) of Figure 18, the surfaces 102d1 and 102d2 in this embodiment extend in a direction perpendicular to the arrow R direction and are parallel to each other. That is, the arrow R direction is a normal direction to the surfaces 102d1 and 102d2. The positioned portion 102d engages with the positioning portion 107a (part (a) of Figure 3 of the first frame 107 when the toner pack 100 is mounted on the mounting portion 106. By this, the position of the nozzle 102 in the direction of the arrow R relative to the first frame 107 (base frame 2) is determined. By this, the position of the nozzle 102 in the rotational direction about the rotational axis A relative to the first frame 107 is also determined. In part (b) of Figure 18, a straight line CL1 (first imaginary straight line) which passes through the center of the surface 102d1 and the surface 102d2 in the R direction and which extends in the direction perpendicular to the arrow R direction is in a phase rotated by about 90 ° relative to CL2 (second imaginary straight line) which passes through the center of the rotational axis A and the discharge opening 102a. That is, the straight line CL1 and the straight line CL2 are perpendicular to each other.
Further, as shown in Figures 18 and 21, the direction of the rotational axis A, the surface 102d1 and the surface 102d2 are provided with surfaces 102e1 and 102e2 on downstream sides in a N direction, respectively. As shown in part (b) of Figure 18, the surfaces 102e1 and 102e2 extend in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A.
In Figure 21, a side surface 102e3 (second outer surface) is provided between the surfaces 102d1 and 102d2 and between the surfaces 102e1 and 102e2 in the direction of arrow R. The side surface 102e3 is recessed inward in the radial direction r with respect to the side surface 102c. The surface 102d1, the surface 102d2, the side surface 102e3, the surface 102e1, the surface 102e2 and the side surface 102e3 form a recess 102e (nozzle recess).
The surface 102d1 and the surface 102d2 do not necessarily have to be parallel as in this embodiment. The surface 102d1 and the surface 102d2 may extend in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A.
Further, as shown in Figure 18, when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the rotational axis A (first direction D1), the side surface 103d (the outer surface of the first rotation member) of the pack side shutter 103 is provided with an opening 103a (rotatable member opening). In part (a) of Figure 18, when the pack-side shutter 103 is in the closed position, at least a part of the recess 102e of the nozzle 102 is exposed through the opening 103a. By doing so, when the toner pack 100 is mounted on the mounting portion 106 with the pack-side shutter 103 closed, the recesses 102e (surfaces 102d1 and 102d2) are engaged with the positioning portion 107a.
Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 18, as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A (first direction D), when the pack side shutter 103 is in the closed position a driven transmission portion 103e (rotatable member recess) is provided on the opposite side across the rotational axis A from the recess 102e of the nozzle 102 (opening 103a of the pack-side shutter103). Both the surface 103b 1 and the surface 103b2 of the driven transmission portion 103e extend in a direction perpendicular to the arrow R direction. Figure 20 is an enlarged perspective view of the neighborhood of the pack-side shutter 103 as viewed from the side where the driven transmission portion 103e is provided. Between the surfaces 103b1 and 103b2, there is a side surface 103b3 (outer surface of the second rotatable member) recessed inward in the radial direction r beyond the side surface 103d. The driven transmission portion 103e comprises the surface 103b 1, the surface 103b2, and the side surface 103b3.
When the pack-side shutter 103 is rotated in the arrow K direction from the closed position shown in Figure 18, the pack-side shutter 103 takes an open position, and the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 is exposed through the opening 103a of the pack-side shutter 103 as shown in Figure 19.
Further, as shown in Figures 18 and 20, the pack-side shutter 103 is provided with a radial positioning portion 103f projecting outward in the radial direction r beyond the side surface 103d. The radial positioning portion 103f is provided on the upstream side of the pack side shutter 103 in the N direction of the direction of the rotational axis A. The radial positioning portion 103f is provided at each of three locations at intervals in the rotational direction of the pack-side shutter 103 (circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC). The structure is such that when the toner pack 100 is mounted on the mounting portion 106, the radial positioning portion 103f of the pack-side shutter 10 abuts on the inner peripheral surface 109h of the apparatus-side shutter 109 so that the position of the toner pack 100 in the radial direction r is determined.
The nozzle 102 in this embodiment is a component provided with a passage through which the toner passes and a discharge opening 102a for discharging the toner through the nozzle 102. A cross-sectional area of the passage of the nozzle 102 through which the toner passes may be smaller, larger, or even as goes toward the discharge opening 102a. The cross-sectional area and length of the passage of the nozzle 102 may be appropriately changed depending on the toner discharging property and the like, and therefore, they are not limited. In addition, the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 does not have to be the most downstream opening from which the toner is discharged from the toner pack 100. The toner discharged from the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 may be discharged to the outside of the toner pack 100 after passing through a passage of a member different from the nozzle 102.
The pack-side shutter 103 may be a rotatable member including a driven transmission portion 103e and always opening the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 regardless of the rotation position. In such a case, the structure may be such that the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 is closed by a seal when the toner pack 100 is not mounted to the mounting portion 106, and the seal is removed by the mounting operation to the mounting portion 106 or after the mounting of the toner pack 100. Furthermore, the toner pack 100 may not be provided with a pack side shutter 103.

(Restriction releasing portion of toner pack)

Referring to Figures 16 to 21, the restriction releasing portion 104 will be described. As shown in Figure 16, the toner pack 100 is oriented so that the side of the second end portion (the side of the nozzle 102) of the toner pack 100 is below the side of the first end portion (the side of the toner accommodating portion). Or, the toner pack 100 is oriented so that at least a part of the nozzle 102 is below the accommodating portion 101 and the rotational axis A is in the vertical direction. This attitude is an attitude for mounting on the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1. At this time, in part (a) of Figure 18 and part (a) of Figure 19, the arrow N direction is downward and the arrow U direction is upward.
The nozzle 102 is provided with a projecting portion 102b (projecting portion, engaging portion) which projects (projects) in the arrow N direction (downward) beyond the end surface 103c of the pack side shutter 103 in the arrow N direction. As shown in part (a) of Figure 18, the projecting portion 102b is a cylindrical portion (a portion including a cylindrical shape) centered on the rotational axis A. The projecting portion 102b has a projecting portion end surface 102b2 which is a lower end surface. The projecting portion end surface 102b2 is provided with a hole defined by an inner peripheral surface 102b1 (inner peripheral guide surface) centered on the rotational axis A. The projecting portion 102b projects downward beyond the end surface 103c of the pack-side shutter 103 provided below the discharge opening 102a. Further, as shown in Figure 17, the projecting portion 102b projects downward beyond a lower end surface 102j of the nozzle 102. In this embodiment, the end surface 103c of the pack-side shutter 103 and the end surface 102j of the nozzle 102 are end surfaces perpendicular to the rotational axis A, but are not limited to such a structure. These surfaces may be any surface extending in a direction crossing the rotational axis A as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A.
The outer peripheral surface 102b3 of the projecting portion 102b is provided with a restriction releasing portion 104 including a first restriction releasing portion 104a (first projection) and a second restriction releasing portion 104b (second projection). The first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second restriction releasing portion 104b have a symmetric shape with respect to the rotational axis A. That is, as shown in Figure 20, the second restriction releasing portion 104b is on the opposite side of the first restriction releasing portion 104a with respect to the rotational axis A in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A. In other words, the second restriction releasing portion 104b has a shape which is rotationally 180-degree symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A of the first restriction releasing portion 104a.
The first restriction releasing portion 104a includes a first slope 104a1 (first engaging surface, downward surface, downward guide surface, downward force applying surface, downward push surface) and a second slope 104a2 (second engaging surface upward surface, upward guide surface). The first slope 104a1 is below the second slope 104a2 and overlaps with the second slope 104a2 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A. As shown in part (a) of Figure 18, the first slope 104a1 is a surface which extends so as to go in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the rotational direction K (predetermined rotational direction, first rotational direction, first circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC) about the rotational axis A and which faces in the arrow N direction (downward).
On the other hand, the second slope 104a2 is a surface extending so as to go in the arrow N direction (downward) as goes in the rotational direction K about the rotational axis A, and is a surface facing the arrow U direction (upward). In other words, the second slope 104a2 is a surface extending so as to go in the arrow U direction as goes in the rotational direction L (second rotational direction, the second circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC) about the rotational axis A and facing in the arrow U direction. A cavity 104a3 is provided above (directly above) the second slope 104a2.
The downstream end of the first slope 104a1 and the downstream end of the second slope 104a2 in the rotational direction K are continuous with each other. That is, the downstream end of the first slope 104a1 and the downstream end of the second slope 104a2 in the rotational direction K are at the same position in the rotational direction D. In other words, the downstream end of the first slope 104a1 and the downstream end of the second slope 104a2 are in overlapping positions as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A.
In other words, there is a connecting portion which connects the downstream end of the first slope 104a1 in the rotational direction K and an upstream end of the second slope 104a2 in the rotational direction L.
As shown in Figure 21, as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A (first direction D1), the first slope 104a1 extends so as to go up (arrow U direction) as goes in an arrow J direction (predetermined direction) perpendicular to the rotational axis A. The second slope 104a2 extends so as to go down (arrow N direction) as goes in the direction of arrow J (predetermined direction) perpendicular to the axis of rotation A.
The ridge line 104a5 of the first slope 104a1 also extends such that it goes in the direction of the arrow U as goes in the direction of the arrow J perpendicular to the rotational axis A. The ridge line 104a4 of the second slope 104a2 also extends such that it goes in the direction of the arrow N as goes in the direction of the arrow J perpendicular to the rotational axis A. The ridge line described here is a boundary line between surfaces. The ridge line 104a5 is a boundary line between the first slope 104a1 and the outer peripheral surface of the first restriction releasing portion 104a. The ridge line 104a4 is a boundary line between the second slope 104a2 and the outer peripheral surface of the first restriction releasing portion 104a.
As shown in Figure 20, the second restriction releasing portion 104b has a first slope 104b1 (downward surface) and a second slope 104b2 (upward surface). A cavity 104b3 is provided above the second slope 104b2. The first slope 104b1, the second slope 104b2, and the cavity 104b3 have the same structures as the first slope 104a1, the second slope 104a2, and the cavity 104a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 104a, respectively, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Figure 22 is a cross-sectional view of the projecting portion 102b taken along a line X33-X33 in Figure 21. Figure 22 shows the second slope 104a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second slope 104b2 of the second restriction releasing portion 104b as viewed from above. In Figure 22, it is understood that both the second slope 104a2 and the second slope 104b2 extend along the rotational direction of the pack-side shutter 103 (the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A).
Further, as shown in Figure 21, the arrow J direction is parallel to the arrow R direction (second direction) which is the normal direction of the surface 102d1 and the surface 102d2. And, in part (b) of Figure 18, a straight line Q passing through the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second restriction releasing portion 104b extends in the direction crossing the arrow R direction.
As shown in Figure 21, in the direction of arrow R, the positions of the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second restriction releasing portion 104b are between the position of the surface 102d1 and the position of the surface 102d2 of the positioned portion 102d. That is, as viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A (arrow R direction), the positions of the first slope 104a1 and the second slope 104a2 are both between the position of the surface 102d1 and the position of the surface 102d2 in the direction of the arrow R. Viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A (arrow R direction), the positions of the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second restriction releasing portion 104b overlap with the positions of the recess 102e in the arrow R direction.
It is desirable that the inclination angles of the first slope 104a1 and the second slope 104a2 with respect to the rotational axis A are in the range of 45 ° ± 15 °. In addition, in this embodiment, a length of the first slope 104a1 in the direction of the rotational axis A is about 2 mm, a length of the second slope 104a2 is about 3 mm, and a length of the second slope 104a2 is larger than that of the first slope 104a1.
The first slope 104a1, the second slope 104a2, and the cavity 104a3 are exposed to the outside of the toner pack 100 so that the rotation restricting mechanism 112 of the mounting portion 106 can be accessed. Further, the projecting portion 102b does not necessarily have to be provided on the nozzle 102.

(Mounting toner pack to mounting portion)

Referring to Figures 23 to 29, a mechanism for releasing the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 109 by the rotation restricting mechanism 112 described in the foregoing by mounting the toner pack 100 on the mounting portion 106 will be described.
Part (a) of Figure 23 is a perspective view of the toner pack 100 and the mounting portion 106 while the toner pack 100 is being mounted on the mounting portion 106. Part (b) of Figure 23 is a perspective view of the toner pack 100 and the mounting portion 106 as viewed from a point different from that in part (a) of Figure 23. Figure 24 is a sectional view taken along a line parallel to the rotational axis A (rotational axis B) in a state in which the toner pack 100 is further moved from the state of Figure 23 in the mounting direction. Part (a) of Figure 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X4-X4 in Figure 24. Part (b) of Figure 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X5-X5 in Figure 24. Part (a) of Figure 26 is a sectional view taken along a line X6-X6 in Figure 24. Part (a) of Figure 26 to 26 (d) are sectional views illustrating a process of mounting the toner pack 100 on the mounting portion 106. Part (a) of Figure 27 is a sectional view taken along a line X7-X7 in part (d) of Figure 26. Part (b) of Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X8-X8 in part (a) of Figure 27.
In Figure 24, Figure 25, and part (b) of Figure 27, the cut surfaces of the pack-side shutter 103 and the cover 110 are shaded for better illustration. Further, in Figure 26, the pack side shutter 103, the restricting member 113, and the releasing member 114 are shown in side views, and the members other than them are shown in sectional views. Further, in Figure 27, the cut surfaces of the cover 110, the restricting member 113, and the releasing member 114 are shaded for better illustration.
As shown in Figure 23, the toner pack 100 with the pack-side shutter 103 in the closed position is moved in the mounting direction M relative to the mounting portion 106 with the apparatus-side shutter 109 in the closed position. At this time, as viewed in the mounting direction M the pack-side shutter 103 is positioned in the rotational direction, to effect alignment between the positions of the recess 102e of the nozzle 102 (opening 103a of the pack-side shutter 103) and the positioning portion 107a of the first frame 107. At the same time, the pack-side shutter 103 is positioned in the rotational direction, to effect alignment between the positions of the driven transmission portion 103e of the pack-side shutter 103 and the drive transmission portion 108a of the operating lever 108 in the rotational direction of the pack-side shutter 103.
After the positioning described above, the toner pack 100 is moved in the mounting direction M and mounted on the mounting portion 106, then, as shown in Figure 24, the inner peripheral surface 102b1 of the projecting portion 102b of the nozzle 102 is fitted (engaged) around a small diameter portion 109d2 of the center boss 109d of the apparatus-side shutter 109. By this, the position of the nozzle 102 in the radial direction relative to the apparatus-side shutter 109 below the nozzle 102 (downstream side in the mounting direction M) is determined. The inner peripheral surface 102b1 of the projecting portion 102b does not necessarily have to be structured to fit with the center boss 109d, and may be structured so as not to interfere with the center boss 109d. As shown in part (a) of Figure 25, the drive transmission portion 108a (lever projection) of the operating lever 108 and the driven transmission portion 103e (rotatable member recess portion) of the pack side shutter 103 engage with each other. At the same time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 25, the side surface 1 10f and the side surface 110g of the cover 110 become close to the surfaces 102e1 and 102e2 forming the recess 102e (nozzle recess) of the nozzle 102, respectively. Further, the driven transmission portion 103e (rotatable member recess portion) of the pack-side shutter 103 engages with the driven transmission portion 109e (shutter projection) of the apparatus-side shutter 109. By this, the rotational axis A of the pack-side shutter 103 and the rotational axis B of the apparatus-side shutter 109 become substantially coaxial. The operating lever 108, the pack-side shutter 103, and the apparatus-side shutter 109 are substantially integrally rotatable relative to the first frame 107 (base frame 2) and the nozzle 102 in the rotation about the rotational axis A (rotational axis B). Specifically, when the operating lever 108 is rotated, the drive transmission portion 108a of the operating lever 108 presses the surface 103b1 or 103b2 of the pack side shutter 103, so that the pack side shutter 103 is rotated. Thereafter, the surface 103b 1 or the surface 103b2 of the pack-side shutter 103 presses the driven transmission portion 109e of the apparatus-side shutter 109 to rotate the apparatus-side shutter 109.
Here, if the apparatus-side shutter 109 rotates from the closed position to the open position due to vibration during transportation of the image forming apparatus 1, the position of the driven transmission portion 109e of the apparatus-side shutter 109 deviates in the rotational direction. Then, when the toner pack 100 is to be mounted on the mounting portion 106, what happens is as follows. When the driven transmission portion 103e of the pack-side shutter 103 engages with the drive transmission portion 108a of the operating lever 108, and thereafter the toner pack 100 is further moved in the mounting direction M, it cannot engage with the driven transmission portion 109e of the apparatus-side shutter 109. Therefore, the toner pack 100 cannot be moved to the mounting complete position relative to the mounting portion 106. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, a rotation restricting mechanism 112 of the shutter 109 on the apparatus-side is provided.
Here, a mechanism will be described in which the rotation restricting mechanism 112 of the mounting portion 106 is released by mounting the toner pack 100 to the mounting portion 106. Hereinafter, the second restriction releasing portion 104b functions in the same manner as the first restriction releasing portion 104a, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
At the time of the state of part (a) of Figure 26, the first restriction releasing portion 104a of the nozzle 102 and the releasing claw 114e of the releasing member 114 are not yet in contact with each other. When the toner pack 100 is further moved in the arrow N direction (mounting direction M) from this position, as shown in part (b) of Figure 26, the first slope 104a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the releasing claw 114e are brought into contact with each other. When the toner pack 100 is further moved in the direction of arrow N from this position, the releasing member 114 is rotated in the rotational direction D by a force F5 received by the releasing claw 114e from the first slope 104a1 against the moment M2 (urging force) applied by the release spring 116. At this time, the first slope 104a1 guides the releasing claw 114e so that the releasing member 114 is rotated in the rotational direction D. The releasing member 114 rotates in the rotational direction D until the releasing claw 114e passes the downstream end of the first slope 104a1 in the rotational direction D. The rotation of the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction D is the first step described above. That is, as shown in part (a) of Figure 15, this is a step in which the rise restricted surface 114c of the restriction member lifted causes the releasing member 114 to rotate in the rotational direction D against the urging force of the release spring 116 until the it reaches a position where it does not contact the rise restricting surface 110e of the cover 110.
After the first step, the releasing claw 114e rides on the downstream end of the second slope 104a2 in the rotational direction D. In other words, after the first step, the releasing claw 114e rides on the upstream end of the second slope 104a2 in the rotational direction E. At this time, as shown in part (c) of Figure 26, the releasing claw 114e is contacted by the second slope 104a2 of the nozzle 102 by the moment M2 (urging force) provided by the release spring 116 to receive a force F6. Then, by the arrow G direction component F6a of the force F6, the releasing member 114 is moved (guided) in the arrow G direction (upward) along the second slope 104a2 and at the same time rotates in the rotational direction E about the rotational axis A. That is, the rotational direction of the releasing member 114 changes from the rotational direction D to the direction E at the connecting portion where the downstream end of the first slope 104a1 in the rotational direction D and the upstream end of the second slope 104a2 in the rotational direction E are connected. In addition, the second slope 104a2 guides the releasing claw 114e so that the releasing member 114 is moved upward. The second slope 104a2 guides the releasing claw 114e so that the releasing member 114 is moved upward while being rotated in the rotational direction E.
The movement of the releasing member 114 in the arrow G direction (upward) and the rotation in the rotational direction E are the second steps described in the foregoing. Here, as described above, in the second step, the restricting member 113 moves in the arrow G direction together with the releasing member 114. As shown in part (a) of Figure 15, at least one of the contact surfaces 114f (pair) of the releasing member 114 is rotationally moved until it comes into contact with one of the second contact surfaces 110b of the corresponding cover 110, thus reaching the mounting completion position shown in part (d) of Figure 26 and Figure 27. As shown in part (d) of Figure 26, when the contact surface 114f of the releasing member abuts to the second contact surface 110b of the cover 110, a part of the releasing claw 114e enters the cavity 104a3 above (directly above) the second slope 104a2.
As described above, by mounting the toner pack 100 on the mounting portion 106, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 112 of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is released through the first step and the second step described above.
When the toner pack 100 is in the mounting complete position, as shown in Figure 27, the projecting portion end surface 102b2 of the projecting portion 102b of the nozzle 102 is in contact with the pack contact surface 109g of the apparatus-side shutter 109. By this, the position of the nozzle 102 (toner pack 100) in the direction of the rotational axis A (mounting direction M) is determined with respect to the mounting portion 106. In addition, three points of the radial positioning portion 103f (Figures 18 and 20) of the pack side shutter 103 are in contact with the inner peripheral surface 109h (Figure 7) of the apparatus-side shutter 109. By this, the positions of the nozzle 102 and the pack-side shutter 103 (toner pack 100) in the radial direction on the upstream side in the mounting direction M are determined.
The sectional view of X10-X10 in part (a) of Figure 27 is the same as that in part (a) of Figure 15, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. As shown in part (b) of Figure 27, which is a cross-section of X8-X8 in part (a) of Figure 27, the positioning portion 107a of the first frame 107 is engaged with the positioned portion 102d of the nozzle 102 having the surfaces 102d1 and 102d2. Therefore, the nozzle 102 is positioned relative to the first frame 107 (base frame 2) in the arrow R direction of the surfaces 102d1 and 102d2. As shown in Figure 26, the arrow R direction is substantially parallel to the locus V in which the releasing claw 114e rotates in the rotational direction D when the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the releasing claw 114e come into contact with each other. By this, the position of the nozzle 102 is determined relative to the first frame 107 in the direction of the arrow R, And therefore, the operation of releasing the rotation restriction relative to the apparatus-side shutter 109 can be further stabilized.
By the mechanism described above, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 112 of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is released, and the apparatus-side shutter 109 is enabled to rotate from the closed position to the release position. When the pair of contact surfaces 114f abut on the pair of second contact surfaces 1 10b, the releasing member 114 is vigorously rotated by the moment M2, so that a light collision sound is produced and at the same time, the user's hand holding the toner pack 100 feels the reaction. That is, the user can recognize that the locking of the shutter 109 on the apparatus-side has been released by the collision sound and the reaction. When the toner pack 100 is dismounted from the mounting portion 106, the reverse process of Figure 26 is carried out, and the apparatus-side shutter 109 is again restricted by the rotation restricting mechanism 112.

(Lever operation)

As described above, In the state in the toner pack 100 is mounted on the mounting portion 106, the operating lever 108, the pack side shutter 103, and the apparatus-side shutter 109 rotate integrally about the rotational axis A (rotational axis B).
Here, part (a) of Figure 28 is a perspective view of the toner pack 100 at the time when the operating lever 108 is in the closed position, as viewed from above. Part (b) of Figure 28 is a perspective view of the toner pack 100 at the time when the operating lever 108 is in the open position, as viewed from above.
As shown in Figure 28, when the operating portion 108b of the operating lever 108 is rotated in the rotational direction D after the mounting of the toner pack 100 to the mounting portion 106 is completed, the shutter 109 on the apparatus-side is rotated from the closed position to the open position, and the pack side shutter 103 rotates from the closed position to the open position.
When the pack-side shutter 103 rotates from the closed position to the open position, the frictional force F7 received by the nozzle 102 from the pack-side shutter 103 by way of the pack-side seal 105 is directed in the arrow K direction as shown in part (a) of Figure 18. This is the same direction as the rotational direction D of the operating lever 108 in Figure 28. The nozzle 102 receives the frictional force F7 and rotates between the surfaces 102d1 and 102d2, and the positioning portion 107a of the first frame 107, by the amount of the engagement play (play) in the arrow K direction., the rotational direction of the nozzle 102 at this time is such that the second slope 104a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 104a approaches the releasing claw 114e of the releasing member 114, and such that the second slope 104b2 of the second restriction releasing portion 104b approaches the releasing member 114. That is, when the operating lever 108 is rotated to rotate the pack-side shutter 103 from the closed position to the open position, the restricting member 113 moves upward (in the direction opposite to the mounting direction M) together with the releasing member 114. Then, the second restricted surface 113c of the restricting member 113 is separated upward from the restricted rib 109c of the apparatus-side shutter 109, and the margin for releasing the rotation restriction is increased. Therefore, it is possible to more stably maintain the state in which the rotation restriction for the apparatus-side shutter 109 is released.
By the above-described operation, the toner pack 100 accommodating portion 101 and the toner accommodating chamber 36 are rotated in fluid communication with each other through the discharge opening 102a, the receiving opening 109a, and the apparatus-side opening 117a.
Here, part (a) of Figure 29 is a sectional view of the toner pack 100 and the mounting portion 106 when both the apparatus-side shutter 109 and the pack-side shutter 103 are in the respective closed positions. Part (b) of Figure 29 is a sectional view of the toner pack 100 and the mounting portion 106 when both the apparatus-side shutter 109 and the pack-side shutter 103 are in the respective open positions.
In part (a) of Figure 29, the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 is closed by the pack side shutter 103, the pack side seal 105, and by the apparatus-side shutter 109, and the toner in the accommodating portion 101 cannot reach the apparatus-side opening 117a of the second frame 117. On the other hand, in part (b) of Figure 29, the discharge opening 102a of the nozzle 102 is opened by moving the pack-side shutter 103, the pack-side seal 105, and the apparatus-side shutter 109. Therefore, the toner in the accommodating portion 101 is compressed by the user compressing the accommodating portion 101, the toner in the accommodating portion 101 reaches the apparatus-side opening 117a of the second frame 117 together with the air through the discharge opening 102a, and the toner is supplied into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32 through the side opening 117a.

(Modified Example 1)

In this embodiment, the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second restriction releasing portion 104b are provided on the outer peripheral surface 102b3 of the projecting portion 102b of the nozzle 102. However, the following structure may be employed instead.
First, as shown in part (a) of Figure 30, a projecting portion 1020b is provided with a restriction releasing portion 1040a corresponding to the first restriction releasing portion 104a of Embodiment 1. However, there is not provided a portion corresponding to the second restriction releasing portion 104b.
Second, as shown in part (b) of Figure 30, the projecting portion 1021b is provided with a restriction releasing portion 1040b corresponding to the second restriction releasing portion 104b of Embodiment 1. However, there is not provided a portion corresponding to the first restriction releasing portion 104a.

(Modified Example 2)

In this embodiment, the first restriction releasing portion 104a is provided with the first slope 104a1 and the second slope 104a2, and the second restriction releasing portion 104b has a sheet which is rotationally symmetric with the first restriction releasing portion 104a about the rotational axis A. However, the following structure may be used instead.
First, as shown in part (a) of Figure 31, although the first restriction releasing portion 1041a is provided with a second slope 1014a2 corresponding to the second slope 104a2 of Embodiment 1, it does not have a slope corresponding to the first slope 104a1 of Embodiment 1. Further, although the second restriction releasing portion 1041b has a first slope 1041b1 corresponding to the first slope 104a1 of Embodiment 1, it does not have a slope corresponding to the second slope 104a2 of Embodiment 1.
Second, as shown in part (b) of Figure 31, although the first restriction releasing portion 1042a has a first slope 1042a1 of Embodiment 1, It does not have a slope corresponding to the second slope 104a2 of Embodiment 1. Further, although the second restriction releasing portion 1042b has a second slope 1042b2 corresponding to the second slope 104a2 of Embodiment 1, it does not have a slope corresponding to the first slope 104a1 of Embodiment 1.

(Modified Example 3)

In this embodiment, the projecting portion 102b is provided with the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second restriction releasing portion 104b on the outer peripheral surface 102b3 of the cylindrical portion having the hole with the inner peripheral surface 102b1 on the projecting portion end surface 102b2. However, the following structure may be employed instead.
As shown in Figure 32, it has a projecting portion 1023b including no wall surface (wall surface corresponding to the outer peripheral surface 102b3) connecting between a first restriction releasing portion 1043a and a second restriction releasing portion 1043b. The first restriction releasing portion 1043a is a first projection including a first slope 1043a1 and a second slope 1043a2 corresponding to the first slope 104a1 and the second slope 104a2 of Embodiment 1, respectively, and is a first projection projecting downward. The second restriction releasing portion 1043b has a first slope 1043b1 and a second slope 1043b2 corresponding to the first slope 104b1 and the second slope 104b2 of Embodiment 1, respectively, and is a second projection projecting downward. There is provided a space between the first restriction releasing portion 1043a and the second restriction releasing portion 1043b.

(Modified Example 4)

As shown in part (a) of Figure 33, two round shaft-shaped bosses may be used as the first restriction releasing portion 1044a and the second restriction releasing portion 1044b, respectively. As viewed in the axial direction of the first restriction releasing portion 1044a, as shown in part (b) of Figure 33, a Y axis extending in the direction of the rotational axis A (arrow U direction) and an X-axis extending in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A are defined with the axis of the first restriction releasing portion 1044a as an origin. Of the four quadrants separated by the X-axis and the Y-axis, the outer peripheral surface of the first restriction releasing portion 1044a in the fourth quadrant is the first slope 1044a1, and the outer peripheral surface of the first restriction releasing portion 1044a in the first quadrant is the second slope 1044a2. The same applies to the second restriction releasing portion 1044b. Therefore, the same effects as those of this embodiment can be provided.

(Modified Example 5)

As shown in part (a) of Figure 34, the toner pack 1050 in which the nozzle 1025 is bent into an L shape may be used. The accommodating portion 1015 has a structure extending in a direction intersecting the rotational axis A of the pack-side shutter 1035.
Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 34, the toner pack 1052 in which the accommodating portion 10151 of the toner pack 1051 hangs down may be used.

(Modified Example 6)

In this embodiment, the first restriction releasing portion 104a and the second restriction releasing portion 104b are fixed to the nozzle 102, but they may be movable. In this modified example, as shown in part (a) of Figure 35, The structure is such that when the toner pack 1060 is not mounted on the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1, the first restriction releasing portion 1046a is accommodated inside (inner peripheral surface 1026b1 side) the outer peripheral surface 1026b3 of the projecting portion 1026b. And, The structure is such that in the process of mounting the toner pack 1060 on the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1 or by the user's operation, the first restriction releasing portion 1046a projects to the outside of the imaginary circle VC of the outer peripheral surface 1026b3 of the projecting portion 1026b in the radial direction r.
As an example of the structure in which the first restriction releasing portion 1046a projects outward in the radial direction r in the process of mounting the toner pack 1060 on the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1, when the center boss 109d of the apparatus-side shutter 109 is inserted inside the inner peripheral surface 1026b1 of the projecting portion 1026b, the first restriction releasing portion 1046a is pushed by the center boss 109d to project outward beyond the outer peripheral surface 1026b3 in the radial direction. The same structure as that of the first restriction releasing portion 1046a can be applied to the second restriction releasing portion 1046b.

(Modified Example 7)

The structure may be such that when the toner pack 1070 is not mounted to the image forming apparatus 1, the projecting portion 1027b does not project from the end surface 1037c of the pack side shutter 1037, and the projecting portion 1027b project in the direction of the arrow N beyond the end surface 1037c in the process of mounting the toner pack to the image forming apparatus 1. That is, the projecting portion 1027b may be movable so as to take a projected position (projection position) as shown in part (b) of Figure 36 in which it projects (projects) in the arrow N direction beyond the end surface 1037c and the retracted position as shown in part (a) of Figure 36 in which it is retracted in the U direction from the projecting position (Figure 36). The projecting portion 1027b may be structured not to project from the end surface 1037c in the retracted position. In such a case, user may manually move the projecting portion 1027b to the projection position and to the retracted position.

(Modified Example 8)

As shown in part (a) of Figure 37, in a state in which the toner pack 1080 is not mounted to the image forming apparatus 1, the first restriction releasing portion 1048a is a linear rib extending in the direction of the rotational axis A and has only a surface extending in the direction of the axis A. The first restriction releasing portion 1048a has a rotation center 1048a3 at a position between one end and the other end in the direction of the rotational axis A. The structure may be such that during or before the process of mounting on the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1, the rib is moved (rotated) by the user about the rotation center 1048a3 so as to provide a first slope 1048a1 corresponding to the first slope 104a1 of Embodiment 1 and a second slope 1048a2 corresponding to the second slope 104a2 of Embodiment 1, as shown in part (b) of Figure 37.

(Modified Example 9)

In this embodiment, the nozzle 102 and the projecting portion 102b are integral with each other, but these may be separate members. That is, as shown in Figure 38, it may be a mounting kit including a toner pack 1090 accommodating the toner and an attachment 1090b, and may be a mounting kit for mounting to image forming mounting.
The toner pack 1090 has the same structure as that of Embodiment 1 except that the portion corresponding to the projecting portion 102b of Embodiment 1 is not provided, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
The attachment 1090b has a cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface 1029a3 centered on the central axis Z. The attachment 1090b is provided with a first restriction releasing portion 1049a and a second restriction releasing portion 1049b on the outer peripheral surface 1029a3 when the central axis Z is oriented in the vertical direction (gravity direction). The first restriction releasing portion 1049ahas an upward facing surface 1049a2 which faces upward and goes downward as goes in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface 1029a3 (the first circumferential direction KZ of the imaginary circle VCZ centered on the central axis Z). In other words, the upward surface 1049a2 is configured to extend so as to go up as goes in the second circumferential direction LZ, which is the opposite direction of the first circumferential direction KZ of the imaginary circle VCZ and to face upward 61806180. The attachment 1090b also has a downward surface 1049a1 structured to face downward and to extend so as to go up as goes in the circumferential direction (first circumferential direction KZ) of the outer peripheral surface 1029b3. Further, it has a connecting portion 1049a23 which connects the upstream end of the upward surface 1049a2 in the second circumferential direction LZ and the downstream end of the downward surface 1049a1 in the first circumferential direction KZ.
The attachment 1090b may be structured to be mountable to the bottom surface of the nozzle 1029 of the toner pack 1090 (bottom surface of the toner pack 1090). Further, the attachment 1090b may be structured not to be mounted to the toner pack 1090. That is, the attachment 1090b is first mounted to the mounting portion 106 of the image forming apparatus 1, so that the rotation restriction of the shutter 109 on the apparatus side is released. Then, after mounting the attachment 1090b, the toner pack 1090 is mounted on the mounting portion 106. The mechanism by which the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 109 by the rotation restricting mechanism 112 is released by mounting the attachment 1090b to the mounting portion 106 is the same as the case in which the toner pack 100 is mounted on the mounting portion 106, and therefore, the explanation therefor is omitted.
Finally, a minute uneven surface formed by finely and alternately repeating a surface parallel to or perpendicular to the rotational axis A as shown in Figure 39 will be described. In the case that an envelope S of the uneven surface extends in the same direction as the second slope 104a2 of the base embodiment or any of the modified examples, it can be regarded as the first slope 104a1 or the second slope 104a2 of Embodiment 1. The same applies to Embodiment 2 and the modified examples of Embodiment 2 described below.

Referring to Figures 40 to 71, the structure of Embodiment 2 will be described. The same points as in the above-described embodiment will be omitted. Of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiment 1 are assigned the same names as the members of Embodiment 1, and only the points different from those of Embodiment 1 will be described.

(Toner pack mounting portion))

Referring to Figures 40 to 45, the structure of the mounting portion 206 will be described. In this embodiment, the mounting portion 206 is a unit for mounting the toner pack 220.
Part (a) of Figure 40 is an exploded perspective view of a mounting portion 206. Part (b) of Figure 40 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting portion 206 as viewed in a direction different from that of part (a) of Figure 40. Part (a) of Figure 41 and part (a) of Figure 42 are a perspective view illustrating the appearance of the mounting portion 206, and a view as seen in the mounting direction M (direction of the rotational axis B), when the operating lever 208 is in the closed position, respectively. Part (b) of Figure 41 and part (b) of Figure 42 are a perspective view illustrating the appearance of the mounting portion 206, and a view as seen in the mounting direction M (the direction of the rotational axis B), when the operating lever 208 is in the open position, as viewed in the mounting direction M, respectively. Figure 43 is a perspective view of the mounting portion 206 as viewed from the downstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (a) of Figure 44 is a perspective view of the apparatus-side shutter 209 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 44 is a perspective view of the apparatus-side shutter 209 as viewed from a point different from that of part (a) of Figure 44. Part (c) of Figure 44 is a top view of an apparatus-side shutter 209 as viewed in the mounting direction M. Part (a) of Figure 45 is a perspective view of a cover 210 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 45 is a perspective view of the cover 210 as viewed from the downstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (c) of Figure 45 is a top view of the cover 210 as viewed in the mounting direction M. Part (d) of Figure 45 is a bottom view of the cover 210 as viewed in the mounting direction M. Part (e) of Figure 45 is a side view of the cover 210 as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the mounting direction M.
The mounting portion 206 shown in Figures 40 and 41 is provided with a base frame 221 including a first frame 207, a second frame 217, and a cover 210. The cover 210 and the second frame 217 are fixed to the first frame 207. A first filter 218 having a predetermined air flow rate is mounted to an air hole 207c of the first frame 207. Further, a second filter 219 having a predetermined air flow rate is also mounted to the second frame 217. As shown in Figure 45, the cover 210 is provided with an engaged portion 210h which engages with an engaging portion 207b (see part (b) of Figure 40 of the first frame 207 so that the cover 210 does not move relative to the first frame 207. The first frame 207, the cover 210, and the second frame 217 may be an integral member instead of separate members. As shown in Figures 40 and 43, the second frame 217 is provided with an apparatus-side opening 217a (frame opening, receiving opening), and the apparatus-side opening 217a is in fluid communication with a toner accommodating chamber 36 (second accommodating portion) of the developing device 30 (see part (a) of Figure 1). The mounting portion 206 and the toner accommodating chamber 36 form a toner accommodating unit.
As shown in Figure 41, the operating lever 208 and the apparatus-side shutter 209 (second shutter) are rotatable about the rotational axis B (central axis) relative to the base frame 221 in the rotational direction D (first rotation) and in the rotational direction E (second rotational direction). The rotational direction E is opposite to the direction of the rotational direction D.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 40, the first frame 207 is provided with a positioning portion 207a. The positioning portion 207a projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the first frame 207 centered on the rotational axis B in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis B. In addition, the operating lever 208 is provided with a drive transmission portion 208a (lever projection) and an operating portion 208b. The drive transmission portion 208a is provided with a slit 208c. The drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208 is a projection projecting inward from the inner peripheral surface 208d centering on the rotational axis B of the operating lever 208 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis B.
As shown in Figure 44, the apparatus-side shutter 209 is a cylindrical member provided with an open top end, a bottom surface 209b, and on the apparatus-side lateral portion having an inner peripheral surface 209h (radial positioning) centered on the rotational axis B. The bottom surface 209b is provided with a center boss 209d (positioning shaft, shaft portion) and a restricted rib 209c (rotation restricted portion). A receiving opening 209a (second shutter opening, apparatus-side shutter opening) and a driven transmission portion 209e (pushed portion, shutter projection) are provided on the apparatus-side shutter lateral portion of the apparatus-side shutter 209. The center boss 209d has a pack contact surface 209g (positioning in the mounting direction) facing upward.
The center boss 209d is a shaft having a central axis of the rotational axis B, and projects above the bottom surface 209b (in the direction opposite to the mounting direction M). As shown in part (c) of Figure 44, the restricted rib 209c is provided outside the center boss 209d in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis B. As shown in part (a) of Figure 44 and part (b) of Figure 44, the restricted rib 209c projects upward from the bottom surface 209b in the direction of the rotational axis B. As shown in part (c) of Figure 44, the driven transmission portion 209e is a projection which projects inward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC. In addition, the driven transmission portion 209e is provided outside the restricted rib 209c in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC. As shown in part (b) of Figure 41, an apparatus-side seal 211 is mounted around the receiving opening 209a.
Here, the apparatus-side shutter 209 is movable relative to the base frame 221 between a closed position in which the receiving opening 209a is closed by the apparatus-side seal 211 and the cover 210, and an open position in which said receiving opening is not closed by the cover 210 and is opened. As shown in part (a) of Figure 41 and part (a) of Figure 42 , the closed position is such that the receiving opening 209a of the apparatus-side shutter 209 and the apparatus-side opening 217a of the second frame 217 shown in Figure 43 are not in fluid communication with each other. As shown in part (b) of Figure 41 and part (b) of Figure 42, the open position is a fluid communication position in which the receiving opening 209a of the apparatus-side shutter 209 and the apparatus-side opening 217a of the second frame 217 are in fluid communication with each other. As the apparatus-side shutter 209 rotates in the rotational direction D from the closed position (non-communication position) to the open position (communication position), the toner of the developing device 30 is enabled to replenish (supply) the toner into the accommodating chamber 36 from the toner pack 220 by way of the receiving opening 209a. When the apparatus-side shutter 209 rotates in the rotational direction E from the open position to the closed position, it becomes impossible to supply toner from the toner pack 220 into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developing device 30 by way of the receiving opening 209a.
The operating lever 208 and the apparatus-side shutter 209 are not directly engaged with each other, and therefore, the apparatus-side shutter 209 does not rotate even if the operating lever 208 is operated without the toner pack 220 mounted.

(Device side shutter rotation restriction mechanism)

As shown in Figure 40, the mounting portion 206 of the image forming apparatus 1 includes a rotation restricting mechanism 212 having a restricting member 213, a releasing member 214, a restricting spring 215, and a releasing spring 216.
Referring to Figures 46 to 50, The rotation restricting mechanism 212 will be described. In Figures 49 and 50, the cut surfaces of the cover 210, the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 are shaded for better illustration.
It may happen that when the toner pack 220 is not mounted on the mounting portion 206, the apparatus-side shutter 209 is rotated more than a predetermined amount from the closed position to the open position by an impact (vibration) during distribution of the image forming apparatus 1 or by an erroneous operation by the user. If it happened, it might be difficult for the user to mount the toner pack 220 on the mounting portion 206 when using the image forming apparatus 1. Details on this point will be described hereinafter. In view of this, the image forming apparatus 1 of this embodiment is provided with a rotation restricting mechanism 212 in order to restrict the rotation of the shutter 209 on the apparatus side from the closed position to the open position.
Part (a) of Figure 46 is a perspective view of a restricting member 213 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 46 is a perspective view of the restricting member 213 as viewed from the downstream side in the mounting direction. Part (a) of Figure 47 is a perspective view of a releasing member 214 as viewed from the upstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (b) of Figure 47 is a top view of the releasing member 214 as viewed in the mounting direction M. Part (c) of Figure 47 is a perspective view of the releasing member 214 as viewed from the downstream side in the mounting direction M. Part (d) of Figure 47 is an enlarged view of a releasing claw 214e of the releasing member 214. Part (a) of Figure 48 is a perspective view of a unit in which the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214 are assembled. Part (b) of Figure 48 is a top view of the unit in which the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214 are assembled as viewed in the mounting direction M. Part (c) of Figure 48 is a sectional view taken along a line X214-X214 in part (b) of Figure 48. Part (d) of Figure 48 is a bottom view of the unit in which the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214 are assembled, as viewed in the mounting direction M. Figure 49 is a sectional view taken along a X201-X201 in part (a) of Figure 42, which is a sectional view taken along a line parallel to the rotational axis B in a state in which the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209 from the closed position to the open position is restricted by the rotation restricting mechanism 212. Part (a) of Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X202-X202 in Figure 49. Part (b) of Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X203-X203 in Figure 49. Part (c) of Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X204-X204 in Figure 49.
As shown in Figure 49, a restricting member 213, a releasing member 214, a restricting spring 215, and a releasing spring 216 are provided inside the apparatus-side shutter 209.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 46 and part (b) of Figure 46, the restricting member 213 is an annular member provided with a central hole 213i centered on the rotational axis B. The restricting member 213 has a function of restricting the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209, which will be described hereinafter. The restricting member has a lower surface 213a, a first contact surface 213b, a second contact surface 213h, a second restricting surface 213c (rotation restriction portion), a contacted surface 213e, a pair of locked surfaces 213f, a release spring engaging portion 213g and a restriction spring engaging portion 213k. The first contact surface 213b and the second contact surface 213h are end surfaces on the downstream side in the rotational direction D of the apparatus-side shutter 209. The second restricting surface 213c is an end surface on the downstream side in the rotational direction E of the apparatus-side shutter 209.
The locked surface 213f is an end surface (upper surface) on the upstream side in the mounting direction M. The lower surface 213a is an end surface (bottom surface) on the downstream side in the mounting direction M. The release spring engaging portion 213g is a projection projecting in the rotational direction E. The restriction spring engaging portion 213k is a recess recessed in the mounting direction M.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 47 and part (b) of Figure 47 , the releasing member 214 (guided member, engaged member) includes a pair of releasing claws 214e (first engaging claws and second engaging claws, a pair of engaged portions) having shapes of 180-degree rotationally symmetry centered on the rotational axis B. The releasing claw 214e extends in the direction opposite to the mounting direction M (upward).
As shown in part (d) of Figure 47, the releasing claw 214e is provided with a first guided portion 214eA (first contacted portion, first engaged portion) and a second guided portion 214eB (second contacted portion, second engaged portion). As shown in part (a) of Figure 47 and part (b) of Figure 47, the second guided portion 214eB is placed at a position which is more remote from the rotational axis B than the first guided portion 214eA in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC downwardly in the direction of the axis of rotation B.
As shown in part (d) of Figure 47, the first guided portion 214eA has a first guided surface 214e1 and a contact surface 214f. The second guided portion 214eB has a contact surface 214a, a second guided surface 214e2 (first engaged surface), and a third guided surface 214e3 (second engaged surface).
As shown in part (b) of Figure 47, the contact surface 214f and the contact surface 214a are end surface s, on the downstream side in the rotational direction E about the rotational axis B, of the releasing claw 214e, and they are at the same positions in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC. The contact surface 214a is placed outside the contact surface 214f in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis B.
The first guided surface 214e1 is placed on the upstream side in the mounting direction M with respect to the contact surface 214f. In other words, the first guided surface 214e1 is placed above any of the contact surface 214f, the second guided surface 214e2, and the third guided surface 214e3. The second guided surface 214e2 is a surface facing upward. The second guided surface 214e2 is placed on the upstream side in the mounting direction M with respect to the contact surface 214a. In other words, the second guided surface 214e2 is placed above the contact surface 214a. The third guided surface 214e3 is a surface facing downward. The third guided surface 214e3 is placed on the downstream side in the mounting direction M with respect to the contact surface 214a. In other words, the third guided surface 214e3 is placed below the contact surface 214a. That is, the second guided surface 214e2 is above the third guided surface 214e3. The contact surface 214a is between the second guided surface 214e2 and the third guided surface 214e3 in the mounting direction (direction of rotational axis B, gravity direction).
The releasing member 214 further includes a pair of rise restricted surfaces 214c (rising restricted portions), a pair of locking surfaces 214d, a release spring engaging portion 214g, and a contact surface 214b.
The pair of rise restricted surfaces 214c and the pair of locking surfaces 214d are arranged so as to be 180 degrees symmetric with respect to the rotational axis B. As shown in part (a) of Figure 47 to part (c) of Figure 47, the rise restricted surface 214c projects outward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC beyond the outer peripheral surface centered on the rotational axis B of the releasing member 214. The locking surface 214d is a surface (a surface facing downward) which projects from the outer peripheral surface of the releasing member 214 in the direction opposite to the mounting direction M and which faces the mounting direction M. The release spring engaging portion 214g is a projection projecting in the rotational direction D. The contact surface 214b is a surface facing upward.
In the state where the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214 are assembled in, as shown in part (a) of Figure 48 and part (c) of Figure 48, the locked surface 213f of the restricting member 213 is directly below the locking surface 214d of the releasing member 214 and faces the locking surface 214d. Therefore, the structure is such that even if an attempt is made to move the restricting member 213 upward, it cannot be moved because the locked surface 213f of the restricting member 213 is locked to the locking surface 214d of the releasing member 214 unless the releasing member 214 is moved upward. As shown in part (c) of Figure 48, the contact surface 214b of the releasing member 214 faces the contacted surface 213e of the restricting member 213. Therefore, when the releasing member 214 is moved upward, the contact surface 214b comes into contact with the contacted surface 213e of the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 and the restricting member 213 can integrally move upward. In addition, as shown in part (b) of Figure 48 and part (d) of Figure 48, between the release spring engaging portion 213g of the restricting member 213 and the release spring engaging portion 214g of the releasing member 214, there is provided a spring 216. Further, the pair of releasing claws 214e project upward through the central hole 213i centered on the rotational axis B of the restricting member 213 beyond the upper surface of the restricting member 213.
As shown in Figure 45, the cover 210 includes a base cover portion 210Aa and a wall portion 210Bb extending upward from the base cover portion 210Aa.
The base cover portion 210Aa includes an upper surface 210i provided with a center hole 210p (cover opening) centered on the rotational axis B and a pair of eave portions 210n, a first contacted surface 210a, and a second contacted surface 210b, a pair of third contacted surfaces 210k, a first restricting surface 210c, a pair of rise restricting surfaces 210e, and a restriction spring engagement portion 210m. The wall portion 210Bb is provided with a side surface 210f, a side surface 210g, and the above-described engaged portion 210h.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 45 and part (d) of Figure 45, the first contacted surface 210a and the second contacted surface 210b are end surfaces on the downstream side in the rotational direction E. The third contacted surface 210k is an end surface on the downstream side in the rotational direction D. An eave portion 210n is provided on the upstream side of the third contacted surface 210k in the mounting direction M. As shown in part (c) of Figure 45, the third contacted surface 210k is structured to be covered by the eave portion 210n as viewed from above in the direction of the rotational axis B so as not to be exposed. The pair of rise restricting surfaces 210e are surfaces facing the downstream side (downward) in the mounting direction M, and as shown in part (e) of Figure 45, they include surfaces which extend so as to go in the mounting direction M (downward) as goes in the rotational direction D. The restriction spring engagement portion 210m is a cylindrical projection projecting in the mounting direction M.
Here, as shown in Figure 49, the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214 are rotatably supported by a large diameter portion 209d1 of the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209. In addition, a part of the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is covered by the upper surface 210i of the cover 210. The center boss 209d is provided coaxially with the rotational axis B of the apparatus-side shutter 209. As shown in Figure 49, a restricting spring 215 (second elastic member, second urging member) is mounted between the cover 210 and the restricting member 213. One end and the other end of the restricting spring 215 are engaged with the restriction spring engagement portion 210m of the cover 210 and the restriction spring engaging portion 213k of the restricting member 213, respectively. As shown in part (b) of Figure 45 and part (d) of Figure 43, the restricting spring engaging portion 210m is an annular rib centered on the rotational axis B, and is inserted into the inner diameter region of the restricting spring 215.
The restricting member 213 is urged in the direction of arrow C in parallel with the rotational axis B by the urging force F201 of the restricting spring 215, and the lower surface 213a (see part (b) of Figure 46 contacts the bottom surface 209b of the apparatus-side shutter 209. The arrow C direction is the mounting direction M (gravity direction) of the toner pack 220. Further, as shown in Figure 50, part (b) of Figure 48 and part (d) of Figure 48, in the rotational direction of the apparatus-side shutter 209, the releasing spring 216 (first elastic member, first urging member) is mounted between the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214. One end and the other end of the releasing spring 216 are engaged with the release spring engaging portion 213g of the restricting member 213 and the release spring engaging portion 214g of the releasing member 214, respectively. As shown in part (b) of Figure 50, the restricting member 213 receives a moment M201 in the rotational direction D by the urging force F202 of the releasing spring 216, and the first contact surface 213b of the restricting member 213 is brought into contact with the first contacted surface 210a of the cover 210, or the second contact surface 213h of the restricting member 213 is brought into contact with the second contacted surface 210b of the cover 210. By this, the restricting member 213 is restricted from rotating in the rotational direction D.
On the other hand, as shown in part (c) of Figure 50, the releasing member 114 receives the moment M202 in the rotational direction E by the urging force F203 of the release spring 116, and at least one of the pair of contact surfaces 214a is brought into contact with the corresponding one of the third contacted surfaces 210k of the cover 210. By this, the rotation of the releasing member 114 in the rotational direction E is restricted, and the position thereof in the rotational direction E relative to the cover 210 is determined.
Here, the cover 210 is fixed to the first frame 207. Therefore, as shown in part (a) of Figure 50, the restricted rib 209c of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is placed between the first restricting surface 210c of the cover 210 and the second restricting surface 213c of the restricting member 213. For this reason, the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209 in the rotational direction D (direction from the closed position to the open position) is restricted by the second restricting surface 213c of the restricting member 213. The rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209 in the rotational direction E (direction from the open position to the closed position) is restricted by the first restricting surface 210c of the cover 210.

(Rotation restriction release method)

Referring to Figures 51 to 54, a method of releasing the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 will be described. For better illustration, the cut surfaces of the cover 210, the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 are shaded.
Part (a) of Figure 51 is a sectional view, taken along a line (same as that in Figure 49) parallel with the rotational axis B, of the mounting portion 206 in a state in which the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released. Part (b) of Figure 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X205-X205 of part (a) of Figure 51. Figure 51 shows the state of the mounting portion 206 in which the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released when the toner pack 220 is not mounted, for convenience of explanation.
After the first step of rotating the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D from the state of Figures 49 and 50, the second step of moving the releasing member 214 in the arrow G direction (upward) shown in Figure 49 is carried out. In this embodiment, the first step and the second step are executed by the operation of mounting the toner pack 220 on the mounting portion 106. This will be described after explaining the structure of the toner pack 220. Here, only the structure of the mounting portion 206 will be described. In the second step, the contact surface 214b of the releasing member 214 contacts the contacted surface 213e of the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 and the restricting member 213 are integrally moved in the direction of arrow G against the urging force F201 of the restricting spring 215. Through this second step, the state of releasing the rotation restriction shown in Figure 51 is reached. The arrow G direction is the direction opposite to the mounting direction M of the toner pack 220.
In the state that the rotation restriction is released, as shown in part (b) of Figure 51, the second restricting surface 213c of the restricting member 213 is retracted upward, from the movement locus (rotation locus) of the restricted rib 209c between the closed position and the open position of the apparatus-side shutter 209. The position of the restricting member 213 is referred to as a restriction release position (release position). And, the restricted rib 209c (apparatus-side shutter 209) can move between the first restricting surface 210c and the third restriction surface 210d of the cover 210. The distance between the first restricting surface 210c and the third restriction surface 210d is such that the apparatus-side shutter 209 can rotate and move between the closed position and the open position. Therefore, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released between the closed position and the open position. That is, the apparatus-side shutter 209 can rotate from the closed position to the open position in the rotational direction D about the rotational axis B. On the other hand, the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209 in the rotational direction E from the closed position is restricted by the first restricting surface 210c of the cover 210. The amount of movement of the releasing member 214 in the arrow G direction (upward direction) suffices if it is more than the amount necessary to the position in which the second restricting surface 213c of the restricting member 213 which moves integrally with the releasing member 214 does not overlap with the restricted rib 209c of the apparatus-side shutter 209 in the direction of the rotational axis B.
Here, the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is structured so that the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is not released when the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is operated starting at the second step without executing the operation of the first step.
Part (a) of Figure 52 is a side view of part (a) of Figure 50 as viewed in the direction of arrow G. Part (b) of Figure 52 is a sectional view taken along the line X206-X206 of part (a) of Figure 52. Part (c) of Figure 52 shows a state in which the restricting member is moved in the direction of arrow G from the state of part (a) of Figure 52 and part (b) of Figure 52. For better illustration, only the cover 210, the restricting member 213, the releasing member 214, the restricting spring 215, and the releasing spring 216 are shown, and the restricting member 213 is not shown in a cross-section.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 52, part (b) of Figure 52 , part (b) of Figure 45 , and part (d) of Figure 45 , the cover 210 is provided with a rise restricting surface 210e (rise restricting portion), and the releasing member 214 is provided with an rise restricted surface 214c (rise restricted portion). When the restricting member 213 is moved in the arrow G direction without being rotated in the rotational direction D from this state, the locked surface 213f of the restricting member 213 comes into contact with the locking surface 214d of the releasing member 214. The same structure is provided on the opposite side with respect to the rotational axis B, the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214 are integrally moved in the arrow G direction (upward). As a result, as shown in part (c) of Figure 52, the rise restricted surface 214c of the releasing member 214 contacts the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210 to restrict the movement of the releasing member 214 in the arrow G direction, and therefore, the restricting member 213 which moves integrally with the releasing member 214 is also restricted in the movement in the direction of arrow G. Since the amount of movement of the restricting member 213 in the arrow G direction is insufficient, the restricted rib 209c of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is maintained in the rotation restricted state by the first restricting surface 210c and the second restricting surface 213c as shown in part (a) of Figure 50. At this time, the position (region) in the rotational direction about the rotational axis B of the releasing member 214 at this time is a rise restricted position (rising restricting region). That is, the rise restriction position is the position of the releasing member 214 when the rise restricted surface 214c of the releasing member 214 overlaps with the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 110 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B. Further, as shown in part (c) of Figure 52, the rise restricting surface 210e and the rise restricted surface 214c are inclined so that a force F204 received by the rise restricted surface 214c from the rise restricting surface 210e has a component in a direction of an arrow H. The rise restricting surface 210e and the rise restricted surface 214c are inclined downward toward a downstream side in the rotational direction D. The arrow H direction component of the force F204 applies a moment M203 to the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction EBay this, even if the restricting member 213 tends to move in the arrow G direction (upward) due to the vertical vibration of the image forming apparatus 1 during transportation, the releasing member 214 is not easily rotate in the rotational direction D, and therefore, the restriction in the direction of arrow G by the cover 210 is not released.
Next, referring to Figures 52 and 53, a process of releasing the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 through the first step and the second step will be described. The first step is a step of rotating the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D against the moment M202 by the releasing spring 216 until the rise restricted surface 214c of the releasing member 214 is out of contact with the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210.
Part (a) of Figure 53 shows a state in which the first step has been passed from the state in part (a) of Figure 52. Part (b) of Figure 53 is a sectional view taken along the line X207-X207 in part (a) of Figure 53. Part (c) of Figure 53 shows a state in which the second step has been passed from the state in part (b) of Figure 53. Part (a) of Figure 54 shows a state in which the releasing member 214 is further rotated in the rotational direction D from part (a) of Figure 53. Part (b) of Figure 54 is a sectional view taken along the line X208-X208 of part (a) of Figure 54. As in Figure 52, Figures 53 and 54 show only the cover 210, the restricting member 213, the releasing member 214, the restricting spring 215, and the releasing spring 216 for better illustration, and the restricting member 213 is not in a cross-section.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 53, as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B, the rise restricted surface 214c of the releasing member 214 and the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210 do not overlap with each other. Therefore, as shown in part (b) of Figure 53, the restricting member 213 can move integrally with the releasing member 214 in the direction of arrow G. At this time, the position (region) in the rotational direction about the rotational axis B of the releasing member 214 is a rise restriction release position (rise restriction release region). That is, the rise restriction release position is the position (region) of the releasing member 214 when the rise restricted surface 214c of the releasing member 214 does not overlap with the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B. The amount of rotation of the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D in the first step suffices if it is more than an amount by which, as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B, the rise restricted surface 214c of the releasing member 214 does not overlap with the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210.
The method of releasing the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 includes a first step and a second step after the first step. The first step is a step of rotating the releasing member 214 from the rise restriction release position to the rise restriction release position in the rotational direction D. The second step is a step of moving the releasing member upward together with the restricting member 213 so that the restricting member 213 moves from the restriction position to the restriction release position while the releasing member 214 is in the rise restriction release position. The second step of this embodiment may include an operation of rotating the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D or the rotational direction E. For example, it may be as shown in Figure 54 that in the first step, the releasing member 214 is rotated more in the rotational direction D than in part (a) of Figure 53, and in the second step, the releasing member 214 is moved in the arrow G direction and is rotated in the rotational direction E.

(Toner pack)

Referring to Figures 55 and 56, an overall structure of the toner pack 220 will be described. Part (b) of Figure 55 is a front view of the toner pack 220 when the pack side shutter 203 is in the closed position. Part (d) of Figure 55 is a front view of the toner pack 220 when the pack side shutter 203 is in the open position. Part (a) of Figure 55 and 55 (c) are left side views and right side views of the toner pack 220 of part (b) of Figure 55, respectively. Figure 56 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack 220. The arrow N direction and the arrow U direction are parallel to the rotational axis A. When the toner pack 220 is in the mounting attitude, the arrow N direction is the vertical downward direction (gravity direction), and the arrow U direction is the vertical upward direction.
The toner pack 220 includes an accommodating portion 201 (first accommodating portion) for accommodating toner, a nozzle 202 (discharging portion, nozzle portion, pipe, tube, valve), and a pack-side shutter 203 (container shutter, rotatable member). As shown in Figure 55, the accommodating portion 201 is provided on the side of the first end portion in the first direction D1, and the nozzle 102 and the pack side shutter 203 are provided on the side of the second end portion opposite to the first end portion in the first direction D1. That is, the accommodating portion 201 and the nozzle 202 are structured to be arranged in the first direction D1. The accommodating portion 201 in this embodiment is a pouch formed by pouching a flexible polypropylene sheet. The accommodating portion 201 is not limited to the pouch, and may be a resin bottle or a container made of paper, vinyl or the like.
As shown in Figure 56, on the side surface 202c (first outer surface) of the nozzle 202 extending in the first direction D1, a discharge opening 202a (opening, nozzle opening, a first opening) configured for fluid communication with the inside of the accommodating portion 201. The toner stored in the accommodating portion 201 is structured to be discharged to the outside of the toner pack 220 through the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202. The nozzle 202 may be integrally structured with the accommodating portion 201. Further, a seal (not shown) may be provided between the accommodating portion 201 and the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202, and the accommodating portion 201 and the discharge opening 202a may be brought into fluid communication with each other when the seal is removed. Further, the discharge opening 202a does not have to be the final discharge opening for discharging toner from the toner pack 220 to the outside of the toner pack 220.
A pack-side shutter 203 is provided on the outside of the side surface 202c of the nozzle 202. The pack-side shutter 203 is mounted rotatably around a rotational axis A (first rotational axis, central axis) extending in a direction along the first direction D1, and is provided with an opening 203a (rotatable member opening, first shutter opening) in the side surface 203d (first rotatable member outer surface, rotatable member side surface portion) extending in the direction of the rotational axis A as shown in Figure 56. The pack-side shutter 203 is provided outside the side surface 202c of the nozzle 202 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The side surface 202c of the nozzle 202 is a curved surface that is convex toward the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. That is, the discharge opening 202a faces the outside in the radial direction r (the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A). Further, the inner surface of the pack-side shutter 203 (the surface facing the side surface 202c) is a curved surface along the side surface 202c of the nozzle 202, and a substantially rectangular pack-side seal 205 is mounted thereon.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 55 and part (d) of Figure 55, the pack-side shutter 203 is movable between a closing position in which the pack-side seal 205 closes the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 and an opening position in which the discharge opening 202a is opened, in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction) and the rotational direction L (second rotational direction) opposite to the rotational direction K about the rotational axis A. When the pack-side shutter 203 is in the open position, the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 is uncovered through the opening 203 a.
When the pack-side shutter 203 in the closed position shown in part (b) of Figure 55 is rotated in the direction of arrow K about the rotational axis A, the pack-side shutter 203 is moved to the open position shown in part (d) of Figure 55. On the contrary, when the pack side shutter 203 is rotated from the open position in the direction of an arrow L, it is moved to the closed position. In the rotational operation of the pack-side shutter 203, the pack-side shutter 203 slides on the side surface 202c of the nozzle 202 by way of the pack-side seal 205.
Referring to Figures 57 to 61, the detailed structure of the nozzle 202 and the pack-side shutter 203 will be described. The arrow N direction is the direction from the accommodating portion 201 toward the nozzle 202, and the U direction is the opposite thereto. The arrow N direction and the arrow U direction are directions parallel to the rotational axis A. When the toner pack 220 is in the mounting attitude, the arrow N direction is the vertical downward direction (gravity direction), and the arrow U direction is the vertical upward direction.
Part (a) of Figure 57 is an enlarged view of the neighborhood of the nozzle 202 when the pack-side shutter 203 is in the closed position. Part (b) of Figure 57 is a view of the toner pack 220 as viewed in the direction of arrow U in part (a) of Figure 57. Part (a) of Figure 58 is an enlarged perspective view of the neighborhood of the nozzle 202 when the pack-side shutter 203 is in the open position. Part (b) of Figure 58 is a side view of the toner pack 220 as viewed in the direction of arrow U in part (a) of Figure 58. Part (c) of Figure 58 is an enlarged view of the nozzle 202 in part (a) of Figure 58, as viewed from the front side. Part (a) of Figure 59 is a perspective view of the neighborhood of the nozzle 202 as viewed from the side opposite to that in part (a) of Figure 57. Part (b) of Figure 59 is an enlarged perspective view of the projecting portion 202b of part (a) of Figure 59. Part (c) of Figure 59 is an enlarged view of the projecting portion 202b as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Part (a) of Figure 60 is an enlarged perspective view of the projecting portion 202b. Part (b) of Figure 60 is a partial enlarged view of the projecting portion 202b of part (b) of Figure 57. Part (a) of Figure 61 and part (b) of Figure 61 are a front view and a rear view of the nozzle 202, respectively. Part (a) of Figure 61 and part (b) of Figure 61 are illustrations of the neighborhood of the nozzle 202 as viewed in a direction parallel to the surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2 of the nozzle 202 (direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 61 and part (b) of Figure 57, the nozzles 102 is provided with a positioned portion 202d having a surface 202d1 (first nozzle surface, first opposing surface) and surface 202d2 (second nozzle surface, second opposing surface) which are arranged in the arrow R direction (second direction D2) with a gap therebetween and which extend in a direction crossing with the arrow R direction. The arrow R direction is a direction perpendicular to the first direction D1. As shown in part (b) of Figure 57, the surfaces 202d1 and 202d2 in this embodiment extend in a direction perpendicular to the arrow R direction and are parallel to each other. That is, the arrow R direction is the normal direction of the surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2. The positioned portion 202d engages with the positioning portion 207a (part (a) of Figure 40) of the first frame 207 when the toner pack 220 is mounted on the mounting portion 206. By this, the position of the nozzle 202 in the arrow R direction (the position in the rotational direction about the rotational axis A) relative to the first frame 207 (base frame 221) is determined. In part (b) of Figure 57, the straight line CL1 (first imaginary straight line) which passes through the center between the surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2 in the arrow R direction and which extends in the direction perpendicular to the arrow R direction is in a phase rotated by about 90 ° with respect to the straight line CL2 (second imaginary straight line) which passes at the center of the discharge opening 202a and the rotational axis A. That is, The straight line CL2 resulted by rotating the straight line CL1 by 90 degrees about the rotational axis A passes through the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202.
Further, as shown in Figures 57 and 61, a surface 202e1 and a surface 202e2 are provided on the downstream side of the surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2 in the N direction in the direction of the rotational axis A, respectively. As shown in part (b) of Figure 57, the surfaces 202e1 and 202e2 extend in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A.
In Figure 61, a side surface 202e3 (second outer surface) is provided between the surfaces 202d1 and 202d2 and between the surfaces 202e1 and 202e2 in the direction of arrow R. The side surface 202e3 is recessed inward in the radial direction r with respect to the side surface 202c. The surface 202d1, the surface 202d2, the side surface 202e3, the surface 202e1, the surface 202e2 and the side surface 202e3 form a recess 202e (nozzle recess).
The surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2 do not necessarily have to be parallel as in this embodiment. The surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2 may be surfaces extending in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A.
Further, part (a) of Figure 61 is a view of the neighborhood of the nozzle of the toner pack 220 in which the pack side shutter 203 is in the closed position, as viewed in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the rotational axis A. As shown in part (a) of Figure 61, the opening 203a is provided in the side surface 203d of the pack-side shutter 203, and at least a part of the recess 202e (surface 202e1, surface 202e2, side surface 202e3) of the nozzle 202 is exposed to the outside through the opening 203a. At least the surfaces 202d1 and 202d2 are structured to be exposed through the opening 203a of the pack-side shutter 203 taking the closed position. This is because, the surfaces 202d1 and the surfaces 202d2 are to be engaged with the positioning portion 207a of the first frame 207 when the toner pack 220 is mounted on the mounting portion 206 with the pack side shutter 203 closed.
Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 57 a driven transmission portion 203b (rotatable member recess) is provided on the outer surface of the pack-side shutter 203 on the opposite side of the rotational axis A of the recess 202e (opening 203a of the pack-side shutter 203) of the nozzle 202, as the neighborhood of the nozzle 202 is viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A (first direction D) when the pack side shutter 203 is in the closed position. As shown in part (b) of Figure 61, both the surface 203b 1 and the surface 203b2 of the driven transmission portion 203b extend in a direction perpendicular to the arrow R direction (direction of the rotational axis A). Part (a) of Figure 59 is an enlarged perspective view of the neighborhood of the pack-side shutter 203 as viewed from the side where the driven transmission portion 203b is disposed. Between the surfaces 203b1 and 203b2, there is provided a side surface 203b3 (second rotatable member outer surface, rotatable member side surface portion) recessed inward in the radial direction from the side surface 203d. The driven transmission portion 203b comprises the surface 203b1, the surface 203b2, and the side surface 203b3. Further, the rib 203e is provided on the side surface 203b3.
When the pack-side shutter 203 is rotated in the rotational direction K from the closed position shown in Figure 57, the pack-side shutter 203 takes an open position, and the outlet 202a of the nozzle 202 is exposed through the opening 203a of the pack-side shutter 203, as shown in Figure 58.
Further, as shown in part (a) of Figure 57 and part (a) of Figure 59 , the pack-side shutter 203 is provided with a radial positioning portion 203f projecting outward in the radial direction beyond the side surface 203d. The radial positioning portion 203f is provided on the upstream side of the pack side shutter 203 in the N direction in the direction of the rotational axis A. The radial positioning portions 203f are provided at each of the three positions at intervals in the rotational direction of the pack-side shutter 203.
The nozzle 202 in this embodiment is includes a passage through which the toner passes and the discharge opening 202a for discharging the toner from the nozzle 202. The cross-sectional area of the passage through which the toner of the nozzle 202 passes may be made smaller, larger, or even toward the discharge opening 202a. The cross-sectional area and length of the passage of the nozzle 202 may be appropriately changed depending on the required toner discharge, and are not restrictive. Further, the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 does not have to be the most downstream opening from which the toner is discharged from the toner pack 220. The toner discharged from the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 may be discharged to the outside of the toner pack 220 after passing through a passage of a member different from the nozzle 202.
The pack-side shutter 203 may be a rotatable member which is provided with a driven transmission portion 203b but does not have a shutter function and therefore the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 is open regardless of the rotational position. In such a case, it may be that the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 is closed by a seal (not shown) when the toner pack 220 is not mounted to the mounting portion 206, and is by sealed by the mounting operation to the mounting portion 206 or after the mounting operation. Further, the toner pack 220 which is not provided with the pack side shutter 203 may be used.

(Restriction releasing portion of toner pack)

Referring to Figures 55 to 61, the restriction releasing portion 204 will be described. Here, as shown in Figure 55, the toner pack 220 is oriented in a predetermined direction in which the side of the second end portion (the nozzle 202 side) of the toner pack 220 is below the side of the first end portion (the toner accommodating portion side). In other words, the toner pack 220 is oriented in an attitude (predetermined orientation) in which the rotational axis A is in the vertical direction (gravity direction) and in which, at least a part of the nozzle 202 is below the accommodating portion 201. The attitude of the toner pack 220 at this time is a mounting attitude to the mounting portion 206 of the image forming apparatus 1. At this time, in Figures 55 to 61, the N direction is the vertical downward direction (gravity direction), and the U direction is the vertical upward direction.
The nozzle 202 is provided with a projecting portion 202b (projecting portion, engaging portion) which projects (protrudes) in the arrow N direction (downward) beyond the end surface 203c of the pack side shutter 203 in the arrow N direction. As shown in part (a) of Figure 57 and part (b) of Figure 57, the projecting portion 202b is a cylindrical portion centered on the rotational axis A. Further, as shown in Figure 55, the accommodating portion 201, the nozzle 202 (pack side shutter 203), and the projecting portion 202b are arranged in the order named in the N direction, which is the mounting direction of the toner pack 220 to the mounting portion 206.
As the projecting portion 202b is viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, as shown in part (b) of Figure 57, the projecting portion 202b is on the side closer to the rotational axis A than the driven transmission portion 203b of the pack-side shutter 203, in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC.
The projecting portion 202b has a projecting portion end surface 202b2 (positioning surface in the mounting direction) which is an end surface in the N direction. The projecting portion 202b is provided with a hole having an inner peripheral surface 202b 1 (guide inner peripheral surface, positioning inner peripheral surface) facing inward in the radial direction r with the rotational axis A as the central axis.
The inner peripheral surface 202b 1 of this embodiment is a cylindrical surface centered on the rotational axis A as shown in part (b) of Figure 60. However, the present invention is not limited to such an example. Part (a) of Figure 71 is an enlarged perspective view of a projecting portion 202b having an inner peripheral surface structure different from that of this embodiment, and part (b) of Figure 71 shows the projecting portion 202b of part (a) of Figure 71 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A. The inner peripheral surface 202b 10 comprises a plurality of flat surfaces which inscribes the imaginary circle so that the position of the center (central axis) of an imaginary circle VC2 is determined with respect to the projecting portion 202b. The central axis of the imaginary circle VC2 is coincident with the rotational axis A. The inner peripheral surface of the projecting portion 202b does not necessarily have to be a surface in which a central axis can be defined. Any inner peripheral surface may be used as long as the toner pack 220 can be mounted to the mounting portion 206 while dodging the center boss 209d.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 57, part (a) of Figure 58 , and part (c) of Figure 58 , the projecting portion 202b projects downward from the end surface 203c of the pack-side shutter 203 beyond the discharge opening 202a. In this embodiment, the projecting portion 202b is provided on the nozzle 202 so as to project from the end surface 202j (bottom surface) in the direction of the rotational axis A of the nozzle 202 as shown in part (b) of Figure 62. In addition, as shown in Figure 56, the projecting portion 202b projects downward beyond the lower end surface 202j of the nozzle 202. In this embodiment, the end surface 203c of the pack-side shutter 203 and the end surface 202j of the nozzle 202 are end surfaces perpendicular to the rotational axis A, but the present invention is not limited thereto. These surfaces may be any surface if it extends in a direction crossing the rotational axis A as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A.
As shown in part (c) of Figure 58, an opening width L1 of the nozzle 202 in the direction of the rotational axis A of the discharge opening 202a, and a width L2 measured from the lower end of the discharge opening 202a to the end surface 203c of the pack-side shutter 203 preferably satisfy 0.09 < L2/L1 < 2.2.
Further, as shown in Figure 56, the projecting portion 202b projects beyond the end surface 202j of the nozzle 202. In this embodiment, the end surface 203c of the pack-side shutter 203 and the end surface 202j of the nozzle 202 are end surfaces perpendicular to the rotational axis A, but the present invention is not limited to this example. These surfaces may be any surface which extends in a direction crossing the rotational axis A as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A.
Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 58, It is understood that as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, when the pack side shutter 203 is in the open position, the opening 203a of the pack side shutter 203 overlaps the discharge opening 202a in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC.
The projecting portion 202b is provided with a restriction releasing portion 204 including a first restriction releasing portion 204a (first projection) and a second restriction releasing portion 204b (second projection). Detailed structures of the restriction releasing portion 204 will be described, referring to part (b) of Figure 59, part (c) of Figure 59, part (a) of Figure 60, part (b) of Figure 60, part (a) of Figure 62, and part (b) of Figure 62.
The first restriction releasing portion 204a includes a first slope 204a1 (first inner engaging surface, first downward surface, first downward guide surface, first force applying surface, first push surface), a second slope 204a2 (first outer engaging surface, second downward surface, second downward guide surface, second force applying surface, second push surface) and a third slope 204a3 (second engaging surface, first upward surface, upward guide surface)).
When the toner pack 220 is oriented in the predetermined direction (Figure 50) described above, the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2 have surfaces which face in the arrow N direction (downward) and which extend such that they go in the direction of the arrow U (upward) as go in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction) about the rotational axis A. In addition, as shown in part (c) of Figure 59, as viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A, the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2 extend such that they go in the U direction (upward) as go in the first horizontal direction hz1 of the horizontal direction. Further, when the rotational direction K is the first circumferential direction of the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC, the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2 face in the arrow N direction (downward) and extend such that they go in the arrow U direction as go in the first circumferential direction.
The third slope 204a3 is a surface which faces the arrow U direction (upward) and which extends such that it goes in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the rotational direction L (second rotational direction) about the rotational axis A. In addition, as shown in part (c) of Figure 59, the third slope 204a3 has the surface which extends such that it goes in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the second horizontal direction hz2 which is opposite to the first horizontal direction hz1 of the horizontal direction, as viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Further, when the rotational direction L is a second circumferential direction which is opposite to the first circumferential direction in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC, the third slope 204a3 faces in the arrow U direction (upward direction) and extend such that it goes in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the second circumferential direction.
The downstream end of the second slope 204a2 in the rotational direction K and the downstream end of the third slope 204a3 in the rotational direction L are connected with each other by a connecting portion 204a23. Further, as shown in part (c) of Figure 59, as viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A, the downstream end of the second slope 204a2 in the first horizontal direction hz 1 and the downstream end of the third slope 204a3 in the second horizontal direction hz2 are connected with each other by the connecting portion 204a23.
The third slope 204a3 is above the second slope 204a2. Viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, the third slope 204a3 overlaps with the second slope 204a2. In this embodiment, although the entire third slope 204a3 is above the second slope 204a2, It will suffice if at least a part of the third slope 204a3 is above the second slope 204a2.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 60, at least a part of the first slope 204a1 is placed at a position which is closer to the rotational axis A than the second slope 204a2 in the radial direction r in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC and which is different from that of the second slope 204a2.
In part (b) of Figure 60, a radius R204a1 measured from the rotational axis A to an inner end (edge line) of the first slope 204a1 is shorter than the radius R204a2 measured from the rotational axis A to the inner end (edge line) of the second slope 204a2. That is, at least a part of the first slope 204a1 is placed closer to the rotational axis A than the second slope 204a2 in the radial direction r.
Further, in part (b) of Figure 60, two regions of the first slope 204a1 separated by an imaginary straight line VL204a1 passing through the rotational axis A and the most downstream end, in the rotational direction L, of the second slope 204a2 are an upstream side region 204a12 and a downstream side region 204a1 1 in the rotational direction K. In this case, the second slope 204a2 is not provided on the outside of the upstream region 204a12 in the radial direction r. That is, at least a part of the first slope 204a1 (upstream side region 204a12) is provided at a position different from that of the second slope 204a2 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC. Similarly, the two regions of the first slope 204b 1 separated by an imaginary straight line VL204b 1 passing through the rotational axis A and the most upstream end, in the rotational direction K, of the second slope 204b2 are an upstream side region 204b 12 and a downstream side region 204b 1 1 in the rotational direction L. In this case, outside the upstream region 204b 12 in the radial direction r, the second slope 204b2 is not provided. That is, at least a part of the first slope 204b1 (upstream side region 204b12) is provided at a position different from that of the second slope 204b2 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC. That is, in the first restriction releasing portion 204a, the upstream region 204a12 of the first slope 204a1 is on the upstream side of the second slope 204a2 in the rotational direction K. Further, in the second restriction releasing portion 204b, the upstream side region 204b12 of the first slope 204b1 is on the upstream side of the second slope 204b2 in the rotational direction K.
Further, as shown in part (c) of Figure 59, as viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A, at least a part of the first slope 204a1 is at a position different from that of the second slope 204a2 in the horizontal direction (first horizontal direction hz1 or second horizontal direction hz2). On the other hand, at least a part of the third slope 204a3 is provided on the downstream side (upper side) of at least a part of the second slope 204a2 in the arrow U direction. That is, at least a part of the third slope 204a3 overlaps with the second slope 204a2 when viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A. In addition, above (directly above) the third slope 204a3, a cavity 204a4 and an abutment surface 204a5 (downstream end surface, contacted surface) are provided. The abutment surface 204a5 is an end surface on the downstream side in the rotational direction K, the end surface extending from the downstream end of the third slope 204a3 in the rotational direction L along the direction of the rotational axis A. The abutment surface 204a5 faces the downstream side in the rotational direction K. In part (c) of Figure 59, the abutment surface 204a5 extends upward from the downstream end of the third slope 204a3 in the second horizontal direction hz2, and is an end surface on the downstream side in the first horizontal direction hz1.
Next, referring to part (c) of Figure 59, the description will be made as to inclination angles of the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, and the third slope 204a3 with respect to the rotational axis A. As shown in part (c) of Figure 59, as the projecting portion 202b is viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A (gravity direction), the inclination angles, with respect to the direction of the rotational axis A, of the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, and the third slope 204a3 are α1, α2, and α3, respectively. In this embodiment, α1, α2, and α3 are about 50 degrees, about 50 degrees, and about 40 degrees, respectively. It is preferable that α1, α2, and α3 are all 30 degrees or more and 60 degrees or less.
In addition, in this embodiment, as the projecting portion 202b is viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A, a length L204a1 of the first slope 204a1 is about 2 mm, a length of the second slope 204a2 is about 3 mm, and a length L204a3 of the third slope 204a3 is about 3.5 mm. It is preferable that the length L204a2 is larger than the length L204a1, and the length L204a3 is larger than the length L204a2. Further, a length H204a1 from the projecting portion end surface 202b2 which is the lower end of the projecting portion 202b to the upper end of the first slope 204a1 is smaller than a length H204a2 from the projecting portion end surface 202b2 to the upper end of the second slope 204a2.
The first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4, and the abutment surface 204a5 are exposed to the outside of the toner pack 220 so that they can be accessed by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the mounting portion 206. They are structured so as to be exposed to the outside of the toner pack 220 in a state in which the toner pack 220 is in condition for being mounted to the mounting portion 206. That is, in the case that a cap or a cover is provided to protect the nozzle 202 of the toner pack 220 and the shutter 203 on the pack side at the time of transportation, they are exposed when the cap or cover is removed.
Part (a) of Figure 62 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X209-X209 of the projecting portion 202b of part (a) of Figure 61, and there are shown the third slope 204a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the third slope 204b3 of the second restriction releasing portion 204b. It is understood that both the third slope 204a3 and the third slope 204b3 extend along the rotational direction of the pack-side shutter 203 (the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A).
Part (b) of Figure 62 is a view of the nozzle 202 viewed from the side where the projecting portion 202b can be seen in the direction of the rotational axis A. As shown in part (b) of Figure 62, the restriction releasing portion 204 is placed outside the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 and inside the discharge opening 202a in the radial direction r. The nozzle 202 is viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, and the third slope 204a3 are preferably placed closer to the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 than the discharge opening 202a. Here, a distance from the rotational axis A to the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 is r1, a distance from the rotational axis A to the outer end of the second slope 204a2 (second slope 204b2) is r2, and a distance from the rotational axis A to the discharge opening 202a r3 preferably satisfy, $(r 2 - r 1) / (r 3 - r 1) < 0.3 .$
That is, as the nozzle 202 is viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, a distance from the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 to the first slope 204a1, a distance from the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 to the second slope 204a2, and a distance from the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 to the third slope 204a3 is preferably 30% or less of the distance from the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 to the discharge opening 202a.
As shown in Figures 57 to 61, the second restriction releasing portion 204b is provided with a first slope 204b1 (third downward surface), a second slope 204b2 (fourth downward surface), a third slope 204b3 (second upward surface), a cavity 204b4 (second cavity), and abutment surface 204b5 (second abutment surface, second downstream end surface, second contacted surface). Here, the second restriction releasing portion 204b has a 180-degree rotationally symmetric shape of the first restriction releasing portion 204a with respect to the rotational axis A, and it is provided on the opposite side of the restriction releasing portion 204a with respect to the rotational axis A in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC. In other words, the first slope 204b1, the second slope 204b2, the third slope 204b3, the cavity 204b4, and the abutment surface 204b5 have 180-degree rotational symmetry shapes, with respect to the rotational axis A, of, the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4, and the abutment surface 204a5, respectively. That is, if the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4, and the abutment surface 204a5 are rotated 180 degrees around the rotational axis A, they become the first slope 204b1, the second slope 204b2, the third slope 204b3, the cavity 204b4, and the abutment surface 204b5. Therefore, the detailed description of the second restriction releasing portion 204b will be omitted.
Here, the second slope 204a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a is not provided outside, in the radial direction r, of any region of the first slope 204b1 of the second restriction releasing portion 204b. That is, the first slope 204a1 is provided at a position different from that of the second slope 204b2 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 61 as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A (direction perpendicular to the arrow R direction), the projecting portion 202b is at a position between the surface 202d1 of the positioned portion 202d and the surface 202d2 in the arrow R direction. Therefore, in the direction of the arrow R, the positions of the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the second restriction releasing portion 204b are between the position of the surface 202d1 and the position of the surface 202d2 of the positioned portion 202d. That is, in the direction of arrow R, the positions of the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, and the third slope 204a3 are all between the position of the surface 202d1 and the position of the surface 202d2. Viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A, the positions of the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the second restriction releasing portion 204b overlap with the positions of the recess 202e in the arrow R direction.
In addition, as shown in part (a) of Figure 61, the projecting portion 202b is inside the range of the width of the opening 203a of the pack-side shutter 203 in the arrow R direction as viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A (radial direction r).
Further, in this embodiment, the projecting portion 202b is provided on the nozzle 202, but it is not necessarily provided on the nozzle 202.
Here, the projecting portion 202b of this embodiment is provided with two portions, namely a first restriction releasing portion 204a and a second restriction releasing portion 204b, which are 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. However, the present invention is not limited to such an example.
Part (a) of Figure 196 and part (b) of Figure 196 are perspective views and bottom views of the neighborhood of the projecting portion 202b in which the first restriction releasing portion 204a is provided and the second restriction releasing portion 204b is not provided.
In part (c) of Figure 196 and part (d) of Figure 196 area perspective view and a bottom view of the neighborhood of the projecting portion 202b in which the second restriction releasing portion 204b has a shape of 190-degree rotational symmetry, with respect to the rotational axis A, of the first restriction releasing portion 204a.
The structure may be such that only the first restriction releasing portion 204a including the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4, and the abutment surface 204a5 are provided, as shown in part (a) of Figure 196 and part (b) of Figure 196. In addition, as shown in part (c) of Figure 196 and part (d) of Figure 196 , the second restriction releasing portion 204b may have a shape which is 190-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A of the first restriction releasing portion 204a. That is, the first slope 204b1, the second slope 204b2, the third slope 204b3, the cavity 204b4, and the abutment surface 204b5 may have shapes which are 190-degree rotationally symmetric of, the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4, and the abutment surface 204a5 with respect to the rotational axis A, respectively. With this structure, the angle α204ab1 between the first slope 204a1 and the first slope 204b1 about the rotational axis is 190 degrees. The angle α204ab2 between the second slope 204a2 and the second slope 204b2 about the rotational axis A is also 190 degrees. The second restriction releasing portion 204b preferably has a shape of 150 degrees or more and 210 degrees or less rotationally symmetric of the first restriction releasing portion 204a with respect to the rotational axis A. That is, the first slope 204b1, the second slope 204b2, the third slope 204b3, the cavity 204b4, and the abutment surface 204b5 preferably have shapes of 150 degrees or more and 210 degrees or less rotationally symmetric of the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4 and the abutment surface 204a5 with respect to the rotational axis A, respectively.

(Mounting of toner pack to mounting portion)

Referring to Figures 63 to 69, the description will be made as to a mechanism for releasing the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 with the rotation restricting mechanism 212 described above by mounting the toner pack 220 on the mounting portion 206.
Part (a) of Figure 63 and part (c) of Figure 63 are perspective views of the toner pack 220 and the mounting portion 206 while the toner pack 220 is being mounted on the mounting portion 206 and when the mounting is completed, respectively. Part (b) of Figure 63 is a perspective view of the toner pack 220 and the mounting portion 206 as viewed from a side different from that of part (a) of Figure 63. Part (a) of Figure 64 a sectional view of the toner pack 220 and the mounting portion 206 taken along a line parallel to the rotational axis A (rotational axis B) in the state in which the toner pack 220 is further moved in the mounting direction from the state shown in part (a) of Figure 63. Part (b) of Figure 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X210-X210 in part (a) of Figure 64. Part (c) of Figure 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X211-X211 in part (a) of Figure 64. Part (a) of Figure 65 to part (c) of Figure 65 are sectional views showing a process of mounting the toner pack 220 to the mounting portion 206. Part (d) of Figure 65 to part (f) of Figure 65 are perspective views, which correspond to part (a) of Figure 65 to part (c) of Figure 65, respectively but shows only the projecting portion 202b, the releasing member 214, and the restricting member 213. Part (a) of Figure 66 and part (b) of Figure 66 are cross-sectional views showing a process of mounting the toner pack 220 to the mounting portion 206, following the state shown in part (c) of Figure 65. Part (c) of Figure 66 and part (d) of Figure 66 are perspective views which correspond to part (a) of Figure 66 and part (b) of Figure 66, respectively, but shows only the projecting portion 202b, the releasing member 214, and the restricting member 213. Part (a) of Figure 67 and part (b) of Figure 67 are perspective views illustrating a positional relationship between the releasing member 214 and the cover 210. Part (c) of Figure 67 and part (d) of Figure 67 are illustrations of the releasing member 214 and the cover 210 in the states of part (a) of Figure 67 and part (b) of Figure 67, as viewed in the direction (upper side) of the rotational axis A, respectively. Part (a) of Figure 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the rotational axis A (rotational axis B) of the toner pack 220 and the mounting portion 206 in a state in which the mounting of the toner pack 220 has been completed on the mounting portion 206. Part (b) of Figure 68 and part (c) of Figure 68 are a sectional view taken along a line X213-X213 and a sectional view taken along a line X212-X212 in part (a) of Figure 68, respectively.
In Figure 64, the cut surfaces of the shutter 203 on the pack side and the cover 210 is shaded for better illustration. In addition, in part (a) of Figure 65 to part (c) of Figure 65 and part (a) of Figure 66 and part (b) of Figure 66, the pack side shutter 203, the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 are side views, and other members is shown in sectional view. Further, in Figure 68, the cut surfaces of the cover 210, the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 are shaded for better illustration.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 63 and part (b) of Figure 63 , the toner pack 220 in which the pack-side shutter 203 is in the closed position is moved in the mounting direction M to the mounting portion 206 in which the apparatus-side shutter 209 is in the closed position. The user mounts the toner pack 220 on the mounting portion 206 by moving the toner pack 220 in the mounting direction M in a state of being oriented in the predetermined direction described above. The mounting direction M is the arrow N direction, that is, the vertical downward direction (gravity direction). Further, the mounting direction M is the direction of the rotational axis A (rotational axis B).
At this time, the toner pack 220 is mounted to the mounting portion 206 so that two positions are aligned in the rotational direction of the pack side shutter 203 (circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC). The first is for the alignment between, as shown in part (a) of Figure 63 as viewed in the mounting direction M, the recess 202e of the nozzle 202 (opening 203a of the shutter 203 on the pack side) and the positioning portion 207a of the first frame 207. The second is for the alignment between, as shown in part (b) of Figure 63, the positions of the driven transmission portion 203b of the pack-side shutter 203 and the drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208. The structure is such that by aligning one of them, the other is aligned.
After aligning these positions, the toner pack 220 is moved in the mounting direction M and mounted to the mounting portion 206, by which as shown in part (a) of Figure 64, the small diameter portion 209d2 of the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is inserted along the peripheral surface 202b 1 inside the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202. The inner peripheral surface 202b1 of the projecting portion 202b and the small diameter portion 209d2 of the center boss 209d are fitted (engaged). By this fitting, the position of the nozzle 202 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC with respect to the apparatus-side shutter 209 below the nozzle 202 (downstream side in the mounting direction M) is determined. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 64, the drive transmission portion 208a (lever projection) of the operating lever 208 and the driven transmission portion 203b (rotary body recess portion) of the pack side shutter 203 are engaged with each other. In addition, the rib 203e is inserted into the slit 208c provided in the drive transmission portion 208a. At the same time, as shown in part (c) of Figure 64, the side surface 210f and the side surface 210g of the cover 210 guide the surface 202e1 and the surface 202e2 forming the recess 202e (nozzle recess) of the nozzle 202. In addition, the driven transmission portion 203b (rotatable member recess portion) of the pack-side shutter 203 engages with the driven transmission portion 209e (shutter projection) of the apparatus-side shutter 209. By this, the rotational axis A of the pack-side shutter 203 and the rotational axis B of the apparatus-side shutter 209 are made substantially coaxial.
The operating lever 208, the pack side shutter 203, and the apparatus-side shutter 209 are integrally rotatable about the rotational axis A (rotational axis B) relative to the first frame 207 (base frame 221) and the nozzle 202. Specifically, when the operating lever 208 is rotated in the rotational direction D, the drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208 pushes the surface 203b 1 of the pack side shutter 203 to rotate the pack side shutter 203 in the rotational direction D. Thereafter, the surface 203b2 of the pack-side shutter 203 pushes the driven transmission portion 209e of the apparatus-side shutter 209, and the apparatus-side shutter 209 is rotated in the rotational direction D. When the operating lever 208 is rotated in the rotational direction E, the drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208 pushes the surface 203b2 of the pack-side shutter 203, and the pack-side shutter 203 is rotated in the rotational direction E. Thereafter, the surface 203b 1 of the pack-side shutter 203 pushes the driven transmission portion 209e of the apparatus-side shutter 209 to rotate the apparatus-side shutter 209 in the rotational direction E. Thus, the structure is such that in the case that the rotation restricting mechanism 212 described above is not provided, the apparatus-side shutter 209 is structured to be rotated by the operating lever 208 by way of the pack-side shutter 203, and therefore, the apparatus-side shutter 209 can be rotated, regardless of the position of the operation lever.
Here, if the apparatus-side shutter 209 rotates in the rotational direction D from the closed position to the open position due to an erroneous operation by the user or vibration during transportation of the image forming apparatus 1, the position of the driven transmission portion 209e of the apparatus-side shutter 209 in the rotational direction also shifts. Then, when the toner pack 220 is to be mounted on the mounting portion 206, the result is as follows. When the toner pack 220 is further moved in the mounting direction M after the driven transmission portion 203b of the pack-side shutter 203 engages with the drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208, it is unable to engage with the driven transmission portion 209e of the apparatus-side shutter 209. Therefore, the toner pack 220 cannot be moved to the mounting complete position relative to the mounting portion 206. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, the rotation restricting mechanism 212 restricts the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209.
Next, referring to Figures 65 to 67, the details of the mechanism by which the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the mounting portion 206 is released by mounting the toner pack 220 to the mounting portion 206 will be described. Figures 65 and 66 are illustrations showing the process of mounting the toner pack 220 on the mounting portion 206 in chronological order. The second restriction releasing portion 204b functions in the same manner as the first restriction releasing portion 204a, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
At the time shown in part (a) of Figure 65 (part (d) of Figure 65), the first restriction releasing portion 204a of the nozzle 202 and the releasing claw 214e of the releasing member 214 are separated from each other. At this timing, as shown in part (a) of Figure 67 and part (c) of Figure 67, the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e shown in Figure 47 is covered by the eave portion 210n of the cover 210 so as not to be exposed through the center hole 210p of the cover 210 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A. When the toner pack 220 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N (mounting direction M) from this position, the first slope 204a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing claw 214e are brought into contact with each other, and a state shown in part (b) of Figure 65 (part (e) of Figure 65) results. When the toner pack 220 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N from this position, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by the force F204 received by the first guided surface 214e1 from the first slope 204a1, against the urging force F203 of the releasing spring 216 shown in Figure 50. At this time, the first slope 204a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a functions as a guide surface which guides the first guided surface 214e 1 of the releasing member 214 so that the first guided surface 214e1 moves along the first slope 204a1. In other words, the first slope 204a1 guides the first guided surface 214e1 so that the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D about the rotational axis A. Further, the first slope 204a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a also functions as a first force applying surface (first push surface) for applying (pushing) a force to the first guided surface 214e1. The force F204 includes a force component F204x which rotates the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D around the rotational axis B against the urging force of the releasing spring 216. The releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D until the first guided surface 214e1 passes the downstream end, in the rotational direction D, of the first slope 204a1 in the rotational direction D. By the rotation of the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D, the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e is exposed through the center hole 210p of the cover 210 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, as shown in part (b) of Figure 67 (part (d) of Figure 67). That is, the first slope 204a1 has a function (preceding rotation function) of rotating the releasing member 214 to a position where at least the second guided surface 214e2 is exposed through the center hole 210p of the cover 210 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A. Although the first slope 204a1 of this embodiment is a slope, the present invention is not limited to such an example. It will suffice if it is a surface engageable with the first guided surface 214e1 to rotate the releasing member to 14 in the rotational direction D when the toner pack 220 is mounted on the mounting portion 206.
When the toner pack 220 is further moved in the direction of arrow N from the positioned shown in part (b) of Figure 67 (part (d) of Figure 67), the second slope 204a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a is brought into contact with the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e, with the result in the state shown in part (c) of Figure 65 (part (f) of Figure 65). In this state, when the toner pack 220 is moved in the direction of the arrow N, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by a force F205 received by the second guided surface 214e2 from the second slope 204a2, against the force F203 received from the releasing spring 216 shown in Figure 50. At this time, the second slope 204a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a functions as a guide surface for guiding the second guided surface 214e2 so that the second guided surface 214e2 moves along the second slope 204a2. In other words, the second slope 204a2 guides the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing member 214 so that the releasing member 114 is rotated in the rotational direction D around the rotational axis A. Further, the second slope 204a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a also functions as a second force applying surface (second push surface) for applying (pushing) a force to the second guided surface 214e2. The force F205 includes a force component F205x which rotates the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D around the rotational axis B against the urging force of the releasing spring 216.
The releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D until the second guided surface 214e2 passes the downstream end, in the rotational direction D, of the second slope 204a2 in the rotational direction D. The rotation of the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D up to this point is the first step for releasing the rotation restriction described above. That is, this is a step of rotating the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D against the urging force of the releasing spring 216 to the rise restriction release position (rise restriction release region) where the rise restricted surface 214c does not contact the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210 when the releasing member 214 is raised, as shown in part (b) of Figure 53. In other words, It is a step of rotating the releasing member 214 against the urging force of the releasing spring 215 in the rotational direction D to the rise restriction release position where the rise restricted surface 214c does not overlap with the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis B. Although the second slope 204a2 of this embodiment is a slope, the present invention is not limited to such an example. It will suffice if it is engageable with the second guided surface 214e2 to rotate the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D when the toner pack 220 is mounted to the mounting portion 206.
After the first step, the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e rides up to the upstream end of the third slope 204a3 in the rotational direction E by way of the connecting portion 204a23 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a. That is, the rotational direction of the releasing member 214 is switched from the rotational direction D to the rotational direction E at the connecting portion 204a23 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a.
At this time, as shown in part (a) of Figure 66 (part (c) of Figure 66), the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e contacts the third slope 204a3 of the nozzle 202 and receives a force F206 therefrom by the moment M202 (urging force) of the releasing spring 216. Then, by the force component F206y in the direction of the arrow G of the force F206, the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing member 214 moves in the direction in which the third slope 204a3 extends, while being guided by the third slope 204a3. The third slope 204a3 guides, after the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2, the third guided surface 214e3 so that the releasing member 214 is moved in the arrow G direction (upward) while being rotated in the rotational direction E.
The movement of the releasing member 214 in the arrow G direction is the second step for releasing the rotation restriction described above. In the second step, the restricting member 213 is moved in the arrow G direction by the releasing member 214. In addition, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction E until the contact surface 214a and the contact surface 214f of the releasing member 214 shown in part (d) of Figure 47 abut against the abutment surface 204a5 of the projecting portion 202b. That is, in the releasing member 214, the rotation in the rotational direction E is stopped by the contact surface 214f and the contact surface 214f abutting (contacting) the abutment surface 204a5 of the projecting portion 202b. In this manner, the rotation restriction release operation of the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is completed in the state where the toner pack 220 is in the mounting complete position shown in part (b) of Figures 66 (part (d) of Figure 66) and Figure 68. The cross-section taken along a line X214-X214 in part (a) of Figure 68 is the same as that in part (b) of Figure 51, and the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released.
As described above, by mounting the toner pack 220 on the mounting portion 206, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released through the first step and the second step described above. Although the third slope 204a3 of this embodiment is a slope, the present invention is not limited to such an example. It will suffice if the surface it is a surface that engageable with the third guided surface 214e3 so that the releasing member 214 to move the releasing member 414 in the direction of arrow G (upward) when the toner pack 220 is mounted to the mounting portion 206. In addition, in this embodiment, in the second step, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction E, but the structure may be such that the releasing member 214 is not rotated in the rotational direction E.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 68, the mounting completion position of the toner pack 220 is the position where the projecting portion end surface 202b2 of the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 is in contact with the pack contact surface 209g of the apparatus-side shutter 209. At this mounting complete position, the position of the toner pack 220 in the direction of the rotational axis A is determined with respect to the mounting portion 206. In addition, the inner peripheral surface 202b 1 of the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 is fitted (engaged) with the small diameter portion 209d2 of the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209, By which the position thereof in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC on the downstream side of the mounting direction M. Further, as shown in part (c) of Figure 68 which is a cross-section taken along line X212-X212 of part (a) of Figure 68, three positions of the radial positioning portion 203f (Figure 57, Figure 59) of the pack side shutter 203 are in contact with the inner peripheral surface 209h (Figure 44) of the apparatus-side shutter 209. By this, the positions of the nozzle 202 and the pack side shutter 203 (toner pack 220) in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC on the upstream side of the mounting direction M is determined.
On the other hand, as shown in part (b) of Figure 68 which is a cross-section taken along a line X213-X213 of part (a) of Figure 68, the positioning portion 207a of the first frame 207 is engaged with the positioned portion of the nozzle 202 having the surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2. Therefore, the nozzle 202 is positioned with respect to the first frame 207 (base frame 221) in the arrow R direction of the surface 202d1 and the surface 202d2. By this, the position of the nozzle 202 is determined with respect to the first frame 207 in the direction of the arrow R, and therefore, the operation of releasing the rotation restriction relative to the apparatus-side shutter 209 can be further stabilized. In this description, the magnitudes of the force F204, the force F205, and the force F206 for operating the releasing member 214 are selected to be so large that the influences of gravity and frictional force can be ignored, and therefore, the description relating to the gravity and the frictional force are omitted.
By the mechanism described above, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released, and the apparatus-side shutter 209 becomes rotatable from the closed position to the release position.
Further, It is possible that when the contact surface 214a and the contact surface 214f of the releasing member 214 come into contact with the abutment surface 204a5, the releasing member 214 is vigorously rotated by the moment M202 to generate a light collision sound. In addition, the hand of the user holding the toner pack 220 can be made to feel the reaction. That is, the user can also recognize that the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released (mounting is completed) by the collision sound or the reaction. When the toner pack 220 is dismounted from the mounting portion 206, the reverse process of Figure 65 is carried out, and the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is restricted by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 again.

(Operation of operation lever)

When the toner pack 220 is in the mounting complete position, as shown in part (b) of Figure 68, the drive transmission portion 208a (lever projection) of the operating lever 208 and the driven transmission portion 203b (rotatable member recess) of the pack side shutter 203 are engaged with each other. In addition, as shown in part (c) of Figure 68, the driven transmission portion 203b (rotatable member recess portion) of the pack-side shutter 203 is engaged with the driven transmission portion 209e (shutter projection) of the apparatus-side shutter 209. That is, as described above, the structure is such that in the state where the toner pack 220 is mounted on the mounting portion 206, the operating lever 208, the pack-side shutter 203, and the apparatus-side shutter 209 rotate integrally around the rotational axis A (rotational axis B).
Here, part (a) of Figure 69 is a perspective view of the toner pack 220 when the operating lever 208 is in the closed position, as viewed from above. Part (b) of Figure 69 is a perspective view of the toner pack 220 when the operating lever 208 is in the open position, as viewed from above. Part (c) of Figure 69 is an illustration showing a state in which the user loosens the accommodating portion 201 and replenishes the toner in the state of part (b) of Figure 69.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 69 and part (b) of Figure 69 it is understood that when the operating portion 208b of the operating lever 208 is rotated in the rotational direction D after the mounting of the toner pack 220 on the mounting portion 206 is completed, the apparatus-side shutter 209 rotates from the closed position to the open position, and the accommodating portion 101 does not rotate even when the operating lever 208 for rotating the pack-side shutter 203 from the closed position to the open position is rotated. It is the pack side shutter 203 and the apparatus-side shutter 209 that rotate together with the operating lever 208.
When the pack-side shutter 203 rotates from the closed position to the open position, a frictional force F207 received by the nozzle 102 from the pack-side shutter 103 by way of the pack-side seal 105 is directed in the rotational direction K as shown in part (a) of Figure 57. This is the same direction as the rotational direction D of the operating lever 108 in Figure 69. The nozzle 202 receives the frictional force F207 and may rotate in the rotational direction K by the amount of the play between the surfaces 202d1 and the surfaces 202d2 and the positioning portion 207a of the first frame 207. The rotational direction of the nozzle 202 at this time is such that the third slope 204a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a approaches the releasing claw 214e of the releasing member 214, and such that the third slope 204b3 of the second restriction releasing portion 204b approaches the releasing claw 214e of the releasing member 214. That is, when the operating lever 208 is rotated to rotate the pack-side shutter 203 from the closed position to the open position, the restricting member 213 moves upward (in the U direction) together with the releasing member 214. Then, the second restricting surface 213c of the restricting member 213 is separated upward from the restricted rib 209c of the apparatus-side shutter 209, with the result that the margin for releasing the rotation restriction is increased. Therefore, it is possible to more stably maintain the state in which the rotation restriction is released with respect to the apparatus-side shutter 109.
By the above operation, the toner pack 220 accommodating portion 201 and the toner accommodating chamber 36 are brought into contact with each other by way of the discharge opening 202a, the receiving opening 209a, and the apparatus-side opening 217a.
Here, part (a) of Figure 70 is a sectional view of the toner pack 220 and the mounting portion 206 when both the apparatus-side shutter 209 and the pack-side shutter 203 are in the closed positions. Part (b) of Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view of the toner pack 220 and the mounting portion 206 when both the apparatus-side shutter 209 and the pack-side shutter 203 are in the open positions.
In part (a) of Figure 70, the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 is closed by the pack side shutter 203, the pack side seal 205, and the apparatus-side shutter 209, so that the toner in the accommodating portion 201 cannot reach the apparatus-side opening 217a of the second frame 217. On the other hand, in part (b) of Figure 70, the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 is opened by the movement of the pack-side shutter 203, the pack-side seal 205, and the apparatus-side shutter 209. As shown in part (c) of Figure 69, as the accommodating portion 201 is compressed by the user, the toner in the accommodating portion 201 is discharged to the outside of the toner pack 220 together with the air from the discharge opening 202a. A part of the air discharged from the discharge opening 202a passes through the first filter 218 and the second filter to be discharged to the outside of the mounting portion 206. The toner is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32 through the apparatus-side opening 217a of the second frame 217.

(Modified Example 1)

Next, referring to Figures 72 to 78, another structure will be described. The same points as those of the above-described examples will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this modified example, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiment 2 are assigned the like names as the members of Embodiment 2, and the points different from those of Embodiment 2 will be described.
In this embodiment, the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 is integrally formed with the nozzle 202. In this modified example, the projecting portion of Embodiment 2 is an attachment which is a component different from the nozzle. The attachment is an attachment to be mounted to the image forming apparatus 1. And, a mounting kit includes the attachment and a toner pack having no projection. The structure of the attachment will be described below.
Figure 72 is a perspective view of the attachment 2102A of this modified example. Part (a) of Figure 72 and part (b) of Figure 72 are perspective views of the attachment 2102A as viewed from points different from each other, and part (c) of Figure 72 is a perspective view of the attachment as viewed from a point different that of part (b) of Figure 72. Figure 76 is a perspective view of the toner pack 2120 having no projection. Part (a) of Figure 77 is a side view of a state in which the toner pack 2120 is mounted on the image forming apparatus 1, and part (b) of Figure 77 is a sectional view taken along a line X2103-X2103 in part (a) of Figure 77. Figure 78 is a perspective view of the attachment 21102A having a shape different from that of the attachment 2102A of this modified example.
When the attachment 2102A is mounted to the mounting portion 206, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 can be released even if the mounting is started from any phase in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC to the mounting portion 206. The structure of this modified example will be described below.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 72, the attachment 2102A has a generally cylindrical shape, and includes a cylindrical portion 2102Aa and a projecting portion 2102Ab provided in the order named from the first end side of the first direction D1. The cylindrical portion 2102Aa and the projecting portion 2102Ab have inner peripheral surfaces 2102Ab1. The inner peripheral surface 2102Ab1 of this modified example is a cylindrical surface having a central axis A. The inner peripheral surface 2102Ab1 does not necessarily have to be a cylindrical surface as in Embodiment 2. The projecting portion 2102Ab has the same structure as the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2 shown in part (b) of Figure 59 and part (c) of Figure 59 and Figure 60. The first restriction releasing portion 2104a (first projection) and the second restriction releasing portion 2104b (second projection) of the projecting portion 2102Ab in the present modified example have the same structure as the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the second restriction releasing portion 204b of Embodiment 2, respectively, and they are structured with the central axis A of the inner peripheral surface 2102Ab1 as the reference. That is, the first slope 2104a1, the second slope 2104a2, the third slope 2104a3, the cavity 2104a4, and the abutment surface 2104a5 of the projecting portion 2102Ab have the same structures as the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, and the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4, and the abutment surface 204a5, respectively, and are structured with the central axis A of the inner peripheral surface 2102Ab 1 as the reference. The second restriction releasing portion 2104b has a shape that is 180 degrees rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A of the first restriction releasing portion 2104a, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
The cylindrical portion 2102Aa and the projecting portion 2102Ab are coaxially with the central axis A. The cylindrical portion 2102Aa is provided with an end surface 2102Ax perpendicular to the central axis A on the first end side in the first direction D1. Here, the attachment 2102A has a shape that is 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the central axis A, and therefore, only one side will be described. The cylindrical portion 2102Aa is provided with projections 2102Am and 2102An which are on the second end side in the first direction D1 and which project in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the central axis A. The projections 2102Am and 2102An are placed in the projecting portion 2102Ab in the rotational direction about the central axis A, and a projection 2102An is provided on the downstream side in the rotational direction E of the projection 2102Am. In addition, on the upstream side of the projection 2102Am in the rotational direction E, an end surface 2102Ar parallel to the central axis A and crossing the rotational direction E is provided. Further, on the downstream side of the projection 2102An in the rotational direction E, an end surface 2102As parallel to the central axis A and crossing the rotational direction E is provided. The end surface 2102As is provided adjacent to the restriction releasing portion 2104b of the projecting portion 2102Ab, and the end surface 2102As is on the downstream side, in the rotational direction E, of the surface 2104s which is a surface of the restriction releasing portion 2104b facing the downstream side in the rotational direction E. Here, the surface 2104s is a flat surface which is parallel to the central axis A and crossing the rotational direction about the central axis A. The end surface 2102As and the surface 2104s are smoothly connected in the first direction D1 by a slope 2102Aw.
End surfaces 2102At and 2102Au on the second end side, in the first direction D 1, of the projections 2102Am and 2102An are flat surfaces perpendicular to the central axis A, are placed at the same position in the first direction D1 and are located on the first end side in the first direction D1 from the projection end surface 2102Ab2 of the projecting portion 2102Ab.

(Mounting of attachment)

The attachment 2102A is mounted to the mounting portion 206 of the image forming apparatus 1. The details will be described below. Referring to Figures 73, 74 and 75, a method (usage method) of mounting the attachment 2102A to the image forming apparatus 1 will be described.
Figure 73 is a schematic view illustrating parts of the cover 210, the restricting member 213, the releasing member 214, and the apparatus-side shutter 209 relating to a mounting operation of the attachment 2102A to the mounting portion 206, with the other portions omitted. Part (a) of Figure 73 is a top view, and part (b) of Figure 73 is a sectional view taken along the line X2101-X2101 in part (a) of Figure 73. Figure 74 and 75 are sectional views illustrating a mounting process. In addition, it is a Figure illustrating the cover 210, the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214, which are relating to mounting of the attachment 2102A to the image forming apparatus 1, With the other portions omitted. That is, Figures 74 and 75 are illustrations in which the apparatus-side shutter 209 is omitted from Figure 73. Part (a) of Figure 74, part (b) of Figure 74, part (a) of Figure 75 and part (b) of Figure 75 are sectional views, taken along a line X2101-X2101 in part (a) of Figure 73, illustrating the process of mounting the attachment 2102A to the image forming apparatus 1. In addition, part (c) of Figure 74, part (d) of Figure 74, part (c) of Figure 75, and part (d) of Figure 75 are cross-sectional views taken along a line X2102-X2102 in part (b) of Figure 73, corresponding to the states shown in part (a) of Figure 74, part (b) of Figure 74, part (a) of Figure 75, and part (b) of Figure 75, respectively.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 73, the user mounts the attachment 2102A to the mounting portion 206 by moving it downward (arrow N) with the projecting portion 2102Ab facing downward (gravity direction) and with the central axis A directed approximately in a predetermined direction facing the gravity direction. At this time, the mounting movement is effected so that the inner peripheral surface 2102Ab 1 (recess) of the attachment 2102A is engaged (fitted) with the center boss 209d (positioning shaft, shaft portion) of the apparatus-side shutter 209. By engaging (fitting) the inner peripheral surface 2102Ab1 of the attachment 2102A with the center boss 209d, the attachment 2102A is positioned in the radial direction about the rotational axis B with respect to the apparatus-side shutter 209, and the central axis A of the attachment 2102A becomes coaxial with the rotational axis B of the mounting portion 206. Further, the user pushes the attachment 2102A in the direction of arrow N while rotating it in the rotational direction E.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 74 and part (c) of Figure 74, when the attachment 2102A is mounted in the direction of the arrow N, the inner peripheral surface 2102Ab1 of the attachment 2102A engages with the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209, and then the projecting portion end surface 2102Ab2 of the attachment 2102A abuts to the upper surface 210i of the cover 210. Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 74 and part (d) of Figure 74, the user pushes the attachment 2102A in the direction of the arrow N while rotating the attachment 2102A in the rotational direction E, and the projection end surface 2102Ab2 of the attachment 2102A abuts to the end surface 214h of the releasing member 214 placed on the second end side in the first direction D1. As shown in part (a) of Figure 75 and part (c) of Figure 75, when the user further rotates the attachment 2102A in the rotational direction E, the first slope 2104a1 of the attachment 2102A comes into contact with the guided surface 214e1 of the releasing member 214. In this manner, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D while being guided by the first slope 2104a1 by application of a force from the first slope 214a1 as in Embodiment 2. Further, By the user rotating the attachment 2102A in the rotational direction E, as shown in part (c) of Figure 75, the surface 2104s abuts to the eave portion 210n of the cover 210 in the rotational direction E, and the rotation of the attachment 2102A is stopped thereby.
When the user further pushes the attachment 2102A in the direction of the arrow N from the state shown in part (a) of Figure 75 and part (c) of Figure 75, the slope 2102Aw (see part (b) of Figure 72) abuts to the eave portion 210n of the cover 210, by which an attachment 2102A slightly rotates in the rotational direction D along the slope 2102Aw relative to the cover 210. Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 75 and part (d) of Figure 75, when the user pushes the attachment 2102A in the direction of the arrow N, the end surface 2102As and the end surface 2102Ar are sandwiched in the rotational direction centered on the central axis A, between the eave portion 210n and the surface 210r facing the eave portion 210n in the rotational direction centered on the central axis A, and it is tightly fitted. Here, the surface 210r is parallel to the central axis A and process with the rotational direction E about the central axis A. Further, when the attachment 2102A is pushed in the arrow N direction by the user, the projecting portion end surface 2102Ab2 abuts to the pack contact surface 209g, and the movement of the attachment 2102A in the arrow N direction is stopped (see part (b) of Figure 77)
The operation of the releasing member 214 accompanying the attachment of the above attachment 2102A to the mounting portion 206 will be described.
First, as shown in part (a) of Figure 75, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D while being guided by the first slope 2104a1.
Further, the attachment 2102A moves in the direction of the arrow N, and the releasing member 214 rotated in the rotational direction D by the force F204 (see Figure 65) which the first guided surface 214e1 receives from the first slope 2104a1, against the urging force F203 of the spring 216 shown in Figure 50.
The releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D until the first guided surface 214e1 passes the downstream end, in the rotational direction D, of the first slope 2104a1 in the rotational direction D.
The attachment 2102A is further moved in the direction of the arrow N, the second slope 2104a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 2104a abuts to the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e, with the results of the state shown in part (c) of Figure 65 (part (f) of Figure 65) is reached. In this state, when the attachment 2102A is moved in the direction of the arrow N, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by the force F205 received by the second guided surface 214e2 from the second slope 2104a2, against the urging force F203 applied by the releasing spring 216 of the releasing spring 216.
The releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D until the second guided surface 214e2 passes the downstream end, in the rotational direction D, of the second slope 2104a2 in the rotational direction D. The rotation of the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D up to this point is the first step for releasing the rotation restriction.
The subsequent operations of the releasing member 214 are the same as those in Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
As in Embodiment 2, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the image forming apparatus 1 is released, and the apparatus-side shutter 209 becomes in a rotatable state. Here, the attachment 2102A is started to be mounted to the mounting portion 206 at any phase in the rotational direction about the central axis A. The release operation is started from which state described above depends on the phase at which the mounting is started, but the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 can be released regardless of the state at which the release operation is started.
After the attachment 2102A is mounted to the mounting portion 206, the toner pack 2120 having no projection as shown in Figure 76 is mounted to the mounting portion 206 of the image forming apparatus 1 as shown in Figure 77. As shown in Figure 76, since the toner pack 2120 of this modified example has the same shape as that of Embodiment 2 except for the nozzle 202 shown in Embodiment 2, the description other than the nozzle 2102B will be omitted.
In the nozzle 2102B of this modified example, a cylindrical recess portion 2102Ba is provided coaxially with the central axis A on the first end side in the first direction D1. A surface 2102Bb perpendicular to the central axis A is provided on the second end side of the recess 2102Ba in the first direction D1. As shown in part (b) of Figure 77, the toner pack 2120 is mounted to the mounting portion 206 in the same manner as in Embodiment 2, and the through hole 203h which is on first end side of the pack side shutter 203 in the first direction D1 and which is coaxial with the central axis A the attachment 2102A engages with the cylindrical portion 2102Aa. It will suffice if the through hole 203h is larger than the cylindrical portion 2102Aa. Thereafter, similarly, the recess 2102Ba of the nozzle 2102B engages (fits) with the cylindrical portion 2102Aa of the attachment 2102A and the position of the nozzle 2102B in the radial direction relative to the attachment 2102A is determined. Further, the surface 2102Bb of the nozzle 2102B abuts to the end surface 2102Ax of the attachment 2102A, so that the mounting in the arrow N direction is completed. Thereafter, the toner in the accommodating portion 2101 is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32 in the same manner as in Embodiment 2. After use, the toner pack 2120 is removed in the same manner as in Embodiment 2, and then the attachment 2102A is removed against the tightening fitting force of the cover 210.
A mounting kit may include the attachment 2102A and the toner pack 2120 having no projection are set.
The method of using the mounting kit has two steps. The first step is a step of moving the attachment 2102A downward along the central axis in a state of being oriented in the predetermined direction described above to mount the attachment 2102A to the mounting portion. The second step is a step after the first step, and is a step of mounting the toner pack 2120 on the mounting portion. By the first step, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released. By the second step, the toner pack 2120 is mounted to the mounting portion 206 to which the attachment 2102A is mounted.
By transporting the toner pack in the form of the mounting kit, the packaging size of the toner pack 2120 in the central axis A direction can be reduced as compared with the structure of Embodiment 2. When the toner pack 2120 is used, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 can be released as in the other embodiments, by the user mounting the attachment 2102A to the image forming apparatus 1 in advance. When the toner pack 2120 is used, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 can be released as in the other embodiments, by the use of mounting the attachment 2102A to the toner pack 2120 in advance.
Next, the attachment 21102A having a structure simpler than that of the attachment 2102A will be described.
The attachment 2102A has been described as having the structure with which the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 can be released regardless of the beginning phase, in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC, of the mounting of the attachment 2102A to the mounting portion 206. However, it is also possible to employ a simpler structure such as the attachment 21102A, with which the user aligns and mounts the mounting portion 206 so as to match the phase of the mounting portion 206 around the central axis A.
As shown in Figure 78, the attachment 21102A has a generically cylindrical shape, and a cylindrical portion 21102Aa and a projecting portion 21102Ab (projecting portion) are provided in the order named in the first direction D1. In the following, in the first direction D1, the cylindrical portion 21102 side of the attachment 21102A is referred to as the first end portion and the projecting portion side is referred to as the second end portion.
The cylindrical portion 21102Aa has an inner peripheral surface 21102Ab1. The inner peripheral surface 21102Ab1 of this modified example is a cylindrical surface having a central axis A. As shown in Figure 71 of Embodiment 2, the inner peripheral surface 21102Ab1 does not have to be a cylindrical surface as long as the central axis A can be defined. The projecting portion 21102Ab has the same structure as the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2 shown in part (b) of Figure 59 and part (c) of Figure 59 and 60. The first restriction releasing portion 21104a (first projection) and the second restriction releasing portion 21104b (second projection) of the projecting portion 21102Ab have the same structures as the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the second restriction releasing portion 204b of Embodiment 2, respectively, and it is structured with respect to the central axis A of the inner peripheral surface 21102Ab1. That is, the first slope 21104a1, the second slope 21104a2, the third slope 21104a3, the cavity 21104a4, and the abutment surface 21104a5 of the projecting portion 21102Ab are the first slope 204a1 have the same structures as the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4, and the abutment surface 204a5, respectively, and they are structured with reference to the central axis A of the inner peripheral surface 2102Ab1. The second restriction releasing portion 21104b has a shape which is 180 degrees rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A of the first restriction releasing portion 21104a, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
On the first end side of the cylindrical portion 21102Aa in the first direction D1, a triangular marking portion 21102Ac recessed toward the second end side in the first direction D1 is provided at a position away from the central axis A. Further, as shown in Figure 76, In the toner pack 2120 of this modified example, the nozzle 2102B is provided with a cylindrical recess portion 2102Ba in order to avoid interference with the attachment 21102A already mounted on the mounting portion 206, when the toner pack 2120 is mounted on the mounting portion 206. Other structures will be described hereinafter.
As shown in Figure 77, the user mounts the attachment 21102A to the mounting portion 206 so that the marking portion 21102Ac faces the operating portion 208b of the operation lever 208 shown in Figure 67 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC centered on the central axis A. This is because when the attachment 21102A is mounted on the mounting portion 206, it is necessary to align the phase around the central axis A between the projecting portion 21102Ab and the mounting portion 206. The operation for releasing the rotation restriction of the mounting portion 206 is the same as the above-described structure, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Thereafter, the user mounts the toner pack 2120 on the mounting portion 206. Then, as in Embodiment 2, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released, and the toner can be replenished from the toner pack 2120 into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32.
Or, the structure may be such that when using the toner pack 2120, the attachment 21102A is mounted to the toner pack 2120 in advance. By doing so, similarly to embodiment 2, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 can be released by the attachment operation of the toner pack 2120 to the mounting portion 206. In this case, the attachment 21102A is mounted to the lower, when the toner pack 2120 is oriented in a predetermined direction, end of the nozzle 2102B in a predetermined rotation phase. By doing so, the phase adjustment at the time of mounting on the mounting portion 206 is unnecessary.
The structure of the projecting portion 2102Ab in this modified example can be used not only for the projecting portion 202b of embodiment 2 but also for modified examples of Embodiment 2.

(Modified Example 2)

Next, referring to Figures 79 to 87, another structure will be described. The same points as those of the above-described embodiments and modified examples will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this modified example, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiment 2 and Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2 are assigned the like names as the members of Embodiment 2 and Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2, and only the points different from those of Embodiment 2 and Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2 will be described.
In Modified Example 1 of Embodiment 2, the mounting kit comprising the attachment 2102 including the projecting portion 2102Ab, and a toner pack 2120 including the pack side shutter 203 and the accommodating portion 2101 has been described. In the now describing modified example, a structure in which the attachment has a shutter (rotatable member) will be described. That is, this modified example relates to a mounting kit comprising an attachment including a shutter and a projecting member having a projecting portion, and a toner pack. Although with such a mounting kit, it is possible to release the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 and replenish the toner from the toner pack into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32, as in Embodiment 2.
In this modified example, referring to Figures 79, 80, 81 and 82, the attachment 2230 including the projecting member 2202 and the shutter 2203 will be described. Part (a) of Figure 79 and part (b) of Figure 79 are a perspective view and a side view of the attachment 2230 of this modified example, respectively. Parts (a) and (b) of Figure 80 are perspective views of the shutter 2203 as viewed in different directions, respectively. Figure 81 is a perspective view of the projecting member 2202.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 79, the attachment 2230 of this modified example has a shutter (rotatable member) 2203 and a projecting member 2202 (projecting member). The shutter 2203 and the projecting member 2202 are arranged in the first direction D1.
Referring to Figures 80 and 81, the structure of each component will be described in detail. Here, the shutter 2203 of this modified example has the same shape as the pack-side shutter 203 of Embodiment 2 except for the portion to which the projecting member 2202 is mounted, and therefore, only the mounting portion of the projecting member 2202 will be described. The shutter 2203 is mounted to the projecting member 2202 rotatably about the central axis A as the rotational axis. Further, in the following, in the first direction D1, the shutter 2203 side is referred to as the first end portion and the projecting member 2202 side is referred to as the second end portion.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 80, the shutter 2203 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the central axis A, and has a hollow cylindrical portion 2203a substantially coaxial with the central axis A on the second end side in the first direction D1. For the shutter 2203, in the inside of hollow cylindrical portion 2203a centered on the central axis A, there are provided a cylindrical surface 2203b and a through hole 2203c having a diameter smaller than that of the cylindrical surface 2203b, substantially coaxially with the axis A, in this order from the first end side in the first direction D1. The hollow cylindrical portion 2203a is provided with two snap-fit portions 2203k at the positions 180-degree rotational symmetry about the central axis A. The snap-fit portion 2203k is provided so as to project from the hollow cylindrical portion 2203a toward the first end portion in the first direction D1, and is provided with a claw portion 2203m projecting toward the central axis A side. The claw portion 2203m faces the second end portion side in the first direction D1 and has a support surface 2203n substantially perpendicular to the central axis A. In addition, the surface 2203r is on the central axis A side of the claw portion 2203m. The surface 2203r is arranged inside the cylindrical surface 2203b with respect to the central axis A. The cylindrical surface 2203b and the through hole 2203c are connected by a surface 2203d substantially perpendicular to the central axis A. As shown in part (b) of Figure 80, the surface 2203d is provided with two recesses 2203e recessed toward the second end side in the first direction D1 at the position 180 degrees symmetric positions about the central axis A. The recess portion 2203e has a sector recess shape centered on the central axis A, the side thereof close to the central axis A is in fluid communication with the through hole 2203c, and the side thereof far from the central axis A has a smaller radius than the cylindrical surface 2203b. Further, the angle of the sector shape about the central axis A is about 90 degrees. The recess portion 2203e is provided with a surface 2203f which crosses the rotational direction D on the upstream side in the rotational direction D and a surface 2203g which substantially crosses the rotational direction D on the downstream side in the rotational direction D. A surface 2203h substantially perpendicular to the central axis A is provided on the second end, in the first direction D1, side (bottom surface of the recess) of the recess portion 2203e. As shown in part (b) of Figure 83, the shutter 2203 further is provided with a driven transmission portion 2203u (rotatable member recess) recessed inward in the radial direction r on a side peripheral portion centered on the central axis A. In addition, as viewed in the direction of the central axis A, a shutter opening 2203t (rotatable member opening) is provided on the side opposite from the side provided with the driven transmission portion 2203s with respect to the central axis A. The driven transmission portion 2203u has the same structure and function as the driven transmission portion 203b shown in part (b) of Figure 57 and part (a) of Figure 59 of Embodiment 2. The shutter opening 2203t has the same structure as the opening 203a shown in part (a) of Figure 57 and part (a) of Figure 61 of Embodiment 2.
As shown in Figure 81, the projecting member 2202 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the central axis A, and is provided with a first cylindrical portion 2202a, a second cylindrical portion 2202c having a diameter smaller than that of the cylindrical portion 2202a and a substantially cylindrical projecting portion 2202b (projecting portion) in this order from the first end portion side in the first direction D1. Central axes of the first cylindrical portion 2202a and the second cylindrical portion 2202c of the projecting member 2202 are coincident with the central axis A. In addition, the projecting member 2202 has an inner peripheral surface 2202b 1 (guide inner peripheral surface, positioning inner peripheral surface) centered on the central axis A. The inner peripheral surface 2202b1 of this modified example is a cylindrical surface having the central axis A. The inner peripheral surface 2202b1 is preferably a cylindrical surface or a surface for which a central axis A can be defined as shown in Figure 71 of Embodiment 2.
The projecting portion 2202b has the same shape as the projecting portion 202b of Embodiment 2 shown in part (b) of Figure 59, part (c) of Figure 59 and Figure 60. The first restriction releasing portion 2204a (first projection) and the second restriction releasing portion 2204b (second projection) of the projecting member 2202Ab of this modified example have the same structures as the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the second restriction releasing portion 204b of Embodiment 2, respectively, and is structured with reference to the central axis A as the rotational axis of the shutter 2203. That is, the first slope 2204a1, the second slope 2204a2, the third slope 2204a3, the cavity 2204a4, and the abutment surface 2204a5 of the projecting member 2202Ab have the same structures as the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, the cavity 204a4 and the abutment surface 204a5 of Embodiment 2, respectively, and they are structured with reference to the central axis A of the inner peripheral surface 2102Ab1. The second restriction releasing portion 2204b has a shape which is 180 degrees rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A of the first restriction releasing portion 2204a, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Two projections 2202e projecting from the first cylindrical portion 2202a toward the second end portion in the first direction D1 are provided at two positions 180-degree rotational symmetry about the central axis A. The projecting member 2202e is provided inside an outer shape of the first cylindrical portion 2202a in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the central axis A, and the central axis A side thereof is connected to the second cylindrical portion 2202c. The projections 2202e are each provided with an end surface 2202f which crosses the rotational direction D on the upstream side in the rotational direction D and an end surface 2202g which crosses the rotational direction D on the downstream side in the rotational direction D.
Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 79, the projecting member 2202b is inside the width of the shutter opening 2203t in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A, as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A so that the shutter opening 2203t of the shutter 2203 faces the front.

(Assembling)

Next, referring to Figures 82 and 83, the assembly of the shutter 2203 and the projecting member 2202 will be described. Figure 82 is an exploded perspective view of the attachment 2230 of this modified example. Part (a) of Figure 83 and part (b) of Figure 83 are sectional views taken along lines X2201-X2201 and X2202-X2202, respectively in Figure 79 at the time when the projecting member 2202 is placed at the first position relative to the shutter 2203.
As shown in Figure 82, the projecting member 2202 is provided substantially coaxially with the central axis A from the first end side toward the shutter 2203 in the first direction D1. The projecting member 2202 is mounted to the shutter 2203 while pushing the two snap-fit portions 2203k of the shutter 2203 in directions away from each other. Thereafter, the projecting member 2202 is supported by the shutter 2203 so that the second cylindrical portion 2202c is fitted in the through hole 2203c of the shutter 2203. Further, the outer circumference of the first cylindrical portion 2202a of the projecting member 2202 is fitted to the cylindrical surface 2203b of the shutter 2203 with slight tightness.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 83, the first cylindrical portion 2202a of the projecting member 2202 abuts on the surface 2203d of the shutter 2203, and positioning thereof is effected in the first direction D1. Further, the projecting member 2202 abuts on the support surface 2203n of the snap-fit portion 2203k of the shutter 2203 on the first end side of the first direction D 1, and the hollow cylindrical portion 2203a is sandwiched between the surface 2203d and the support surface 2203n. By this, the projecting member 2202 is restricted so as not to disengage off through the shutter 2203 in the first direction D 1.
On the other hand, as shown in part (b) of Figure 83, in the rotational direction about the central axis A, the end surface 2202g of the projecting member 2202e of the projecting member 2202 abuts the surface 2203g of the shutter 2203. This position is referred to as a first position.
Here, the projecting member 2202 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the shutter 2203 in a certain range in the rotational direction centered on the central axis A, and in other words, the projecting member 2202 is supported so as to be movable relative to the shutter 2203 between the first position and the second position in the rotational direction centered on the rotational axis A. The projecting member 2202 is supported by the shutter 2203 so that the projecting portion 2202b projects beyond the lower surface of the shutter 2203 as shown in Figure 83, when the projecting member 2202b is oriented in the predetermined direction such that it projects downward (gravity direction) and the central axis A is in the gravity direction. Further, as shown in part (a) of Figure 83 and part (b) of Figure 79, when the projecting member 2202b projects downward and the central axis A is oriented in a predetermined direction facing the direction of gravity, as shown in part (a) of Figure 83 and part (b) of Figure 79, and the projecting member 2202 is supported by the shutter 2203 so as to project (project) downward beyond the lower surface 2203v of the shutter 2203. Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 83, the projecting member 2202 (projecting portion 2202b) is placed at the position closer to the central axis A in the radial direction r than the driven transmission portion 2203u of the shutter 2203 as viewed in the direction of the central axis A.

(Mounting of attachment)

That is, the attachment 2230 is moved downward (in the direction of arrow N) toward the mounting portion 206 in a state of being oriented in the predetermined direction described above, and is mounted to the mounting portion 206.
At this time, the driven transmission portion 2203u of the shutter 2203 shown in part (b) of Figure 83 is engaged with the driven transmission portion 209e (shutter projection, see Figure 44) of the apparatus-side shutter 209. By doing so, the shutter opening 2203t of the shutter 2203 and the receiving opening 209a of the apparatus-side shutter 209 are brought into fluid communication with each other. In addition, the inner peripheral surface 2202b 1 of the projecting portion 2202b of the projecting member 2202 is fitted (engaged) with the small diameter portion 209d2 of the center boss 209d of the mounting portion 206.
Similarly to Embodiment 2, when the restriction releasing portion of the projecting member 2202b of the attachment 2230 (same as the projecting portion 202b of Embodiment 2) acts on the releasing member 214 of the mounting portion 206, the rotation restriction for the shutter 209 by the apparatus-side the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released. Thereafter, with the rotation of the operating lever 208 shown in part (a) of Figure 41 and part (b) of Figure 41, the shutter 2203 is rotated in the direction of an arrow D together with the apparatus-side shutter 209.
Referring to Figures 84 and 85, the operation of the attachment 2230 in association with the rotation of the operating lever 208 from the closed position to the open position will be described in detail. Part (a) of Figure 84, (b) and (c) are enlarged side views of a part of the mounting portion 206 (cover 210, restricting member 213, releasing member 214) and a connecting portion of the attachment 2230, illustrating the operation of the attachment 2230. Part (a) of Figure 84 is a side view when the operating lever 208 (not shown) is in the closed position, and part (b) of Figure 84 is a side view of when the operating lever 208 between the closed position and the open position, and part (c) of Figure 84 is a side view when the operating lever 208 is in the open position. Part (a) of Figure 85, Figure (b) and Figure (c) are cross-sectional views taken along a line X2203-X2203 in part (a) of Figure 84 corresponding to part (a) of Figure 84, part (b) of Figure 84 and part (c) of Figure 84, respectively.
Part (a) of Figure 84 and part (a) of Figure 85 show a state in which the attachment 2230 is mounted on the mounting portion 206 and the operating lever 208 is in the closed position. At this time, similarly to Embodiment 2, as the attachment 2230 is being mounted to the mounting portion 206, the restriction releasing portion of the projecting member 2202b (same as the projecting portion 202b of Embodiment 2) acts on the releasing member 214to release the rotation restriction effected by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus side shutter 209.
Next, when the operating lever 208 is rotated, the shutter 2203 also rotates in the direction of arrow D, and the state shown in part (b) of Figure 84 and part (b) of Figure 85 is reached. At this time, with the rotation of the shutter 2203, the projecting member 2202 fitted to the shutter 2203 with slight tightness also receives the frictional force from the shutter 2203 and rotates in the direction of the arrow D.
Here, since the projecting member 2202b is engaged with the releasing member 214, the releasing member 214 also rotates in the direction of arrow D together with the projecting member 2202. The attachment 2230 rotated in the direction of arrow D has stopped moving in the rotational direction by the abutment between the rise restricted surface 214c and the restricting member 213. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 85, in the rotational direction centered on the central axis A, the projecting member 2202 maintains the first position where the end surface 2202g of the projecting member 2202e abuts against the surface 2203g of the shutter 2203.
Next, when the operating lever 208 is further rotated in the direction of arrow D against the friction with the projecting member 2202, the operating lever 208 is in the open position as shown in part (c) of Figure 84 and part (c) of Figure 85. At this time, in the rotational direction about the central axis A, the end surface 2202g of the projecting member 2202 is not in contact with the surface 2203g of the shutter 2203. The position of the projecting member 2202 at this time when the operating lever 208 is placed in the open position is the second position.
In the state shown in part (c) of Figure 84 and part (c) of Figure 85, the receiving opening 209a of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is exposed. Thereafter, as shown in Figure 86, the user mounts, a toner pack 2220 provided with a straw-shaped discharge member 2220a, for example to the receiving opening 209a, and can supply the toner in the accommodating portion 2201 to the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32.
For example, as shown in Figure 87, a lid member 2250 may be structured to be mounted to the attachment 2230 while the attachment 2230 is still mounted to the mounting portion 206.
When removing the attachment 2230, the operating lever 208 is rotated from the open position to the closed position in the direction of arrow E. Then, the operating lever 208, the shutter 2203, the projecting member 2202, and the releasing member 214 are interlocked to rotate in an arrow E direction in the reverse order of the operation associated with the rotation from the closed position to the open position described above. At this time, the operating lever moves from the open position to the closed position, and the projecting member 2202 moves from the second position to the first position.
Thereafter, by pulling out the attachment 2230 in the direction of arrow G (see Figure 67) in the same manner as in Embodiment 2, the attachment 2230 is taken out from the mounting portion 206.
As described above, also in the mounting kit comprising the attachment 2230 including the projecting member 2202 and the shutter 2203, and the toner pack 2220 including the accommodating portion, it is possible to release the rotation restriction for the shutter 209 by the apparatus-side rotation restricting mechanism 212 and to replenish the toner from the toner pack 2220 to the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32, similarly to Embodiment 2.
Further, in this modified example, the projecting member 2202 is structured to be movable within a predetermined range in the rotational direction about the central axis A relative to the mounting portion 206, but the same effect can be provided even when a positioning portion for positioning in the rotational direction about the central axis A with respect to the cover 210 as in Modified Example 1 without movement.
Further, as for the structure of the projecting member 2202b in this modified example, the structure of this modified example can be applied to the modified examples of embodiment 2 as well as to the projecting portion 202b of Embodiment 2.

(Modified Example 3)

In this embodiment (Embodiment 2), the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a are different slopes, and the second restriction releasing portion 204b has the same structure. However, as shown in Figure 88, the two slopes may have a smoothly continuous surface. Referring to Figures 88 to 91, the structure in this case will be described as an example of this modified example. In this modified example, the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 204a and the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2 of the second restriction releasing portion 204b of this embodiment are changed to have a smoothly continuous surface. The structure is the same as that of this embodiment except for this changed portion, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Figure 88 is an illustration of detailed shapes of a first restriction releasing portion 2304a (first projection) and a second restriction releasing portion 2304b (second projection) of this modified example. Part (a) of Figure 88 is a perspective view of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a and the second restriction releasing portion 2304b as viewed from the side (nozzle side) of the second end portion in the first direction D1. Part (b) of Figure 88 is a view of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Part (c) of Figure 88 is a sectional view taken along a line X2301-X2301 in part (b) of Figure 88. Part (d) of Figure 88 is a view of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a viewed in the direction of arrow U (upward).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 88, the projecting portion 2302b of the nozzle 2302 is provided with a restriction releasing portion 2304 including the first restriction releasing portion 2304a and the second restriction releasing portion 2304b. The first restriction releasing portion 2304a includes a first slope 2304a1 (downward surface, downward guide surface, downward force applying surface, downward push surface), a second slope 2304a2 (upward surface, upward guide surface), abutment surface 2304a3 (downstream side end surface, abutted surface)).
As shown in part (b) of Figure 88, the first slope 2304a1 faces the arrow N direction (downward), and it goes up in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction) about the rotational axis A.
Here, as shown in part (a) of Figure 88 and part (d) of Figure 88, an end of the first slope 2304a1 on the side closer to the rotational axis A in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A is referred to as an inner end 2304a4 (inner edge line, inner ridge line). In addition, the inner end 2304a4 includes an inner upstream end 2304a4U (inner upstream edge line, inner upstream ridge line) on the upstream side in the rotational direction K and, an inner downstream end 2304a4D (inner downstream edge line, inner downstream ridge line) on the downstream side, and an inner intermediate end 2304a4I (inner intermediate edge line, inner intermediate ridge line) connecting them. The inner downstream end 2304a4D is more remote from the rotational axis A in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A than the inner upstream end 2304a4U. In this embodiment, as shown in part (d) of Figure 88, the inner upstream end 2304a4U and the inner downstream end 2304a4D, have a first arc and a second arc centered on the rotational axis A, the second arc having a radius larger than that of the first arc as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A. The inner intermediate end 2304a4I extends in the radial direction r so as to connect the first arc and the second arc.
In addition, as shown in part (a) of Figure 88 and part (d) of Figure 88, an end of the first slope 2304a1 on the side remote from the rotational axis A in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A is referred to as an outer end 2304a5 (outer edge line, outer ridge line). Further, the outer end 2304a5 includes an outer upstream end 2304a5U (outer upstream edge line, outer upstream ridge line) on the upstream side in the rotational direction K, an outer downstream end 2304a5D (outer downstream edge line, outer downstream ridge line) on the downstream side an outer intermediate end 2304a5I (outer intermediate edge line, outer intermediate ridge line) connecting them. The outer downstream end 2304a5D is at a position more remote from the rotational axis A in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A than the outer upstream end 2304a5U. In this embodiment, as shown in part (d) of Figure 88, the outer upstream end 2304a5U and the outer downstream end 2304a5D have a third arc and a fourth arc centered on the rotational axis A, as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, the fourth arc having a radius larger than that of the third arc. The outer intermediate end 2304a5I extends in the radial direction r so as to connect the third arc and the fourth arc.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 88, at least a part of the second slope 2304a2 is provided on the arrow U direction (upward) side of at least a part of the first slope 2304a1.
As shown in part (c) of Figure 88, the first slope 2304a1 at this time has a first slope inside portion 2304a1I inside the second slope 2304a2 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. In addition, the first slope 2304a1 has a first slope outside portion 2304a1O at substantially the same position, in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, as the position of the second slope 2304a2. At this time, at least a part of the inner side 2304a1I of the first slope and at least a part of the outer side 2304a1O of the first slope overlap in the rotational direction K (see also part (d) of Figure 88).
The abutment surface 2304a3 is provided on the arrow U direction side of (above) from the downstream side end, in the rotational direction K, of the first slope inner side 2304a1I. At least a part of the inner side 2304a1I of the first slope and at least a part of the outer side 2304a1O of the first slope overlap with each other in the rotational direction K, and therefore, the abutment surface 2304a3 overlaps with the outer side 2304a1O of the first slope in the rotational direction K.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 88, the second restriction releasing portion 2304b has a first slope 2304b1 (downward surface, downward guide surface, downward force applying surface) and a second slope 2304b2 (upward surface, upward guide surface, abutment surface 2304b3. Here, the first restriction releasing portion 2304a and the second restriction releasing portion 2304b have a shape which is 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. Therefore, the detailed description of the second restriction releasing portion 2304b will be omitted.
Next, referring to Figures 89 and 90, a mechanism for releasing the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 effected by the rotation restricting mechanism 212, by mounting the toner pack 2320 of this modified example to the mounting portion 206 will be described. Figure 89 illustrates the operation of rotating the releasing claw 214e by the first slope 2304a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a, and part (a), part (c), and part (e) of Figure 89 show the process. Further, in Figure 89, part (b) thereof is a sectional view taken along a line X2302-X2302 in the state shown in part (a) of Figure 89, part (d) thereof is a sectional view taken along a line X2303-X2303 in the state of part (c) of Figure 89, and part (f) thereof is a sectional view taken along a line X2304-X2304-in the state shown in part (e) of Figure 89. Figure 90 shows an operation in which the releasing claw 214e is moved by the second slope 2304a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a. For the sake of better illustration, only the nozzle 2302 (restriction releasing portion 2304), the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 are shown in each part of this Figure. Further, in part (c) of Figure 89, the hidden part of the abutment surface 214a3 which overlaps with the rotational axis A is clearly shown by a thin line only in this part of the Figure.
By mounting the toner pack 2320, as shown in part (a) of Figure 89, the first slope 2304a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a is brought into contact with the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing claw 214e. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 89, the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing claw 214e contacts the inner side 2304a1I of the first slope of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a.
When the toner pack 2320 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this position, the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction D shown in part (a) of Figure 89 by the same operation as in this embodiment. That is, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by receiving a force while the first guided surface 214e1 is guided by the inner side 2304a1I of the first slope. Then, as shown in part (c) of Figure 89, the releasing member 214 is in a state of being rotated in the rotational direction D until the first guided surface 214e1 passes the downstream end of the first slope inner side 2304a1I in the rotational direction D. At this time, the contact between the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing claw 214e and the first slope 2304a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a is released, and the rotation of the releasing claw 214e in the rotational direction D is stopped. In addition, as described above, the inner downstream end 2304a4D of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a is placed at a position more remote from the rotational axis A in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A than the inner upstream end 2304a4U (part (d) of Figure 88). Therefore, as shown in part (d) of Figure 89, there is a space S230 on the arrow G direction side (upper side) of the releasing claw 214e.
When the toner pack 2320 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this position, the releasing claw 214e enters the space S230 in the arrow G direction (upward). At this time, by the moment M202 (urging force) provided by the releasing spring 216 (see Figure 50) shown in part (c) of Figure 89, the contact surface 214f of the releasing claw 214e is brought into contact with the abutment surface 2304a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a. By this, the releasing claw 214e is in a state in which rotation in the rotational direction E is restricted. At this time, since the abutment surface 2304a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a overlaps the first slope outer side 2304a1O in the rotational direction K, the first slope outer side 2304a1O overlaps with the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e in the direction D. Then, as shown in part (e) of Figure 89, the first slope 214a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a contacts the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e. At this time, as shown in part (f) of Figure 89, the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e contacts the outer side 2304a1O of the first slope of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a.
When the toner pack 2320 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this position, the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction D shown in part (e) of Figure 89 by the same operation as in this embodiment. That is, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by receiving a force while the second guided surface 214e2 is guided by the outer side 2304a1O of the first slope.
Then, the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction D until the second guided surface 214e2 passes the downstream end of the first slope outer side 2304a1O of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a in the rotational direction D. The operation up to this point is the first step in this modified example.
After the first step, as shown in part (a) of Figure 90, the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e rides on the downstream end of the second slope 2304a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a in the rotational direction D. Hereinafter, by the same operation as in this embodiment, as shown in part (b) of Figure 90, the contact surface 214a and the contact surface 214f of the releasing member 214 abut against the abutment surface 2304a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a. Then, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter (see Figure 40) by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released.
As described above, in this modified example, the first slope 204a1 and the second slope 204a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a in the embodiment which this modified example is based on have a smoothly continuous surface, and the first slope 204b1 and the second of the second restriction releasing portion 204b of the base embodiment are made continuous with each other. By this, it is sufficient to process one surface to provide the two surfaces, and therefore, the effect of reducing the processing man-hours can be expected.
In this modified example, the first slope 2304a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a has an inner intermediate end 2304a4I between the inner upstream end 2304a4U and the inner downstream end 2304a4D of the inner end 2304a4. This is because there is an abutment surface 2304a3. The same applies to the second restriction releasing portion 2304b.
Next, another structure will be described. As shown in Figure 91, the projection 23102b of the nozzle 23102 is provided with a restriction releasing portion 23104 including a first restriction releasing portion 23104a (first projection) and a second restriction releasing portion 23104b (second projection). The inner end 23104a4 (inner edge line, inner ridge line) of the first slope 23104a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a and the inner end 23104b4 (inner edge line, inner ridge line) of the first slope 23104a1 of the second restriction releasing portion 23104b are smoothly continuous from the upstream side to the downstream side in the rotational direction K. Hereinafter, the first restriction releasing portion 23104a and the second restriction releasing portion 23104b have a shape symmetric with 180 rotations about the rotational axis A, and therefore, only the first restriction releasing portion 23104a will be described. Figure 91 shows the shape of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a, and part (a) thereof is a perspective view as seen from the side (nozzle side) of the second end portion in the first direction D1, part (b) is a view as seen from the side (nozzle side) of the second end portion in the first direction D1, and part (c) is a sectional view taken along a line X23104-X23104 in part (a) of Figure 91.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 91, the inner end 23104a4 is smoothly continuous toward the outside of the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, as goes toward the downstream side in the rotational direction K. Here, the inner end 23104a4 includes an inner upstream end 23104a4U (inner upstream edge line, inner upstream ridge) on the upstream side in the rotational direction K, and an inner downstream end 23104a4D (inner downstream edge line, inner downstream ridge). The inner upstream end 23104a4U and the inner downstream end 23104a4D are ends which extend smoothly continuous. Similarly, the inner end 23104b4 includes an inner upstream end 23104b4U (inner upstream edge line, inner upstream ridge) on the upstream side in the rotational direction K and an inner downstream end 23104b4D (inner downstream edge line, inner downstream ridge). The inner upstream end 23104b4U and the inner downstream end 23104b4D are ends which extend smoothly continuous.
Further, as shown in part (c) of Figure 91, the first restriction releasing portion 23104a includes a first abutment surface 23104a5 on the arrow U direction side of (above) the inner end 23104a4 and a second abutment surface 23104a3 on the arrow U direction side of (above) the second slope 23104a2. Similarly, as shown in part (c) of Figure 91, the second restriction releasing portion 23104b includes a first abutment surface 23104b5 on the arrow U direction side of (above) the inner end 23104b4 and a second abutment surface 23104b3 on the arrow U direction side of (above) the second slope 23104b2.
Next, Referring to Figure 92, the description will be made as to a mechanism in which the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released by mounting the toner pack 23120 using the restriction releasing portion 23104 having another shape of this modified example. However, the description will be made only as to the points different from those of the modified examples, that is, only the operation after the releasing claw 214e is rotated in the rotational direction D by the first slope inner side 23104a1I of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a to release the contact with the first slope inner side 23104a1I. Figure 92 shows a state in which the releasing claw 214e has released the contact of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a with the inner side 23104a1I of the first slope, and part (a) of Figure 92 is a view as seen in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A, and part (b) of Figure 92 is a sectional view taken along a line X2306-X2306 in part (a) of Figure 92, and part (c) of Figure 92 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X2307-X2307 in part (a) of Figure 92. For the sake of better illustration, only the nozzle 2302 (restriction releasing portion 23104), the restricting member 213, and the releasing member 214 are shown in each Figure. Further, in part (c) of Figure 92, the cut surfaces of the nozzle 2302 (restriction releasing portion 23104) and the releasing claw 214e (releasing member 214) are shaded.
In the state shown in part (a) of Figure 92, In the releasing claw 214e, the contact between the first guided surface 214e1 and the inner side 23104a1I of the first slope of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a is released, and, and the rotation in the rotational direction D is stopped. Further, as described above, the inner end 23104a4 of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a has such a shape that it goes outward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, as goes in the rotational direction D (part (a) of Figure 91). Therefore, as shown in part (b) of Figure 92, there is a space S231 on the arrow G direction side (upper side) of the releasing claw 214e.
When the releasing claw 214e enters the space S231 in the arrow G direction (upward), the releasing claw 214e tends to be rotated in the rotational direction E by the moment M202 (urging force) by the releasing spring 216 (see Figure 50) shown in part (a) of Figure 92. Then, as shown in part (b) of Figure 92 and part (c) of Figure 92 , in the releasing claw 214e, the contact surface 214f is brought into contact with the first abutment surface 23104a5 of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a in the rotational direction E, by the moment M202. By this, the releasing claw 214e becomes in a state in which rotation in the rotational direction E is restricted.
Here, on the cross-section of part (c) of Figure 92, an intersection between the circumscribed circle C230 centered on the rotational axis A of the contact surface 214f of the releasing claw 214e and the first abutment surface 23104a5 of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a is an intersection P230. In, the intersection P230 is set so as to overlap the first slope outer side 2304a1O of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a with respect to the rotational direction K. Further, since the contact portion between the first abutment surface 23104a5 of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a and the contact surface 214f of the releasing claw 214e is the intersection P230, as shown in part (a) of Figure 92, the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e overlaps the outer side 23104a1O of the first slope of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a with respect to the rotational direction D.
When the toner pack 23120 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N (downward) from the state shown in Figure 92, the outer side 2304a1O of the first slope of the first restriction releasing portion 23104a and the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e are brought into contact with each other. Thereafter, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released by the same operation as the present modified example.
As described in the foregoing, in the restriction releasing portion 23104 having above-described another shape of the present modified example, the inner upstream end 23104a4U and the inner downstream end 23104a4D of the first restriction releasing portion 2304a in the present modified example constitute the one smoothly continuous inner end. In addition, the inner upstream end 23104b4U and the inner downstream end 23104b4D of the second restriction releasing portion 23104b constitute one smoothly continuous end (edge line, ridge line). By this, the two ridge lines (faces) may be processed as one ridge line (face), and the effect of reducing the processing man-hours can be expected.

(Modified Example 4)

Next, referring to Figures 93 to 95, another structure will be described. The description of the same points as those of the above-described embodiments and modified example will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this modified example, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiment 2 are assigned the same names as those of the members of Embodiment 2, and only the points different from those of Embodiment 2 will be described.
In Embodiment 2, the projecting portion 202b (projection) is integrally provided on the nozzle 202, but by providing the projection in another component, it is possible to facilitate reuse the projection having in the complicated shape, thus improving recyclability.
The structure in which the projecting portion 202b is provided on another component other than the nozzle will be described below.
Figure 93 is an external perspective view of the discharge unit 2402 of this modified example. Figure 94 is an exploded perspective view of the discharge unit 2402 of this modified example. Figure 95 is a perspective view of the toner pack 2420 to which the discharge unit 2402 of this modified example is mounted.
As shown in Figure 93, the discharge unit 2402 of this modified example has a cylindrical shape, and a nozzle 2402A (discharge portion) and a support member 2402B are arranged substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A.
As shown in Figure 94, in the nozzle 2402A, a cylindrical portion 2402Aa and a disk portion 2402Ab having a diameter larger than that of the cylindrical portion 2402Aa are arranged substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A, in the order named from the first end side in the first direction D1. From the disk portion 2402Ab, a toner feed portion 2402Ac projecting toward the second end portion in the first direction D1 is extended. The toner feed portion 2402Ac is provided with a discharge surface 2402Ae, which is a surface extending in the rotational axis A direction, on the second end side in the first direction D1.
A through hole 2402Ad is provided in the nozzle 2402A, penetrates the cylindrical portion 2402Aa, the disk portion 2402Ab, and the toner feed portion 2402Ac from the first end side in the first direction D1, and it is in fluid communication with the discharge surface 2402Ae in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A. The portion where the through hole 2402Ad penetrates the discharge surface 2402Ae is referred to as a discharge opening 2402Ag (opening).
The support member 2402B has a genuinely cylindrical shape, and includes a first cylindrical portion 2402Ba, a disk portion 2402Bc having a diameter larger than that of the first cylindrical portion 2402Ba and a second cylindrical portion 2402Be substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A, in this order from the first end portion side in the first direction D1. The proj ecting portion 2402Bb projects in the direction of the rotational axis A from an end surface 2402Bg of the second cylindrical portion 2402Be in the direction of the rotational axis A.
The projecting portion 2402Bb has the same shape as the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2, And therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, a through hole 2402Bd is provided in the support member 2402B, and penetrates the first cylindrical portion 2402Ba, the disk portion 2402Bc, and the second cylindrical portion 2402Be from the first end side of the first direction D1, and it is extended to the side hole 2402Bf (side opening) of the second cylindrical portion 2402Be.

(Assembling of discharge unit)

On the first end side of the nozzle 2402A in the first direction D1, an accommodating portion 2401 is mounted to the cylindrical portion 2402Aa without a gap by adhesion or the like (See Figure 95)
As shown in Figure 94, the nozzle 2402A is provided with a support member 2402B extending from the second end side in the first direction D1 substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A. In the support member 2402B, the first cylindrical portion 2402Ba is tightly fitted into a recess (not shown) provided in the disk portion 2402Ab of the nozzle 2402A. In this manner, the support member 2402B is coupled with the nozzle 2402A.
In the discharge unit 2402 in which the nozzle 2402A and the support member 2402B are coupled, the discharge opening 2402Ag is disposed at substantially the same position as the position of the discharge opening 202a of the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2.
As shown in Figure 95, an orientation (direction in the mounting attitude) of the toner pack 2420 in which at least a part of the discharge unit 2402 is below the accommodating portion 201 and the rotational axis A extends in the gravity direction is as a predetermined direction. When the toner pack 2420 is oriented in a predetermined direction, the projecting portion 2402Bb projects downward from the end surface 2402Bg (lower surface) of the support member 2402B. Further, the projecting portion 2402Bb is below the discharge opening 2402Ag.
Further, as shown in Figure 95, the pack side shutter 203 is mounted to the discharge unit 2402 by the same method as in Embodiment 2.
The method of mounting/dismounting to/from the mounting portion 206 is the same as that of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
As described in the foregoing, the projecting portion 202b can be provided on the support member 2402B, which is a component different from the nozzle 2402A. The nozzle 2402A and the support member 2402B are fixed by press-fitting, and can be relatively easily removed from each other. Therefore, only the support member 2402B including the projecting portion 2402Bb having a complicated shape can be easily removed from the toner pack 2420. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the reuse of the support member 2402B including the projecting portion 2402Bb, thus improving the recyclability.

(Modified Example 5)

Next, referring to Figures 96 to 98, another structure will be described. The same points as those of the above-described embodiments and modified examples will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this modified example, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiment 2 are assigned the same names as those of the members of Embodiment 2, and only the points different from those of Embodiment 2 will be explained.
Figure 96 is a perspective view of the toner pack 2520 of this modified example. Part (a) of Figure 97 is a perspective view of the nozzle 2502 of this modified example. Part (b) of Figure 97 is a sectional view of the nozzle 2502 of this modified example.
In Embodiment 2, the nozzle 202 has a side surface 202c extending in the direction of the rotational axis A (central axis), and the discharge opening 202a is provided on the side surface 202c. On the other hand, in this modified example, the discharge opening 2502k2 is provided in an end surface of the cylindrical portion 2502k.
The nozzle 2502 of this modified example will be described.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 97 and part (b) of Figure 97 , the nozzle 2502 of this modified example includes a cylindrical portion 2502k (pipe) and a main assembly portion 2502n (pipe support member) which supports the cylindrical portion 2502k. The cylindrical portion 2502k has a cylindrical shape, and a substantially circular opening 2502k1 (reception port) is arranged substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A on the first end side in the first direction D1. In addition, a substantially circular discharge opening 2502k2 (exit) is provided at the end of the cylindrical portion 2502k opposite to the opening 2502k1. As shown in part (b) of Figure 97, the discharge opening 2502k2 faces in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A. In other words, as shown in part (a) of Figure 97, the discharge opening 2502k2 faces the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The opening 2502k1 and the discharge opening 2502k2 are in fluid communication with each other by a communication passage 2502k3. The communication passage 2502k3 is a portion having a cylindrical shape bent into a curved shape. That is, in the cylindrical portion 2502k, the opening 2502k1 faces upward and the communication passage 2502k3 faces outward in the radial direction r, as goes downward, when the toner pack 2520 is oriented in the predetermined direction (direction of the mounting attitude) in Embodiment 2.
Further, the main assembly portion 2502n of the nozzle 2502 is provided with a slope portion 2502m on the first end side in the first direction D1 from the opening 2502k1. The slope portion 2502m is in the form of a conical slope substantially coaxial with the rotational axis A, and is a slope which inclines toward the second end side in the first direction D1 as goes to the rotational axis A.
The toner in the accommodating portion 201 of the toner pack 2520 passes through the cylindrical portion 2502k from the slope portion 2502m, is discharged through the discharge opening 2502k2, and is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32.
Further, a projecting portion 2502b projects downward from the lower end surface (bottom surface) of the main assembly portion 2502n when the toner pack 2520 is oriented in a predetermined direction. The projecting portion 2502b has exactly the same shape as the projecting portion 202b of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
In this modified example, the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2 has the same structure as that of Embodiment 2 except that the nozzle 202 is replaced with the nozzle 2502, and therefore, the other description thereof will be omitted.
In this modified example, the nozzle 2502 is described as a structure in which the main assembly portion 2502n and the cylindrical portion 2502k are combined, but the cylindrical portion and the main assembly portion may be integrally formed. Further, the cylindrical portion 2502k may be a hard member which does not deform, or may be formed of a member which has elasticity and deforms.
Further, in this modified example, although the discharge opening 2502k2 of the cylindrical portion 2502k is fixed so as to face the outside in the radial direction r, the present invention is not limited to such an example.
Referring to Figures 98 and 99, a toner pack 2530 including a nozzle 2503 in which the direction of the discharge opening of the cylindrical portion is variable will be described.
With this structure, the projecting portion 2503b and the slope portion 2503m of the nozzle 2503 have the same shape as the above-mentioned projecting portion 2502b and the slope portion 2502m, respectively, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Part (a) of Figure 98 and part (b) of Figure 98 are a perspective view and a sectional view of a nozzle 2503 in a state, the discharge opening 2503k2 of the cylindrical portion 2503k faces downward (direction of the rotational axis A), when the toner pack 2530 is oriented in a predetermined direction. Part (a) of Figure 99 and part (b) of Figure 99 are a perspective views and a cross-sectional view of the nozzle 2503 in a state in which the discharge opening 2503k2 of the cylindrical portion 2503k faces the outside in the radial direction r.
The cylindrical portion 2503k is flexible, and the discharge opening 2503k2 faces downward as shown in part (a) of Figure 98 and part (b) of Figure 98 in an unused fresh state. The receiving opening 2503k1 for receiving the toner from the accommodating portion 201 faces upward. When the toner pack 2530 is mounted on the mounting portion 206, the user can change the direction of the cylindrical portion 2503k so that it faces the outside in the radial direction r. The discharge opening 2503k2 of the cylindrical portion 2503k may be structured to face upward or inward in the radial direction r in the unused fresh state. That is, it will suffice if the discharge opening 2503k2 is structured to face the outside in the radial direction r when the toner pack 2530 is mounted on the mounting portion 206.

(Modified Example 6)

In the present embodiment, the first restriction releasing portion 204a includes the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, the third slope 204a3, and the abutment surface 204a5, and the second restriction releasing portion 204b has the structure of 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A (central axis) of the first restriction releasing portion 204a. However, the present invention is not limited to such a structure. In this modified example, a structure in which the functions of the first restriction releasing portion and the second restriction releasing portion are separated will be described.
The second restriction releasing portion 2604b (second projection) of this modified example is provided on the opposite side of the rotational axis A from the first restriction releasing portion 2604a (first projection), and is provided at a position different from that of the first restriction releasing portion 2604a in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC (part (c) of Figure 100). Further, the first restriction releasing portion 2604a and the second restriction releasing portion 2604b overlap each other when viewed in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC (part (b) of Figure 100).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 100, the first restriction releasing portion 2604a includes a second slope 2604a2 (second downward surface, second downward guide surface, second force applying surface) and a third slope 2604a3 (upward surface, an upward guide surface), and an abutment surface 2604a5. The second restriction releasing portion 2604b includes a first slope 2604b1 (first downward surface, first downward surface, first force applying surface) and an abutment surface 2604b5. The first restriction releasing portion 2604a does not include a slope corresponding to the first slope 2604b 1, and the second restriction releasing portion 2604b does not include a slope corresponding to the second slope 2604a2 and the third slope 2604a3.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 65, part (b) of Figure 65 and Figure 67, the first slope 2604b 1 of the second restriction releasing portion 2604b applies the force, while guiding the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing member 214. By this as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D to a position where the second guided surface 214e2 and the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing member 214 are exposed through the cover 210.
On the other hand, as shown in part (c) of Figure 65, the second slope 2604a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 2604a rotates the releasing member 214 to the position where, the rise restricted surface 214c does not overlap the rise restricting surface 210e of the cover 210 as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A. In addition, as shown in part (a) of Figure 66, the third slope 2604a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 2604 guides the releasing member 214 so that the releasing member 214 moves upward while being rotated in the rotational direction E.
As described above, it is possible to employ a structure of a projecting portion in which the functions of the first restriction releasing portion 2604a and the second restriction releasing portion 2604b are separated.

(Modified Example 7)

Although the toner pack 220 of Embodiment 2 includes the pack side shutter 203, it may have a structure not including the pack side shutter 203.
A method of supplying toner to the image forming apparatus by using the toner pack 220 not provided with the pack side shutter 203 will be described.
Part (a) of Figure 101 is a perspective view of a toner pack 2820 not provided with the pack-side shutter. Part (b) of Figure 101 , part (c) of Figure 101 and part (d) of Figure 101 are a left side view, a front view, and a right side view of the toner pack 220 without the pack side shutter 203, respectively. A nozzle 2802 is provided with a discharge opening 2802a (opening, nozzle opening) and a projecting portion 2802b. An accommodating portion 2801 and a nozzle 2802 are shown in a simplified manner in shape for the sake of better illustration, but are exactly the same as those in Embodiment 2. Instead of including the pack-side shutter, a sealing member s1 seals the discharge opening 2802a of the nozzle 2802. One end of the sealing member s1 extends to above the accommodating portion 2801.
Part (a) of Figure 102 is a perspective view of the toner pack 2820 and the mounting portion 206 in a state in which the toner pack 2820 including no pack-side shutter is mounted on the mounting portion 206. Part (d) of Figure 102 shows a rod 2821 to be used to open the apparatus-side shutter 209. Part (b) of Figure 102 and 102 (c) are perspective views illustrating the state before and after the user opens the apparatus-side shutter 209 using the rod 2821, respectively. Part (d) of Figure 102 is a perspective view of the toner pack 220 and the mounting portion 206 in the state of part (c) of Figure 102 after the sealing member s1 is pulled out.
In the case of the toner pack 2820 without the pack side shutter, the apparatus-side shutter 209 cannot be opened even if the operating lever 208 is operated as described above. Therefore, by mounting the toner pack 2820 on the mounting portion 206, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 of the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is first released by the projecting portion 2802b (part (a) of Figure 102). Thereafter, the rod 2821 is inserted into the gap between the hole portion of the mounting portion 206 and the nozzle 2802, and the free end bending portion 2821a of the rod is engaged with the shutter projection 209i on the apparatus-side (part (b) of Figure 102). Next, the rod 2821 is moved in the rotational direction D so as to rotate the apparatus-side shutter 209 from the closed position (part (b) of Figure 102) to the open position (part (c) of Figure 102). Then, the sealing member s1 is pulled out upward to unseal the discharge opening 2802a of the nozzle 2802. When the accommodating portion 2801 is compressed by the user in this state, the toner is discharged through the discharge opening 2802a of the nozzle 2802 and is supplied into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32 through the apparatus-side opening 217a of the second frame 217.
As described above, the toner pack 220 may not have the shutter 203 on the pack side.

Next, referring to Figures 103 to 111, Embodiment 3 will be described in the following. In this embodiment, the third slope of the restriction releasing portion is perpendicular to the rotational axis A, as compared with Embodiment 2. In addition, the projecting portion 202b in Embodiment 2 is structured to move along the rotational axis A. The same points as in the above-described embodiments will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiment 2 are assigned the same names as those of the members of Embodiment 2, and only the points different from those of Embodiment 2 will be described.

(Toner pack structure)

Referring to Figures 103 to 107, the overall structure of the toner pack will first be described. Figure 103 is an illustration of an appearance of the toner pack 320. Figure 104 is an exploded perspective view of the nozzle 302 and the portions assembled to the nozzle 302, and shows the parts assembled from the side of the first end portion (accommodation portion side) in the first direction D1. Figure 105 is an exploded perspective view of the nozzle 302 and the portions assembled to the nozzle 302, and shows the parts assembled from the opposite side of the first end portion side (accommodation portion side) of the first direction D1. Figure 106 is a perspective view illustrating detailed shape of the restriction releasing member 304. Figure 107 is a sectional view of the toner pack 320 taken along a line X301-X301 shown in Figure 103, that is, along the pin 333 at the time when the restriction releasing member 304 which will be described hereinafter projects in a direction of the arrow N.
As shown in Figure 103, the toner pack 320 in this embodiment comprises, a nozzle 302 (discharging portion), a restriction releasing member 304, and an operating member 330, in addition to the accommodating portion 201 and the pack side shutter 203 which have the same shapes as those of Embodiment 2. Further, although the details will be described hereinafter, in order to operate the restriction releasing member 304 when the operating member 330 is operated, a shaft member 331, a shaft seal 332 (see Figure 104), a pin 333, a shaft ring 334, and a shaft ring 335 (see Figure 105). Hereinafter, these portions will be described in detail. In the following description, unless otherwise specified the toner pack 320 is oriented in a predetermined direction in which at least a part of the nozzle 302 is below the accommodating portion 201 and in which the rotational axis A faces the direction of gravity.
As shown in Figure 104, the nozzle 302 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A. A hole portion 302e (guide groove) is provided in the cylinder 302g (guide portion) on the side (see Figure 103) to be assembled with the accommodating portion 201 of the nozzle 302. The hole portion 302e has an elongated hole shape extended in such a direction as goes up (upward) in the direction of the arrow U (upward) of the rotational axis A direction as goes in the rotational direction K. Further, a pair of hole portions 302e are provided so as to provide 180-degree rotational symmetric arrangement about the rotational axis A of the nozzle 302.
As shown in Figure 105, the nozzle 302 is provided with a cylindrical surface 302i (side surface) on the arrow N direction (downward) side of the cylinder 302g. An opening 302a (discharge opening) facing in the radial direction of the rotational axis A is provided in the cylindrical surface 302i. In addition, a passage 302j is provided as a space that passes through the inside of the nozzle 302 and is connected to the opening 302a. Further, an end surface 302h is on the arrow N direction (downward) side of the nozzle 302, is provided with a cylindrical support portion 302b projecting in the arrow N direction (downward). Furthermore, the cylindrical support portion 302b is provided with a pair of cut-away portions 302c so as to provide 180-degree rotational symmetric arrangement about the rotational axis A. As shown in Figure 107, a cylindrical groove 302d centered on the rotational axis A is provided on a passage 302j of the nozzle 302. A hole portion 302f centered on the rotational axis A is provided on the end surface of the cylindrical groove 302d on the arrow N direction (downward) side.
As shown in Figure 105, the restriction releasing member 304 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A. A restriction releasing member 304 is provided with a pair of projections 304d projecting in the radial direction of the rotational axis A from the cylindrical portion 304c. The pair of projections 304d are positioned so as to provide 180-degree rotationally symmetric arrangement with respect to the rotational axis A. The restriction releasing member 304 includes a first restriction releasing portion 304a (first projection) and a second restriction releasing portion 304b (second projection) projecting in the arrow N direction (downward) from the end portion 304e on the arrow N direction (downward) side. The first restriction releasing portion 304a and the second restriction releasing portion 304b are arranged so as to be 180-degree rotatable member symmetric arrangement with respect to the rotational axis A. Of the first restriction releasing portion 304a and the second restriction releasing portion 304b the one on the side closer to the opening 302a in the rotational direction K of the rotational axis A in a state in which the restriction releasing member 304 which will be described hereinafter is assembled to the nozzle 302 is referred to as the first restriction releasing portion 304a. As shown in part (a) of Figure 106 and part (b) of Figure 106, the first restriction releasing portion 304a comprises a first slope 304a1 (first inner engaging surface, first downward surface, first downward guide surface, first force applying surface, first push surface), second slope 304a2 (first outer engaging surface, second downward surface, second downward guide surface, second force applying surface, second push surface), flat surface 304a3 (second engagement surface, upward surface, upward engaging surface, upward push surface, upward force applying surface), a first abutment surface 304a5, and a second abutment surface 304a6. The first slope 304a1, the second slope 304a2, and the first abutment surface 304a5 have the same structures as the first slope 204a1, the second slope 204a2, and the abutment surface 204a5 in Embodiment 2, respectively, and therefore, the description thereof is omitted. As shown in part (c) of Figure 106, the flat surface 304a3 is perpendicular to the rotational axis A. That is, when the toner pack 320 is oriented in a predetermined direction, the flat surface 304a3 extends in the horizontal direction perpendicular to the direction of gravity. The flat surface 304a3 is placed on the arrow U direction side (upward) of least a part of the second slope 304a2. The second abutment surface 304a6 is placed on the upstream side of the flat surface 304a3 in the rotational direction K, extends in the arrow U direction (upward), and faces the downstream side in the rotational direction K. Here, as described above, the second restriction releasing portion 304b has a shape which is 180-degree rotationally symmetric relative to the first restriction releasing portion 304a with respect to the rotational axis A, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. As shown in Figure 107, the restriction releasing member 304 is provided with an end portion 304f at the end on the arrow U direction (upward direction) side. The end portion 304f is provided with a hole portion 304g centered on the rotational axis A.
As shown in Figure 104, the operating member 330 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A. A substantially cylindrical sealing member 330b is provided inside the cylindrical portion 330a of the operating member 330. An elastic member such as urethane foam is used for the sealing member 330b. The operating member 330 is provided with a pair of hole portions 330c penetrating the cylindrical portion 330a and the sealing member 330b on the symmetric positions about the rotational axis A. The straight line connecting the centers of the pair of hole portions 330c is substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A.
The shaft member 331 has an elongated cylindrical shape provided coaxially with the rotational axis A, and comprises a shaft portion 331b and a small diameter shaft portion 331c having a radius smaller than that of the shaft portion 331b. In addition, the small diameter shaft portion 331c is placed on a more downstream side in the N direction (lower side) than the shaft portion 331b. The shaft portion 331b is provided with a through hole 331a substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A.
The shaft seal 332 has a substantially cylindrical shape coaxial with the rotational axis A, and comprises an elastic member such as urethane foam.
As shown in Figure 105, the pin 333 has a substantially elongated cylindrical shape.
The shaft ring 334 and the shaft ring 335 have substantially disk shapes centered on the rotational axis A, and provided with holes 334a and 335a in the central portions thereof, respectively.

(Assembling of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figures 104, 105, and 107, the assembly of the toner pack 320 according to this embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in Figure 104, the operating member 330, the shaft seal 332, and the shaft member 331 are assembled to the nozzle 302 in this order from the upstream side in the arrow N direction. The operating member 330 is inserted into the cylinder 302g of the nozzle 302 until the hole portion 330c becomes coincident with the hole portion 302e. At this time, the sealing member 330b of the operating member 330 is brought into close contact with the hole portion 302e so as to cover the hole portion 302e. As shown in Figure 107, the shaft seal 332 is assembled to the cylindrical groove 302d of the nozzle 302. For the shaft member 331, the small diameter shaft portion 331c is inserted into the shaft seal 332 and into the hole portion 302f of the nozzle 302. The small diameter shaft portion 331c and the hole portion 302f are supported so as to be slidable in the rotational direction K and in the rotational axis A direction.
Next, as shown in Figure 105, the pin 333 is assembled to the operating member 330 and the nozzle 302 in the direction of an arrow V3, and then the shaft ring 334, the restriction releasing member 304, and the shaft ring 335 are mounted to the shaft member 331 in the direction of arrow U (upward). The pin 333 is inserted from one hole portion 330c of the operating member 330, and as shown in Figure 107, and it is inserted in the order of, one hole portion 330c, one hole portion 302e, through hole 331a, the other hole portion 302e, and the other hole portion 330c. The pin 333 is supported slidable relative to the pair of hole portions 302e and the through hole 331a. The pin 333 and the pair of hole portions 330c are fixed in the direction of arrow V3 by adhesion or clamping. The shaft ring 334 is fitted on the small diameter shaft portion 331c at the hole 334a, and is fixed at a position away from the free end of the small diameter shaft portion 331c in the arrow N direction (downward) by the amount of the thickness of the shaft ring 335 plus the end portion 304f of the restriction releasing member 304. For the shaft member 331, the shaft diameter d30 in the region fixed to the shaft ring 334 is selected slightly larger than the diameter d31 of the hole 334a of the shaft ring 334 so that the shaft ring 334 can be press-fitted. The restriction releasing member 304 is fitted on the small diameter shaft portion 331c at the hole portion 304g until it abuts to the shaft ring 334, and the hole portion 304g and the small diameter shaft portion 331c are slidable relative to each other. Further, the restriction releasing member 304 is mounted to the nozzle 302 so that the cylindrical portion 304c is inserted into the cylindrical support portion 302b and the projection 304d is inserted into the cut-away portion 302c. By the engagement between the projection 304d of the restriction releasing member 304 and the cut-away portion 302c, the restriction releasing member 304 is constrained from moving around the rotational axis A relative to the nozzle 302. Therefore, the restriction releasing member 304 is supported movably only in the direction of the rotational axis A relative to the nozzle 302. The shaft ring 335 is fitted on the small diameter shaft portion 331c at the hole 335a until it abuts to the end portion 304f of the restriction releasing member 304, and it is fixed to the small diameter shaft portion 331c. The shaft diameter d30 of the region fixed to the shaft ring 334 of the shaft member 331 is selected to be slightly larger than the diameter d31 of the hole 334a of the shaft ring 334 so that it can be press-fitted with the shaft ring 334. Further, the shaft diameter d32 of the region, fixed to the shaft ring 335, of the shaft member 331 is selected to be slightly larger than the diameter d33 of the hole 335a of the shaft ring 335 so that it can be press-fitted with the shaft ring 335.
Thereafter, the assembling of the toner pack 320 is completed by assembling the pack side shutter 203 or the like to the nozzle 302.

(Operation of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figures 107 to 109, the operation of the toner pack 320 when the operating member 330 is operated will be described. Figure 108 is a perspective view of components placed downstream, in the N direction (downward) of the arrow N, of the accommodating portion 201. Part (a) of Figure 108 and part (b) of Figure 108 show a state in which the pin 333 is at the lower end of the hole portion 302e in the arrow N direction (downward). Part (a) of Figure 108 shows a state in which the operating member 330 is at the shown position, and part (b) of Figure 108 shows a state in which the operating member 330 is not shown. Part (c) of Figure 108 and part (d) of Figure 108 show a state in which the pin 333 is placed at the upper end of the hole portion 302e in the arrow U direction (upward direction). Part (c) of Figure 108 shows a state in which the operating member 330 is at the shown position, and part (d) of Figure 108 shows a state in which the operating member 330 is not shown. Figure 109 is a sectional view of the toner pack 320 in a state in which the pin 333 is at the upper end of the hole portion 302e in the arrow U direction (upward direction). Further, Figure 109 is the sectional view taken along the same line as in Figure 107 (see Figures 103 and X320-X320).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 108, a case where the operating member 330 is rotated in the direction of an arrow W30 will be described. The pin 333 is fixed to the hole portion 330c of the operating member 330, and therefore, when the operating member 330 is rotated in the direction of the arrow W30, the pin 333 also rotates in the direction of the arrow W30. At this time, the pin 333 rotates along the shape of the hole portion 302e of the nozzle 302 as shown in part (b) of Figure 108, so that the pin 333 moves in the direction of the arrow U (upward). At this time, the operating member 330 also moves in interrelation with the movement of the pin 333 in the arrow U direction (upward). Further, as shown in Figure 107, since the pin 333 is inserted into the through hole 331a, the shaft member 331 rises in interrelation with the pin 333. Further, since the restriction releasing member 304 is fixed to the shaft member 331 in the rotational axis A direction by way of the shaft ring 335, it moves in interrelation with the shaft member. Therefore, when the operating member 330 is rotated in the direction of the arrow W30 from the state shown in part (a) of Figure 108 and part (b) of Figure 108, and the restriction releasing member 304 is moved by the arrow U direction in interrelation with the movement of the pin 333 in the direction of the arrow U, with the result of the state shown in part (c) of Figure 108 and part (d) of Figure 108. Here, the amount of projection of the restriction releasing member 304 from the pack-side shutter 203 in a state where the restriction releasing member 304 is placed at the lower position as in part (a) of Figure 108 and part (b) of Figure 108 is referred to as P30. Further, in the direction of the rotational axis A, a distance which the pin 333 moves in the direction of the arrow U by the operation of the operating member 330 is referred to as the distance L30.
When the operating member 330 is rotated from the state of part (a) of Figure 108 to the state of part (c) of Figure 108 in the W30 direction, the pin 333 moves to the upper end of the hole portion 302e as shown in part (d) of Figure 108. Since the pin 333 moves in the arrow U direction (upward) by the distance L30, the restriction releasing member 304 also moves in the arrow U direction (upward) by L30 in interrelation therewith (projection amount P30 of the restriction releasing member 304 is reduced by the distance L30 to become the projection amount P31). In addition, as shown in Figure 109, the structure is such that even after the operating member 330 is moved in the direction of the arrow U (upward), the sealing member 330b covers the entire hole portion 302e and is in close contact with the operating member 330.

(Mounting and dismounting of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figures 110 and 111, mounting/dismounting of the toner pack 320 to/from the mounting portion 206 will be described. As for the mounting/dismounting operation, only the operation different from that of Embodiment 2 will be described. Figure 110 is a sectional view illustrating a process in which the restriction releasing member 304 releases the rotation restricting mechanism 212 when the toner pack 320 is mounted to the mounting portion 206. For the sake of better illustration, the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is shown only by the restricting member 213 and the releasing member 214. The states of part (a) of Figure 110 to part (f) of Figure 110 will be described hereinafter. Figure 111 is a sectional view illustrating a state when the toner pack 320 is being removed from the mounting portion 206.
A mechanism for releasing the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the mounting portion 206 by mounting the toner pack 320 on the mounting portion 206 will be described. This mechanism has the same operation up to the first step of Embodiment 2. Part (a) of Figure 110 shows a state before the first restriction releasing portion 304a and the releasing claw 214e of the releasing member 214 come into contact with each other. When the toner pack 320 is moved in the direction of arrow N from this state, the first slope 304a1 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a and the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing claw 214e come into contact with each other as shown in part (b) of Figure 110. It will be in the state of When the toner pack 320 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N from this position, the first guided surface 214e1 receives the force while being guided by the first slope 304a1, so that the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D. The releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D until the first guided surface 214e1 passes the downstream (in the rotational direction D) end of the first slope 304a1. When the toner pack 320 is further moved in the direction of arrow N from this position, as shown in part (c) of Figure 110, the second slope 304a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a and the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e are brought into contact with each other. When the toner pack 320 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N from this position, the second guided surface 214e2 receives the force while being guided by the second slope 304a2 as shown in part (d) of Figure 110, so that the releasing member 214 is rotated in the direction D. The releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D until the second guided surface 214e2 passes the downstream (in the rotational direction D) end of the second slope 304a2. The steps up to this point are the same as in Embodiment 2. Since the portion related to the mechanics by the releasing spring 216 (not shown) and so on is the same as that of Embodiment 2, the description thereof is omitted.
When the toner pack 320 is further moved in the direction of arrow N after the first step, the flat surface 304a3 passes the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e in the direction of arrow N. At this time, as shown in part (e) of Figure 110, the releasing claw 214e is rotated in the rotational direction E by the moment M202 (urging force) generated by the releasing spring 216 (see Figure 50). Then, the contact surface 214a of the releasing claw 214e abuts to the second abutment surface 304a6 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a. The mounting of the toner pack 320 on the mounting portion 206 in the direction of the arrow N is completed. In this state, the restricting member 213 is not moved in the arrow G direction (upward) together with the releasing member 214, so that the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is not released. Therefore, it is necessary to move the releasing member 214 in the arrow G direction. After the mounting of the toner pack 320 on the mounting portion 206 in the direction of arrow N is completed, the operating member 330 is manually rotated in the direction of arrow W30 as shown in Figure 108. By doing so, as described above, the restriction releasing member 304 moves in the direction of arrow U (upward). That is, the first restriction releasing portion 304a of the restriction releasing member 304 also moves in the direction of the arrow U (upward). By this, as shown in part (f) of Figure 110, the end surface 214e30 in the arrow N direction side of the releasing claw 214e is pushed and moved by, the flat surface 304a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a in the arrow G direction (upward). Therefore, the restricting member 213 can be moved in the arrow G direction (upward) together with the releasing member 214, so that the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 can be released. That is, the flat surface 304a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a has a function of pushing (force applying) the surface 214e30 of the releasing claw 214e so that the releasing member 214 moves upward. The first restriction releasing portion 304a has a function of a hook for hooking the releasing claw 214e and lifting the releasing member 214 upward.
With the above-described operations, the toner pack 320 becomes in the mounting complete state. The flat surface 304a3, which is a surface substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A, is capable of maintaining the releasing member 214 on the arrow G direction side against the urging force F201 by the restricting spring 215 (see Figure 49) and the force in the arrow N direction such as gravity.
Finally, the removal of the toner pack 320 from the mounting portion 206 will be described. As shown in Figure 111, the toner pack 320 is removed by moving the toner pack 320 in the direction of arrow G. At this time, since the releasing claw 214e is engaged with the flat surface 304a3 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a, interference occurs when the toner pack 320 is removed. When the toner pack 320 is moved in the direction of the arrow G by applying a larger force from this position, partial deformation occurs in the first restriction releasing portion 304a and the releasing claw 214e. Due to the partial deformation, the contact surface of the releasing claw 214e with the flat surface 304a3 is inclined in the direction of arrow G (upward) toward the downstream side in the rotational direction E. By the inclination of the contact surface of the releasing claw 214e, a release force F301 is produced for the third guided surface 214e3. Then, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the direction of arrow D by the release force F301, and the contact surface 214a passes by the end portion of the flat surface 304a3 on the rotational direction D side. The releasing claw 214e and the flat surface 304a3 are disengaged from each other, and therefore, the toner pack 320 becomes movable in the direction of arrow G (upward), so that the toner pack 320 can be removed from the mounting portion 206.
As described above, in the toner pack in this embodiment, the surface of the restriction releasing portion facing the first end side (accommodation portion side) in the first direction D1 is a surface substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Also in this case, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 can be released by providing a structure for moving the restriction releasing portion upward.

(Modified Example 1)

In this embodiment, the flat surface 304a3 is structured to be substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A, but as shown in Figure 112, the surface 304a3 may have a structure of an inclined surface 3104a3 inclined with respect to the rotational axis A.
The inclined surface 3104a3 (second engaging surface, upward engaging surface, upward engaging surface, upward push surface, upward force applying surface) of the restriction releasing member 3104 is a surface extending so as to goes up in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction) about the rotational axis A (central axis), and at least a part of the inclined surface 3104a3 is located on the arrow U direction side (upward) of at least a part of the second slope 304a2. In the this modified example, the same structure as that of the basic embodiment of this modified example is used except for the point that the flat surface 304a3 of the basic embodiment is replaced with the inclined surface 3104a3, and therefore other description will be omitted. Further, in the modified example as well, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 can be released as in the basic embodiment of this modified example.

(Modified Example 2)

In this embodiment, the first slope 304a1 and the second slope 304a2 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a are different slopes, and the second restriction releasing portion 304b has the same structure. However, as in Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 2, the two slopes may have smoothly continuous surfaces as in the restriction releasing member 3204 of the toner pack 3220 shown in Figure 113.
As shown in Figure 113, the restriction releasing member 3204 includes a first restriction releasing portion 3204a (first projection) and a second restriction releasing portion 3204b (second projection) which are symmetric with each other with respect to the rotational axis A (central axis). The first restriction releasing portion 3204a is provided with a first slope 3204a1, and the first slope 3204a1 is structured in the same manner as the first slope 2304a1 of Modified Example 3 of Embodiment 2. In addition, the first restriction releasing portion 3204a is provided with a flat surface 3204a3 (second engaging surface, upward engaging surface, upward engaging surface, upward push surface), and the flat surface 3204a3 is structured in the same manner as the flat surface 304a3 of the basic embodiment of this modified example. Similarly, the second restriction releasing portion 3204b is also provided with a first slope 3204b1 and a flat surface 3204b3.
Also in this case, the rotation restriction of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 can be released.

Next, referring to Figures 114 to 126, Embodiment 4 will be described in the following. In this embodiment, the structure of the discharge opening is different from that in Embodiment 2. In above-described Embodiment 2, the discharge opening faces the outside of the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, whereas in this embodiment, the discharge opening faces in the direction of the rotational axis A. The nozzle of this embodiment is provided with a movable passage including a discharge opening facing in the direction of the rotational axis A. The movable passage is structured to be movable between a first position stored in the nozzle and a second position projecting from the nozzle. The same points as in the above-described embodiments will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiment 2 are assigned the same names as those of the members in Embodiment 2, and only the points different from those of Embodiment 2 will be described.

(Toner pack structure)

Referring to Figures 114 and 115 to 118, the structure of the toner pack in this embodiment will be described. Figure 114 shows the appearance of the toner pack 420, and is a view as seen in a direction perpendicular to the first direction D1., part (a) of Figure 114 is a view as seen from the opening 402a side of the nozzle 402, and part (b) of Figure 114 is a view as seen from the side opposite to the opening 402a. Figure 115 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack 420, and is a view as seen from the second end side (nozzle side) of the first direction D1., part (a) of Figure 115 is a view as seen from the opening 402a side of the nozzle 402, and part (b) of Figure 115 is a view as seen from the side opposite to the opening 402a. The accommodating portion 201 and the pack-side shutter 203 are not shown. Figure 116 is an illustration of details of the nozzle 402. Figure 117 is an illustration of details of a movable passage 430. Part (a) of Figure 118 is a detailed illustration of a cam member 432, part (b) of Figure 118 is a detailed illustration of an operating member 433, and part (c) of Figure 118 is a details illustration of a shaft member 434.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 114, the toner pack 420 in this embodiment includes, an accommodating portion 201, a pack side shutter 203, a nozzle 402, a movable passage 430, which have the same shapes of the corresponding elements of embodiment 2, respectively, and as shown in 114 (b), it comprises an operation mechanism 436 including an operating member 433 exposed to the outside.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 115 and part (b) of Figure 115, the nozzle 402 is provided with a movable passage 430, a tension spring 431, and an operation mechanism 436. In this embodiment, the nozzle 402, the movable passage 430, the tension spring 431, and the operation mechanism 436 constitute the discharge portion. In addition, the operation mechanism 436 comprises a cam member 432, an operating member 433, a shaft member 434, and an E-shaped retaining ring 435. The operation mechanism 436 is provided on the rotational axis A40 which is parallel to the rotational axis A (central axis) at a different position. The rotational direction K40 about the rotational axis A40 is a clockwise direction as viewed from the side (nozzle side) of the second end portion of the first direction D1. Further, as to the moving direction of the movable passage 430 relative to the nozzle 402, the direction toward the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A is an arrow V40 direction (projecting direction), the direction toward the inside of the radial direction r is an arrow V41 direction (retracting direction). The direction of the arrow V40 and the direction of the arrow V41 are parallel to the opening direction of the opening 402a of the nozzle 402.
The detailed shapes of various members will be described.
As shown in Figure 116, the nozzle 402 (accepting member) has a generally cylindrical shape having a cylindrical portion 402c centered on the rotational axis A, and includes an opening 402a (second opening), a sealing member 402a1, a spring hooking portion 402e, a hole portion 402d, and a projecting portion 402b. The nozzle 402 has a function of receiving the toner of the accommodating portion 201.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 116, the cylindrical portion 402c has the accommodating portion side cylindrical portion 402c1 on the arrow U direction side (upper side) of the pack side shutter 203 in a state where the pack side shutter 203 is assembled (See Figure 114). In addition, such a portion of the cylindrical portion 402c as is on the downstream side, in the N direction (downward), of the accommodating portion side cylindrical portion 402c1 is referred to as the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2.
The opening 402a is provided on the side surface of the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2 extending in the direction of the rotational axis A, and faces the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The opening 402a is structured to be in fluid communication with the inside of the accommodating portion 201 in a state in which the nozzle 402 is coupled to the accommodating portion 201. The opening 402a is provided with seal members 402a1 at opposite ends in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A as viewed from the opening 402a.
The spring hooking portion 402e is on the opposite side of the opening 402a in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, and is provided in a first space S40 which will be described hereinafter. Further, the spring hooking portion 402e is a projection projecting in the direction of the arrow U (upward).
As shown in part (b) of Figure 116, the hole portion 402d is provided around the rotational axis A40. The hole portion 402d is provided as a first hole portion 402d1, a second hole portion 402d2, a third hole portion 402d3, and a fourth hole portion 402d4, in this order from the side (nozzle side) of the second end portion in the first direction D 1. Further, in the direction of the rotational axis A40, the space sandwiched between the first hole portion 402d1 and the second hole portion 402d2 is referred to as a first space S40, and the space sandwiched between the second hole portion 402d2 and the third hole portion 402d3 is referred to as a second space S41, and the space sandwiched between the third hole portion 402d3 and the fourth hole portion 402d4 is referred to as a third space S42.
The first space S40 is provided on the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2 and penetrates to the opening 402a. The third space S42 is provided on the cylindrical portion 402c1 on the accommodating portion side. The second space S41 may be provided in either the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2 or the accommodating portion side cylindrical portion 402c1, but it is preferable to provide the second space S41 in the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2 from the standpoint of downsizing. In addition, the third space S42 is provided with an abutment surface 402f.
The projecting portion 402b has the same shape as the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2, and therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in Figure 117, the movable passage 430 (discharge member) has a hollow substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and includes a downward opening 430a (discharge opening, first opening), an upward opening 430b, a pushed portion 430c, and a spring hooking portion 430d, a lower seal member 430e, and an upper seal member 430f.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 117, the downward opening 430a is an opening provided on the arrow N direction (downward) side and the arrow V40 direction (projecting direction) side. Further, a lower seal member 430e is provided on the surface provided with the downward opening 430a so as to surround the downward opening 430a.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 117, the upward opening 430b is an opening provided on the arrow U direction (upward) side and the arrow V41 direction (retracting direction) side, and communicates with the downward opening 430a. Further, an upper seal member 430f is provided on the surface provided with the upward opening 430b so as to surround the upward opening 430b.
The pushed portion 430c comprises a first flat pushed surface 430c1a, a first pushed slope 430c1b, a second pushed surface 430c2, and a projecting surface 430c3. The projecting surface 430c3 is a surface projecting in the arrow V41 (retracting direction) of the pushed portion 430c. In the state in which the toner pack 420 which will be described hereinafter is assembled, the surface remote from the rotational axis A40 with the projecting surface 430c3 as a boundary is the first flat pushed surface 430c1a and the first pushed slope 430c1b, and the near side is the second pushed surface 430c2 (see part (c) of Figure 122). Further, of the first flat pushed surface 430c1a and the first pushed slope 430c1b, the surface connected with the projecting surface 430c3 is the first pushed slope 430c1b.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 117, the spring hooking portion 430d is provided on the arrow V41 direction (retracting direction) side, and is a projection projecting in the direction of arrow N (downward).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 118, the cam member 432 includes an arm portion 432d and has a generally arc shape as viewed in the rotational axis A41 direction. A substantially semi-cylindrical push portion 432a is provided at one end of the arm portion 432d, and a hole portion 432b and a shaft portion 432c are provided at the other end.
The hole portion 432b is a hole directed in the direction of the arrow N (downward) with the rotational axis A41 as the center, and comprises a flat locking surface 432b1 and a support surface 432b2 in the form of a circumferential surface.
The shaft portion 432c is a substantially cylindrical shaft centered on the rotational axis A41, and projects in the direction of the arrow N (downward).
As shown in part (b) of Figure 118, the operating member 433 has a substantially flat plate shape including an arm portion 433a. On one end side of the arm portion 433a in the longitudinal direction, a hole portion 433b is provided with the rotational axis A42 as the center and penetrating the arm portion 433a. The hole portion 433b comprises a flat locking surface 433b1 and an arc-shaped support surface 433b2.
As shown in part (c) of Figure 118, the shaft member 434 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A40. The shaft member 434 is provided with a flat locking surface 434a and a substantially semi-cylindrical support surface 434b on the arrow U direction side (upper side), along the rotational axis A40 (D-cut shape). Further, the shaft member 434 is provided with a flat locking surface 434c and a substantially semi-cylindrical support surface 434d on the direction (downward) side of the arrow N, along the rotational axis A40 (D-cut shape). A groove portion 434e is provided on the arrow N direction of side with respect to the locking surface 434a. Further, the end portion of the shaft member 434 on the arrow U direction (upper) side is an upper end 434f, and the end portion on the arrow N direction (lower) side is a lower end 434g.

(Assembly of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figures 119, 120 and 121, the assembly of the toner pack 420 according to this embodiment will be described.
Figure 119 illustrates the assembling of the movable passage 430 to the nozzle 402 and the tension spring 431, part (a) of Figure 119 is a perspective view, and part (b) of Figure 119 is a sectional view taken along a line X407-X407 in part (b) of Figure 114.
Figure 120 is an illustration of the assembly of the operation mechanism 436 (cam member 432, operating member 433, shaft member 434, E-type retaining ring 435) to the nozzle 402. The states of part (a) of Figure 120 to part (d) of Figure 120 will be described as appropriate. Figure 121 is a perspective view of the toner pack 420, and is a view as seen from the second end side (nozzle side) in the first direction D1. Further, part (a) of Figure 121 is a view as seen from the opening 402a side of the nozzle 402, and part (b) of Figure 121 is a view as seen from the side opposite to the opening 402a. The accommodating portion 201 and the pack-side shutter 203 are not shown.
First, as shown in part (a) of Figure 119, the tension spring 431 and the movable passage 430 are assembled to the nozzle 402. The movable passage 430 is inserted into the opening 402a of the nozzle 402 in the arrow V41 direction (retracting direction) with such an attitude that the downward opening 430a faces in the arrow N direction (downward) and is on the arrow V40 (projecting direction) side. The arrow V40 direction and the arrow V41 direction are directions perpendicular to the rotational axis A or the radial directions r. At this time, one end of the tension spring 431 is in a state of being hooked on the spring hooking portion 430d of the movable passage 430 shown in part (b) of Figure 119. After the movable passage 430 is inserted into the opening 402a of the nozzle 402, the other end of the tension spring 431 is hooked on the spring hooking portion 402e of the nozzle 402, so that the assembly of the movable passage 430 is completed.
Next, as shown in part (a) of Figure 120, the operating member 433 and the shaft member 434 are assembled to the nozzle 402. The operating member 433 is inserted into the third space S42 of the nozzle 402 in the direction of an arrow V42 until the rotational axis A41 is aligned with the rotational axis A40. Thereafter, the shaft member 434 is inserted into the first hole portion 402d1 relative to the nozzle 402 from the upper end 434f side in the direction of the arrow U. Then, the upper end 434f of the shaft member 434 passes through the second hole portion 402d2 and the third hole portion 402d3 of the nozzle 402 in order, and thereafter is inserted into the hole portion 433b of the operating member 433 in the arrow U direction. At this time, It is inserted such that the locking surface 434a of the shaft member 434 and the locking surface 433b1 of the operating member 433 are engaged with each other and such that the support surface 434b of the shaft member 434 and the support surface 433b2 of the operating member 433 are engaged with each other. By the engagement between the locking surface 434a of the shaft member 434 and the locking surface 433b 1 of the operating member 433, the operating member 433 and the shaft member 434 can be integrally rotated around the rotational axis A40.
Then, when the shaft member 434 is further inserted in the arrow U direction (upward) relative to the nozzle 402, the upper end 434f is in the fourth hole portion 402d4 and the lower end 434g is in the second hole portion 402d2 as shown in part (b) of Figure 120.
Next, the cam member 432 is assembled to the nozzle 402 from this state. The cam member 432 is inserted into the first space S40 of the nozzle 402 in the direction of an arrow V43 until the rotational axis A42 is aligned with the rotational axis A40. As described above, since the lower end 434g of the shaft member 434 is inserted until it penetrates into the second hole portion 402d2 of the nozzle 402, the shaft member 434 does not exist in the first space S40 of the nozzle 402. By this, the cam member 432 can be inserted into the first space S40 of the nozzle 402 without interfering with the shaft member 434. Then, as shown in part (c) of Figure 120, the cam member 432 is in the first space S40 of the nozzle 402.
Next, as shown in part (c) of Figure 120, the cam member 432 is engaged with the nozzle 402, and the shaft member 434 is engaged with the cam member 432. The shaft portion 432c of the cam member 432 is inserted into the first hole portion 402d1 in the N direction (downward) of the arrow relative to the nozzle 402. At this time, the shaft portion 432c of the cam member 432 is rotatably supported around the rotational axis A40 relative to the first hole portion 402d1 of the nozzle 402. In addition, the shaft member 434 is inserted into the hole portion 432b of the cam member 432 in the arrow N direction (downward). At this time, the locking surface 434c of the shaft member 434 and the locking surface 432b 1 of the cam member 432 are engaged with each other, and the support surface 434d of the shaft member 434 and the support surface 432b2 of the cam member 432 are engaged with each other. By The engagement between the locking surface 434c of the shaft member 434 and the locking surface 432b 1 of the cam member 432, the cam member 432 and the shaft member 434 can be integrally rotated around the rotational axis A40. Further, in the direction (downward) of the arrow N, the cam member 432 is constrained from moving relative to the nozzle 402, and the shaft member 434 is constrained from moving relative to the cam member 432. Therefore, the shaft member 434 is in a state where the movement thereof is restricted relative to the nozzle 402 in the direction (downward) of the arrow N.
Finally, as shown in part (d) of Figure 120, the E-shaped retaining ring 435 is assembled to the shaft member 434. The groove portion 434e of the shaft member 434 is provided so as to be close to the third hole portion 402d3 in the second space S41 of the nozzle 402. By engaging the E-shaped retaining ring 435 with the groove portion 434e of the shaft member 434, the movement of the shaft member 434 relative to the nozzle 402 in the arrow U direction is restricted.
Through the above-described assembling operations, as shown in Figure 121, the movable passage 430, the tension spring 431, and the operation mechanism 436 are assembled to the nozzle 402. , the cam member 432 and the operating member 433 can rotate integrally with the shaft member 434 around the rotational axis A40, as described above, and therefore, when the operating member 433 is rotated in the rotational direction K40, the cam member 432 also rotates in the direction K40.
Thereafter, the assembly of the toner pack 420 is completed by assembling the accommodating portion 201 and the pack side shutter 203 to the nozzle 402.

(Operation of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figures 122 and 123, the operation of the toner pack 420 when the operating member 433 is operated will be described.
Figure 122 shows a state in which the movable passage 430 is in the second position stored in the nozzle 402, and part (a) thereof to part (c) thereof show a state in which the pack-side shutter 203 is in the closed position (d), and part (d) thereof to (f) thereof show a state in which the pack side shutter 203 is in the open position. Further, in Figure 122, part (a) and part (d) are perspective views, Part (b) and part (e) are sectional views taken along a line X407-X407 of part (b) of Figure 114 in the respective states, and part (c) the cross-section of view taken along a line X401-X401 of b) of part (b) of Figure 122, and part (f) is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X402-X402 of part (e) of this Figure.
Figure 123 shows the operation of the movable passage 430 by operating the operating member 433, and part (a) of this Figure to (c) thereof shows the state in which where the movable passage 430 is in the position projecting most from the nozzle 402 (the most projecting position), and parts (d) to (f) of these Figure shows a state in which the movable passage 430 is in the first position projecting from the nozzle 402. Further, in Figure 123, parts (a) and (d) of this Figure are perspective views, parts (b) and (e) are sectional views taken along a line X407-X407 of part (b) of Figure 114 in the respective states, part (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X403-X403 of part (b) of this Figure, and part (f) is a cross-section taken along a line X404-X404 of part (e) of this Figure.
Further, in Figures 122 and 123, the cut surfaces of the pack-side shutter 203 and the movable passage 430 are shaded for better illustration.
The description will first be made as to a state in which the pack-side shutter 203 shown in part (a) of Figure 122 is in the closed position, and the movable passage 430 is in the second position (retracting position). The operating member 433 projects outward from the nozzle 402 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. This makes it easier for the user to operate the operating member 433.
Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 122, the movable passage 430 receives a force F400 imparted by the tension spring 431 in the direction of arrow V41 (retracting direction) relative to the nozzle. The force F400 maintains the movable passage 430 in a second position housed in the nozzle 402. In addition, in the state of being in the second position, the downward opening 430a of the movable passage 430 is closed in the arrow N direction (downward), and the upward opening 430b is closed in the arrow U direction (upward). In this embodiment, the upward opening 430b of the movable passage 430 is closed with respect to the accommodating portion 201 (see Figure 114) on the arrow U direction (upward) side of the nozzle 402, but it may be open.
Further, as shown in part (c) of Figure 122, the movable passage 430 overlaps with the pack side shutter 203 in the rotational axis A direction, and also overlaps with the rotational direction K. In other words, the movable passage 430 overlaps with the pack side shutter 203 as viewed in the radial direction r. That is, the movable passage 430 is hidden by the pack-side shutter 203, thereby preventing the user from touching the movable passage 430. Further, the outflow of the toner, to the outside, which has entered the inside of the nozzle 402 from the accommodating portion 201 is prevented by the upper seal member 430f (see part (b) of Figure 122) provided in the movable passage 430. And, the cam member 432 is in contact with the first flat pushed surface 430c1a of the movable passage 430.
When the pack-side shutter 203 is rotated in the rotational direction K from this position to the open position, the state as shown in part (d) of Figure 122 is provided. Further, as shown in part (e) of Figure 122 and part (f) of Figure 122, the movable passage 430 is exposed from the pack side shutter 203 and becomes able to move in the arrow V40 direction (projecting direction).
That is, when the pack side shutter 203 is in the open position, the movable passage 430 is as follows. The movable passage 430 projects from the opening 402a of the nozzle 402 in the direction of the arrow V40, and is movable between a first position where the downward opening 430a is exposed to the outside of the toner pack 420 and a second position retracted from the first position in the direction of the arrow V41.
As shown in part (f) of Figure 122, in order to move the movable passage 430 in the arrow V40 direction (projecting direction), a force is applied to the operating member 433 to rotate in the rotational direction K40. Since the cam member 432 rotates integrally with the operating member 433, the push portion 432a of the cam member 432 applies a force F401 to the first pushed surface 430c1a of the movable passage 430 in the arrow V40 direction (projecting direction). By the force F401, the movable passage 430 moves in the arrow V40 (projecting direction) against the force F402 in the arrow V41 direction (retracting direction) produced by the tension spring 431 (see part (b) of Figure 122). At this time, the user carries out of this operation while feeling the load of the moment M400 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction K40 by the force F402.
Then, when the cam member 432 is further rotated in the rotational direction K40, the push portion 432a of the cam member 432 pushes the first flat pushed surface 430c1a and the first pushed slope 430c1b of the movable passage 430 in this order, and as shown in part (c) of Figure 123, it comes into contact with the projecting surface 430c3 of the movable passage 430. At this time, the movable passage 430 is at the position most projecting from the nozzle 402 (most projecting position). Also at this time, the user carries out the operation while feeling the load of the moment M400 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction K40 by the force F403 produced by the tension spring 431.
In the state where the movable passage 430 is in the most projecting position, the downward opening 430a of the movable passage 430 is projected from the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2 of the nozzle 402 in the arrow V40 direction (projecting direction), as shown in part (b) of Figure 123, and it becomes opened in the direction (downward) of the arrow N. The upward opening 430b of the movable passage 430 is opened with respect to the accommodating portion 201 (see Figure 114) on the arrow U direction side (above) of the nozzle 402.
When the operating member 433 is further rotated in the rotational direction K40 from this position, the push portion 432a of the cam member 432 abuts on the second pushed surface 430c2 of the movable passage 430 as shown in part (f) of Figure 123. In this state, the tension spring 431 (see part (e) of Figure 123) causes the second pushed surface 430c2 of the movable passage 430 to apply a force F404 to the cam member 432. At this time, the position and direction of the second pushed surface 430c2 of the movable passage 430 are set so that the moment M401 produced in the cam member 432 by the force F404 is in the same direction as the rotational direction K40. The cam member 432 is rotated in the rotational direction K40 by the moment M401. The operating member 433 rotated in the rotational direction K40 together with the cam member 432 abuts on the abutment surface 402f of the nozzle 402, and the rotation is stopped (restricted). That is, the rotation, integral with the operating member 433, of the cam member 432 in the rotational direction K40 is also stopped (restricted). Therefore, the movable passage 430 is constrained from moving in the arrow V41 direction (retracting direction) by the cam member 432 which is at rest (restricted) as described above. By this, the operation of the operating member 433 is completed. The position of the movable passage 430 at this time is the second position (projecting position).
When the movable passage 430 moves from the most projecting position to the first position, the movable passage 430 moves slightly in the V41 direction (evacuation direction), but the amount of movement is so small that the opening 430a of the movable passage 430 remains open in the direction of the arrow N (downward). Similarly, the upward opening 430b of the movable passage 430 remains open to the accommodating portion 201 (see Figure 114) placed in the downstream side on the arrow U direction side of (above) the nozzle 402.
Further, as described above, when the user operates the operating member 433 in the rotational direction K40 the user carries out the operation while feeling the moment M400 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction K40 (see part (d) of Figure 122 and part (a) of Figure 123), during the movable passage 430 being between the second position and the most projecting position. Thereafter, when the movable passage 430 is positioned at the second position, the movement is switched to the moment M401 in the rotational direction K40 opposite to the moment M400 (see part (d) of Figure 123), and therefore, the user recognizes the load reduction. Then, the user can recognize the completion of the operation of the operating member 433 by recognizing the load reduction.
When the user returns the movable passage 430 from the second position to the first position, the operation reverse to the above-described operation is be performed. As shown in part (d) of Figure 123, the operating member 433 may be rotated in the rotational direction L40, which is the direction opposite to the rotational direction K40.
The foregoing is the operation of the toner pack 420.

(Mounting and dismounting of toner pack)

Referring to Figures 124 to 126 the operation of mounting and dismounting the toner pack 420 to and from the mounting portion 206 will be described. The operation of inserting and removing the toner pack 420 relative to the mounting portion 206 is the same as that of Embodiment 2, the description thereof will be omitted.
Figure 124 shows a process of inserting the toner pack 420 into the mounting portion 206 and operating the operating lever 208 and the operating member 433. In Figure 124, part (a) shows a state in which the operating lever 208 is in the closed position, part (b) shows a state in which the operating lever 208 is in the open position, and part (c) shows a state in which the operating member 433 is further operated to place the movable passage 430 in the second position.
Figure 125 is a sectional view in a state in which the toner pack 420 is mounted on the mounting portion 206 and the operating lever 208 is in the open position, and part (a) of Figure 125 is a sectional view taken along the rotational axis A and the arrow V40 (projection direction), and part (b) of Figure 125 is a cross-section taken along a line X405-X405 of part (a) of Figure 125.
Figure 126 is a sectional view when the operating member 433 is operated to move the movable passage 430 to the second position, part (a) of this Figure is a sectional view taken along the rotational axis A and the arrow V40 (projecting direction), and part (b) is a cross-section taken along a line X406-X406 of part (a).
In Figures 125 and 126, the cut surfaces of the pack side shutter 203 and the movable passage 430 is shaded.
In the mounting operation of the toner pack 420 on the mounting portion 206, after inserting the toner pack 420 into the mounting portion 206, the operating lever 208 is first rotated in the rotational direction D as shown in Figure 124, and then the operating member 433 is rotated in the direction of an arrow K40.
First, when the operating lever 208 is rotated in the rotational direction D after being inserted into the mounting portion 206 of the toner pack 420, the state shown in Figure 125 is provided. In this state, as shown in part (a) of Figure 125, the movable passage 430 is in the second position. At this time, the downward opening 430a of the movable passage 430 is closed in the direction of the arrow N (downward) with respect to the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2 of the nozzle 402, the toner in the accommodating portion 201 (see Figure 114) cannot reach the apparatus-side opening 217a of the second frame 217 through the nozzle 402.
Further, as shown in part (a) of Figure 125 and part (b) of Figure 125, the apparatus-side seal 211 covers the periphery of the opening 402a of the nozzle 402.
Next, when the operating member 433 is operated and the movable passage 430 is moved to the second position, the state shown in Figure 126 is provided.
In this state, as shown in part (a) of Figure 126, the downward opening 430a of the movable passage 430 projects from the opening side cylindrical portion 402c2 of the nozzle 402 in the arrow V40 direction (projecting direction) and is opened in the arrow N direction (downward). Then, the movable passage 430 enters the inside of the first frame 207 of the mounting portion 206, and the downward opening 430a of the movable passage 430 is placed inside the first frame 207.
By this, the toner in the accommodating portion 201 (see Figure 114) can reach the apparatus-side opening 217a of the second frame 217 by way of the nozzle 402 and the movable passage 430, as indicated by the thick dotted arrow in the Figure. Further, as shown in part (a) of Figure 126 and part (b) of Figure 126, the apparatus-side seal 211 covers the periphery of the opening 402a of the nozzle 402 and the periphery of the movable passage 430 to prevent toner scattering.
This completes the mounting operation of the toner pack 420 on the mounting portion 206.
The removal of the toner pack 420 from the mounting portion 206 is performed in the reverse process of mounting the toner pack 420 on the mounting portion 206. That is, the operating member 433 is rotated in the rotational direction L40 from the state of part (c) of Figure 124, and then the operating lever 208 is rotated in the rotational direction E from the state of part (b) of Figure 124. The detailed operation of the movable passage 430 and the like at this time is merely the opposite of the mounting of the toner pack 420 on the mounting portion 206, and the description thereof will be omitted.
As described above, in the toner pack 420 of this embodiment, the nozzle 402 is provided with the movable passage 430, and the movable passage 430 movable between the first position stored in the nozzle 402 and the projecting second position.
By this, when the movable passage 430 is in the first position, the pack-side shutter 203 not only closes the opening 402a of the nozzle 402, but also closes the downward opening 430a of the movable passage 430. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the toner from leaking out from the nozzle 402 of the toner pack 420 to the outside.
Further, when the toner is replenished from the toner pack 420 to the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32, the toner can be discharged from a relatively deeper position of the mounting portion 206. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent toner from scattering out during replenishment.

Next, referring to Figures 127 to 141, another structure will be described. The same points as those of the above-described embodiments and modified examples will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members described in the above-described embodiments are assigned the same names as those in the above-described embodiment, and only the points different from those in the above-mentioned embodiment will be described.
Referring to Figures 127, 128, 129 and 130, the structure of the toner pack 520 will be described. Figure 127 is a perspective view of the toner pack 520 having the structure of this embodiment. Figure 128 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack 520. Figure 129 is a partially exploded perspective view as seen from the opposite direction of the exploded perspective view of Figure 128. Figure 130 is a partially exploded perspective view as seen from the opposite direction of the exploded perspective view of Figure 129.
As shown in Figures 127 and 128, the toner pack 520 includes an accommodating portion 501 (first accommodating portion) for accommodating toner, a seal support member 530, a toner seal 531, a connection ring 532, a nozzle 502, and a pack side shutter 203.
As shown in Figure 128, in the first direction D1, the accommodating portion 501 is provided at the first end portion, and on the second end portion side opposite to the first end portion in the first direction D1, the seal supporting member 530, the toner seal 531, the connection ring 532, the nozzle 502, and the pack-side shutter 203 are provided. As in Embodiment 2, the accommodating portion 501 includes a pouch formed by pouch processing of a flexible polypropylene sheet. The accommodating portion 501 is not limited to the pouch, and may be a resin bottle or a container made of paper or vinyl.
As shown in Figures 128 and 129, the seal support member 530 has a generally cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A (central axis), and includes an end surface 530aan outer cylindrical portion 530b in this order from the first end side in the first direction D1, and a mounting surface 530c on the side opposite to the end surface 530a. The mounting surface 530c is provided on the outside of the outer cylindrical portion 530b and has a flat plate shape perpendicular to the rotational axis A. On the mounting surface 530c, a through hole 530f having an axis parallel to the rotational axis A and an oblong hole 530g are provided at positions substantially symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A.
Further, the inner cylinder 530d is arranged inside the outer cylindrical portion 530b. The end surface 530a and the inner cylinder 530d are connected by a connection surface 530e. The connection surface 530e is an inclined surface that is inclined so as to be away from the rotational axis A as goes toward the first end side in the first direction D1 with the rotational axis A as the center. In addition, in the first direction D1 of the inner cylinder 530d, an end surface 530h is provided on the second end side (see Figure 128). The end surface 530h is a flat surface substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A, and is placed slightly on the first end side in the first direction D1 with respect to the mounting surface 530c.
The connection ring 532 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A, and includes an inner peripheral surface 532a, an outer peripheral portion 532b, an end surface 532c placed on the first end side in the first direction D1a second end side end surface 532d placed on the second end side in the first direction D1. In addition, a thread groove portion 532e is provided at the inner peripheral surface 532a of the connection ring 532.
Further, on the end surface 532c, bosses 532f and 532g having axes parallel to the rotational axis A are provided at substantially symmetric positions about the rotational axis A so as to project toward the first end side in the first direction D1.
An opening 532h is provided on the first end side, in the first direction D1, of the inner peripheral surface 532a.
A toner seal 531 is mounted closely to the end surface 532c so as to seal the opening 532h by adhesion or the like. In addition, the seal support member 530 is mounted to the connection ring 532 substantially coaxially from the first end side in the first direction D1. The through hole 530f and the oblong hole 530g of the seal support member 530 are engaged with the boss 532f and 532g of the connection ring 532, respectively, and the mounting surface 530c of the seal support member 530 is mounted by adhesion or the like on the end surface 532c with the toner seal 531 sandwiched therein.
Further, the opening 501a (see Figure 128) of the accommodating portion 501 is connected to the outer peripheral portion 532b of the connection ring 532 without a gap by adhesion or the like. In this manner, the toner inside the accommodating portion 501 is sealed by the connection ring 532 and the toner seal 531.
Further, as shown in Figure 130, the second end side end surface 532d of the connection ring 532 in the first direction D1 is provided with a recess 532k recessed toward the first end side in the first direction D1. The recess portion 532k is recessed in a circumferential shape and is arranged substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A. A ring seal 533, of an elastic member having a substantially cylindrical shape, is mounted to the recess 532k so as to be fitted from the second end side in the first direction D1, and is fixed to the connection ring 532 by adhesion or the like.
Further, the nozzle 502 is connected to the second end side in the first direction D1 of the connection ring 532.
Referring to Figure 131, the shape of the nozzle 502 will be described. Figure 131 is a perspective view of the nozzle 502. As shown in Figure 131, the nozzle 502 has a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A, and includes an end surface 502p, a thread ridge portion 502r, a disk portion 502s, a side surface 502c and a projecting portion 502b, in this order from the first end portion side in the first direction D1.
The thread ridge portion 502r of the nozzle 502 has a shape which is capable of meshing engagement with the thread groove portion 532e provided on the inner peripheral surface 532a of the connection ring 532, and the nozzle 502 and the connection ring 532 are connected by the threading therebetween. The disk portion 502s has a disk shape of a generally flat plate substantially coaxial with the rotational axis A, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the thread ridge portion 502r.
Further, the pack side shutter 203 is mounted to the nozzle 502.
The pack-side shutter 203 has the same shape as that of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, the connection method of the pack side shutter 203 and the nozzle 502 has the same structure as that of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, referring to Figures 131 and 132, the shape of the nozzle 502 will be described in detail.
Part (a) of Figure 132 is a sectional view of the nozzle 502 taken along a line X501-X501 of a side view part (c) of Figure 132. Part (b) of Figure 132 is a detailed view of a DT portion of part (a) of Figure 132. Part (c) of Figure 132 is a side view of the toner pack 520 showing the position of the line along which the sectional view of part (a) of Figure 132 is taken.
As shown in Figure 131 and part (a) of Figure 132 , when the toner pack 520 is in fresh and unused state, the nozzle 502 having this structure does not have anything that corresponds to the discharge opening (discharge opening 202a of Embodiment 2). At a position corresponding to the discharge opening of the side surface 502c of the nozzle 502, a pull tab 502k projecting outward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A is mounted. Therefore, the recess 502n is provided inside the nozzle 502 similarly to the passage through which the toner of Embodiment 2 passes, but it is not fluid communication with the side surface 502c of the nozzle 502. Here, the pull tab 502k is integrally formed with the nozzle 502. That is, the pull tab 502k is connected to the side surface 502c of the nozzle 502. The pull tab 502k has a substantially cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical axis is substantially parallel to the rotational axis A. The pull tab 502k has a cylindrical portion 502k1 and a connecting portion 502k2. The connecting portion 502k2 has a substantially plate-like shape which connects the side surface 502c of the nozzle 502 and the pull tab 502k with each other. Further, the side surface 502c is provided with a recess 502m which surrounds the connecting portion 502k2 and is recessed inward from the side surface 502c.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 132, the recess 502n is provided on the rotational axis A side of the recess 502m with a wall portion 502t interposed therebetween. The wall portion 502t is a partially thin due to the provision of the recess 502m of the side surface 502c.

(User operation)

Next, referring to Figures 133, 134, and 135, the user's operation will be described.
Figure 133 is a schematic perspective view illustrating a first operation of the user. Figure 134 is a side view illustrating a second operation of the user. Figure 135 is a side view illustrating a third operation of the user.
Figure 136 is a sectional view taken along a line X501-X501 shown in part (c) of Figure 132 of Figure 135.
As shown in Figure 133, the user pulls the pull tab 502k in the direction of an arrow V50. Then, the thin wall portion formed by the recess 502m breaks from the portion close to the connecting portion 502k2, and the wall portion 502t is separated from the nozzle 502 along the shape of the recess 502m. In this manner, as shown in part (a) of Figure 134, a discharge opening 502a in fluid communication with the recess 502n inside the nozzle 502 is formed on the side surface 502c. That is, the discharge opening 502a of the nozzle 502 is structured to be formed by breaking the wall portion 502t which is a part of the side surface 502c extending in the direction of the rotational axis A of the nozzle 502 and separating it from the nozzle 502.
At this time, as described above, the toner stored in the accommodating portion 501 is sealed by the connection ring 532 and the toner seal 531 so that the toner does not flow out through the discharge opening 502a.
Next, as shown in part (b) of Figure 134, the user rotates the pack-side shutter 203 relative to the nozzle 502 in the direction of the arrow L, and by this operation, the discharge opening 502a is sealed by the pack-side seal 205.
Next, as shown in Figure 135, the user rotates the connection ring 532 with respect to the nozzle 502 in the direction of the arrow L. The connection ring 532 performs relative movement in the direction of the arrow N along the thread groove portion 532e provided on the inner peripheral surface 532a substantially coaxial with the nozzle 502, while rotating in the direction of arrow L as shown in part (a) of Figure 135, part (b) of Figure 135 to part (c) of Figure 135. The connection ring 532 moves until the second end side end surface 532d and the disk portion 502s of the nozzle 502 abut to each other (part (c) of Figure 135).
At this time, as shown in part (c) of Figure 136 and part (d) of Figure 136, the end surface 502p of the nozzle 502 contacts the toner seal 531 while rotating relatively thereto, and breaks through the toner seal 531, so that the toner sealing state is broken.
Referring to Figures 136 and 137, the state of the above-described toner seal 531 will be described. Part (a) of Figure 137 shows a state before the toner seal 531 is torn, and part (b) of Figure 137 shows a state after the toner seal 531 is torn.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 137, the toner seal 531 is provided with a precut portion 531a in advance. The precut portion 531a is formed radially around the rotational axis A.
As shown in part (d) of Figure 136, the end surface 502p of the nozzle 502 abuts to the toner seal 531, which is thereby torn along the precut portion 531a. As shown in part (d) of Figure 136 and part (b) of Figure 137, the torn toner seal 531 is deformed so as to be folded between the outer cylindrical portion 530b and the inner cylinder 530d of the seal support member 530. In this manner, the toner seal 531 arranged so as to seal the opening 532h (part (b) of Figure 136) of the connection ring 532 is removed, and the toner seal by the toner seal 531 is released.
Thus, the toner sealing state by the toner seal 531 is released, the toner of the toner pack 520 flows into the nozzle 502, and is sealed by the pack side seal 205 described above.
Further, at this time, as shown in part (d) of Figure 136, the ring seal 533 adhered to the connection ring 532 is compressed between the recess 532k of the connection ring 532 and the disk portion 502s of the nozzle 502 in the first direction D1. In this manner, the toner is sealed between the connection ring 532 and the nozzle 502.
Thereafter, the user mounts the toner pack 520 on the mounting portion 206 of the image forming apparatus 1 by the same operation as in Embodiment 2. Further, the operating lever 208 is rotated in the direction of arrow D, and the attachment to the image forming apparatus 1 is completed. The structure is the same as that of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the details will be omitted. In this manner, the toner of the accommodating portion 501 is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32 through the discharge opening 502a of the nozzle 502 as in Embodiment 2.
After the toner is replenished, the discharge opening 502a is resealed by rotating the operating lever 208 in the direction of arrow E, and the toner pack 520 is permitted to be removed from the apparatus main assembly as in Embodiment 2. The structure is the same as that of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
In the foregoing description, the toner sealed state is released by breaking the toner seal 531. On the other hand, the toner sealing state may be released by the user manually pulling out the toner seal to the outside.
Referring to Figures 138, 139, 140, and 141 this structure will be described in detail.
Figure 138 is an external view of a toner pack 5120 in which the toner seal is pulled out to the outside by the user. Figure 139 is an exploded perspective view illustrating the mounting of the toner seal of the toner pack 5120. Figure 140 is a partially exploded perspective view as seen in the direction opposite to that of the perspective view of Figure 139. Figure 141 is sectional views of the toner pack 5120.
As shown in Figure 138, the toner pack 5120 is provided with a toner seal 534 and a pull tab 535 on the nozzle portion in the above-described structure.
The toner seal 534 has a thin film-like band shape, and is arranged substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Further, the toner seal 534 is fixed to the first nozzle portion 5102, which will be described hereinafter, by adhesion or the like. Further, a pull tab 535 is connected by adhesion or the like to the toner seal 534 at the side opposite from the connecting portion relative to the first nozzle portion 5102. The pull tab 535 has a hollow substantially cylindrical shape and has an axis substantially perpendicular to the toner seal 534.
As shown in Figure 139, in the nozzle of this structure, a second nozzle portion 537, a seal cap 536, and a first nozzle portion 5102 are arranged in this order from the first end portion side in the first direction D1.
The second nozzle portion 537 has a generally hollow cylindrical shape, and is arranged substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A. The second nozzle portion 537 includes a first end side end surface 537e, a first cylindrical portion 537b placed substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A, a second cylindrical portion 537c placed substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A and having a larger outer diameter than the first cylindrical portion, and a second end side end surface 537d, in the order named from the first end side in the first direction D1.
Further, as shown in Figure 140, the second end side end surface 537d is provided with a recess 537a recessed toward the first end side in the first direction D1, a cylindrical recess 537f, and an oval cylindrical recess 537g. The seal cap 536 is fitted into the recess 537a from the second end side in the first direction D1.
The seal cap 536 has a substantially flat plate shape and is placed perpendicular to the rotational axis A. The seal cap 536 has a base portion 536a on the first end side in the first direction D1, and is provided with a plurality of fin portions 536b projecting toward the second end side in the first direction D1 which is the opposite side. The fin portions 536b have a generally flat plate shape extending substantially parallel to the rotational axis A, and are arranged at equal intervals toward the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The seal cap 536 is made of an elastic material such as an elastomer, and in particular, the plurality of fin portions 536b are structured to be freely bent in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A.
As shown in Figure 139, the first nozzle portion 5102 has a generally cylindrical shape and is placed substantially coaxially with the rotational axis A. The first nozzle portion 5102 is provided with a first end side end surface 5102d, a side surface 5102c perpendicular to the rotational axis A, and a projecting portion 5102b, in this order from the first end side in the first direction D1. The side surface 5102c and the projecting portion 5102b have the same structures as the above-mentioned side surface 502c and the projecting portion 502b, respectively, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
The first end side end surface 5102d is provided with an opening 5102a leading to a passage through which the toner of Embodiment 2 passes. In addition, on the end side surface 5102d is provided with, two bosses 5102f and 5102g projecting toward the first end side in the first direction D1 at positions substantially symmetrically with respect to the rotational axis A.
As shown in Figure 139, a toner seal 534 is fixed on the first end side end surface 5102d so as to cover the opening 5102a by adhesive or the like. The toner seal 534 is bonded so as to cover the opening 5102a, and then folded back so as to overlap the bonded portion.
Thereafter, the second nozzle portion 537 is mounted, coaxially with the rotational axis A, to the first end surface 5102d from the first end side in the first direction D1, with the seal cap 536 mounted. At this time, positioning is effected by carrying out the mounting so that the two bosses 5102f and 5102g of the first nozzle portion 5102 fit into the cylindrical recess 537f and the oval cylindrical recess 537g of the second nozzle portion 537, respectively. The second nozzle portion 537 is mounted to the first nozzle portion 5102 by adhesive or the like, and the seal cap 536 is mounted in the manner as if the plurality of fin portions 536b trample the folded toner seal 534. In this manner, the toner seal is effected so that the seal cap 536 fills the space between the first nozzle portion 5102, the second nozzle portion 537, and the toner seal 534.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 141, when the user pulls out the pull tab 535 toward the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, the toner seal 534 is dismounted from the first nozzle portion 5102 is removed from the toner pack 5120 and separated from the toner pack 5120. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 141, the plurality of fin portions 536b of the seal cap 536 press the toner seal 534 in the first direction D1, and after the toner seal 534 is pulled out, the plurality of fin portions 536b abuts against the first end side end surface 5102d of the first nozzle portion 5102, so that the toner is sealed between the first nozzle portion 5102 and the second nozzle portion 537.
With the above-described structure, the toner seal is released by the user pulling out the toner seal 534 to the outside.
Further, in the above-described plurality of structures, the use is made with the toner seals 531 and 534 has been described, it is also possible to employ a structure in which the toner seals 531 and 534 are not provided, and instead the instruction manual or the like tells that the pull tab 502k of the nozzle 502 is to be pulled out by the user with the second end side of the first direction D1 being made upward in advance that the is peeled off.

Next, referring to Figures 142 to 147, Embodiment 6 will be described below. In this embodiment, as compared with Embodiment 3, the second restriction releasing portion is movable relative to the first restriction releasing portion between a first position where the first slope and the second slope aligned with each other, and a second position where it is rotated about the rotational axis A. The description on the same points as in the above-described embodiment will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiments 2 and 3 are assigned the same names as those of the members of Embodiments 2 and 3, and only the points different from these Embodiments will be described.

(Toner pack structure)

Referring to Figures 142 to 144, a toner pack 620 in this embodiment will be described. Figure 142 is an illustration of the entire toner pack 620 according to this embodiment. Figure 143 is an exploded perspective view of a restriction releasing mechanism 604, and is a view as seen from the second end side (nozzle side) in the first direction D1. Figure 144 is a detailed illustration of a shape and an assembly method of the restriction releasing mechanism 604 (projecting portion). Part (a) of Figure 144 shows a method of assembling the second restriction releasing member 604B to the first restriction releasing member 604A, and part (b) of Figure 144 shows the assembly method of the fixing pin 630 to the first restriction releasing member 604A and the second restriction releasing member 604B.
As shown in Figure 142, in the toner pack 620 of this embodiment, in addition to the toner accommodating portion 201, the nozzle 302, and the pack side shutter 203, a restriction releasing mechanism 604 partially projecting in the arrow N direction (downward) from the end surface 203c of the pack side shutter 203 is provided.
Next, referring to Figures 143 and 144, the restriction releasing mechanism 604 will be described.
As shown in Figure 143, the restriction releasing mechanism 604 comprises a first restriction releasing member 604A, a second restriction releasing member 604B, and a fixing pin 630.
The first restriction releasing member 604A has a generally cylindrical shape including a cylindrical portion 604Ac centered on the rotational axis A (central axis). At the end of the cylindrical portion 604Ac in the arrow U direction (upward direction), a substantially disk-shaped end portion 604Af projecting in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A is provided. A pair of projections 604Ae projecting in the arrow N direction (downward) is provided at the end in the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A of the end portion 604Af in the radial direction r. The projection 604Ae has a shape which is 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. In addition, a proper gap 604Ai is provided between the cylindrical portion 604Ac and the projection 604Ae in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A so that the second restriction releasing member 604B which will be described hereinafter can be assembled up to the end portion 604Af (see Figure 145). Further, as shown in part (a) of Figure 144, the end portion 604Af is provided with a hole portion 604Ah centered on the rotational axis A. The cylindrical portion 604Ac is provided with a pair of oblong holes 604Ad formed along the rotational direction K, and the pair of oblong holes 604Ad have symmetric shapes with respect to the rotational axis A. The semicircular round holes at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the oblong hole 604Ad each includes, a round hole portion 604Ad1 in the upstream side in the rotational direction K, a round hole portion 604Ad3 in the downstream side in the rotational direction K, and an oblong hole portion 604Ad2 connecting between the round hole portion 604Ad1 and the round hole portion 604Ad3. A straight line connecting the center of one round hole portion 604Ad1 and the center of the other round hole portion 604Ad1 and a straight line connecting the center of one round hole portion 604Ad3 and the other round hole portion 604Ad3 pass the rotational axis A orthogonally. Further, the diameters of the round holes 604Ad1 and 604Ad3 are selected to be slightly larger than the diameter of the fixing pin 630. Further, the width of the oblong hole portion 604Ad2 in the rotational axis A direction is selected to be slightly smaller than the diameter of the fixing pin 630. The reason for this will be described when the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 604 is explained. Referring the end portion of the cylindrical portion 604Ac on the arrow N direction (downward) side as the end portion 604Ag, a first restriction releasing portion 604Aa and a first restriction releasing portion 604Ab constituting a pair and projecting from the end portion 604Ag in the arrow N direction (downward). The first restriction releasing portion 604Aa and 604Ab have shapes which is 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. Further, of the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa and the first restriction releasing portion 604Ab constituting the pair, the one closer to the opening 302a of the nozzle 302 is the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa, in a state where the restriction releasing mechanism 604 which will be described hereinafter is assembled to the nozzle 302. The first restriction releasing portion 604Aa comprises a first slope 604Aa1 (first inner engaging surface, first downward surface, first downward guide surface, first force applying surface, first push surface) and a first abutment surface 604Aa2. The first slope 604Aa1 and the first abutment surface 604Aa2 have the same shapes as the first slope 304a1 and the first abutment surface 304a5 of the first restriction releasing portion 304a of Embodiment 3 (see Figure 106), respectively, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the first restriction releasing portion 604Ab has a shape which is 180 degree rotationally symmetric with the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa with respect to the rotational axis A as described above, and therefore, the description of the detailed shape is omitted. The first restriction releasing portion 604Ab does not necessarily have to be 180-degree rotationally symmetric with the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa with respect to the rotational axis A. The first restriction releasing portion 604Ab is preferably rotationally symmetric with the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa at 150 degrees or more and 210 degrees or less with respect to the rotational axis A.
The second restriction releasing member 604B has a generally cylindrical shape including a cylindrical portion 604Bc centered on the rotational axis A. An inner diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 604Bc thereof is an inner peripheral surface 604Bg, an end of the cylindrical portion 604Bc on the arrow N direction (lower) side is an end portion 604Bf, an end on the arrow U direction (upper) side is an end portion 604Be. The cylindrical portion 604Bc is provided with a pair of hole portions 604Bd which are 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. A straight line connecting the centers of the pair of hole portions 604Bd passes through the rotational axis A substantially orthogonally. The cylindrical portion 604Bc is provided with a pair of second restriction releasing portions 604Ba and 604Bb projecting from the end portion 604Bf in the direction (downward) of the arrow N. The pair of second restriction releasing portion 604Ba and second restriction releasing portion 604Bb have shapes of 180 degree rotational symmetry about the rotational axis A. In addition, of the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba and the second restriction releasing portion 604Bb, the one closer to the opening 302a of the nozzle 302 is the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba, in a state that the restriction releasing mechanism 604 which will be described hereinafter is assembled to the nozzle 302. The second restriction releasing portion 604Ba comprises a second slope 604Ba1 (first outer engagement surface, second downward surface, second downward guide surface, second force application surface, second push surface), a flat surface 604Ba2 (second engagement surface, an upward surface, an upward engaging surface, an upward push surface, an upward force applying surface), and a second abutment surface 604Ba3 (contacted surface). The second slope 604Ba1, the flat surface 604Ba2, and the second abutment surface 604Ba3 have the same shapes as the second slope 304a2, the flat surface 304a3, and the second abutment surface 304a6 in Embodiment 3 (see Figure 106), and therefore, the detailed description will be omitted. In addition, the second restriction releasing portion 604Bb has a shape which is 180-degree rotationally symmetric with the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba with respect to the rotational axis A as described above, and therefore, the description of the detailed shape is omitted. The second restriction releasing portion 604Bb does not necessarily have to be 180-degree rotationally symmetric with the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba with respect to the rotational axis A. The second restriction releasing portion 604Bb is preferably 150 degrees or more and 210 degrees or less rotationally symmetric with the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba with respect to the rotational axis A.
As shown in Figure 143, the fixing pin 630 has an elongated substantially cylindrical shape centered on the axis B60.

(Assembling of toner pack)

Referring to Figures 144 and 145, the assembling of the toner pack 620 according to this embodiment will be described. Figure 145 is a sectional view of the toner pack 620 after the assembling, taken along a lineX601-X601 shown in Figure 142 and along the pin 310 with the rotational axis A as the center.
The assembly other than the restriction releasing mechanism 604 is the same as in Embodiments 2 and 3, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
First, as shown in part (a) of Figure 144, the second restriction releasing member 604B is telescoped on the first restriction releasing member 604A in the arrow U direction (upward) so that the inner peripheral surface 604Bg is relatively inserted into the cylindrical portion 604 Ac. The inner peripheral surface 604Bg of the second restriction releasing member 604B and the cylindrical portion 604Ac of the first restriction releasing member 604A are supported slidably relative to each other. As described above, since the gap 604Ai (see Figure 145) is provided between the projection 604Ae of the first restriction releasing member 604A and the cylindrical portion 604Ac, the end portion 604Be of the second restriction releasing member 604B can be inserted until it comes into contact with the end portion 604Af of the first restriction releasing member 604A.
Next, referring to part (b) of Figure 144, the assembly of the fixing pin 630 to the first restriction releasing member 604A and to the second restriction releasing member 604B will be described. Prior to the assembling of the fixing pin 630, the center of the hole portion 604Bd of the second restriction releasing member 604B and the center of the round hole portion 604Ad1 of the oblong hole 604Ad of the first restriction releasing member 604A are aligned with each other. From this state, the fixing pin 630 is inserted in the direction of an arrow V60 through one of the hole portions 604Bd of the second restriction releasing member 604B, one of the round holes 604Ad1 of the first restriction releasing member 604A, the other round hole 604Ad1, and the other hole portion 604Bd of the second restriction releasing member 604B, in this order. The fixing pin 630 is fixed to the hole portion 604Bd of the second restriction releasing member 604B by means such as adhesion, clamping, or press fitting. By this, the assembly of the restriction releasing mechanism 604 is completed.
Next, referring to Figure 145, the assembly of the restriction releasing mechanism 604 on the nozzle 302 will be described. The restriction releasing mechanism 604 is assembled to the nozzle 302 in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and the cylindrical portion 604Ac is supported by the cylindrical support portion 302b. In addition, a pair of proj ections 604Ae of the first restriction releasing member 604A are inserted into a pair of cut-away portions 302c of the nozzle 302. By the engagement between the projection 604Ae of the first restriction releasing member 604A and the cut-away portion 302c, the movement of the first restriction releasing member 604A relative to the nozzle 302 around the rotational axis A is restricted. Therefore, the first restriction releasing member 604A is movably supported only in the direction of the rotational axis A relative to the nozzle 302. Further, when the first restriction releasing member 604A is inserted into the nozzle 302 in the direction of the arrow U (upward), the small diameter shaft portion 331c of the shaft member 331 is inserted into the hole portion 604Ah of the first restriction releasing member 604A, and the end portion 604Af abuts on the shaft ring 334.
Similarly to Embodiment 3, the shaft ring 335 is telescoped over the small diameter shaft portion 331c to a position where the hole 335a abuts against the end portion 604Aj of the first restriction releasing member 604A, and is fixed to the small diameter shaft portion 331c of the shaft member 331. Through the above-described process, the assembly of the restriction releasing mechanism 604 to the nozzle 302 is completed.

(Operation of restriction releasing mechanism)

Next, referring to Figures 146 and 147, the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism will be described. Figure 146 is an illustration of the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 604 in this embodiment. Part (a) of Figure 146 shows a first position (aligned position) in which the second restriction releasing member 604B is such that the first slope 604Aa1 of the first restriction releasing member 604A and the second slope 604Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 604B are aligned with each other. Part (b) of Figure 146 shows a state in which the second restriction releasing member 604B is in the second position (non-aligned position) which is the position rotated in the rotational direction K from the first position. Figure 147 is a detailed view of the toner pack 620 as viewed from the side (nozzle side) of the second end portion in the first direction D1, and part (a) thereof shows a state in which the second restriction releasing member 604B is in the first position, and part (b) shows a state in which the second restriction releasing member 604B is in the second position.
First, as shown in part (a) of Figure 146, when the second restriction releasing member 604B is in the first position, the center of the hole portion 604Bd of the second restriction is coincident with the center of the center of the round hole portion 604Ad1 of the oblong hole 604Ad of the first restriction releasing member 604A, by way of the fixing pin 630. In this state, as shown in part (a) of Figure 147, the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa and the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba is such that the first slope 604Aa1 and the second slope 604Ba1 are aligned with each other both in the rotational direction K about the rotational axis A and in the direction of the rotational axis A. That is, the first slope 604Aa1 and the second slope 604Ba1 are at the same position in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC.
In order to move the second restriction releasing member 604B to the second position from this state (first position), the user rotates the second restriction releasing member 604B relative to the first restriction releasing member 604A in the rotational direction K about the rotational axis A. In interrelation with this, the fixing pin 630 (see Figure 146) are fixed by the hole portion 604Bd of the second restriction releasing member 604B at both ends thereof rotates in the rotational direction K about the rotational axis A. The fixing pin 630 passes from the round hole portion 604Ad1 upstream side (in the rotational direction K) of the oblong hole 604Ad of the first restriction releasing member 604A, through the oblong hole portion 604Ad2, to the downstream side round hole portion 604Ad3 in the rotational direction K. By this, the second restriction releasing member 604B rotates in the rotational direction K by the amount of rotation of the fixing pin 630, and moves to the second position as shown in part (b) of Figure 146. At this time, the center of the hole portion 604Bd of the second restriction releasing member 604B is coincident with the center of the round hole portion 604Ad3 of the oblong hole 604Ad of the first restriction releasing member 604A by way of the fixing pin 630. That is, the first slope 604Aa1 and the second slope 604Ba1 are at different positions in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC.
Here, in the direction of the rotational axis A, a width of the oblong hole portion 604Ad2 of the oblong hole 604Ad is slightly smaller than the diameter of the fixing pin 630. In addition, the diameters of the round holes 604Ad1 and 604Ad3 are slightly larger than the diameter of the fixing pin 630. By this, when the fixing pin 630 is placed at the round hole portions 604Ad1 and 604Ad3, it cannot move to the oblong hole portion 604Ad2 unless a certain force is applied. Therefore, when the second restriction releasing member 604B is in the first position or the second position, the position is prevented from changing at an unintended timing, and therefore, the user can apply the force to change the position at a user's own timing. Further, when the fixing pin 630 moves, the resistance is different between the long hole portion 604Ad2 of the oblong hole 604Ad and the round hole portions 604Ad1 and 604Ad3, so that the applied force changes. When the user's hand operating (rotating) the second restriction releasing member 604B feels this change in force, the user can recognizes that the operation of the second restriction releasing member 604B is completed.
When the second restriction releasing member 604B is located at the second position, as shown in part (b) of Figure 147, the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa and the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba are such that the first slope 604Aa1 and the second slope 604Ba1 are at different positions in the rotational direction about the rotational axis A and in the direction of the rotational axis A. The positional relationship at this time between the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa and the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba is set to be the same as that of the first restriction releasing portion 304a of Embodiment 3 (see Figure 106).
In order to move the second restriction releasing member 604B from the second position to the first position in this state, the second restriction releasing member 604B is rotated in the direction of arrow L about the rotational axis A relative to the first restriction releasing member 604A. By this, the second restriction releasing member 604B moves from the second position to the first position through reverse process of the movement from the first position to the second position.

(Mounting and dismounting of toner pack)

Next, mounting and dismounting of the toner pack 620 to and from the mounting portion 206 will be described. When mounting the toner pack 620 on the mounting portion 206, the second restriction releasing member 604B shown in part (b) of Figure 147 is moved to the second position in advance before mounting. As described above, when the second restriction releasing member 604B is in the second position, the relationship between the first restriction releasing portion 604Aa of the first restriction releasing member 604A and the second restriction releasing portion 604Ba of the second restriction releasing member 604B is the same as that of the first restriction releasing portion 304a of Embodiment 3. Therefore, the mounting and dismounting operations of the toner pack 620 to and from the mounting portion 206 is the same as the operations of mounting and dismounting of the toner pack 320 to and from the mounting portion 206 of Embodiment 3. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to Figures 148 to 161, Embodiment 7 will be described in the following. In this embodiment, the structure of the restriction releasing member is different from that in Embodiment 3. The same points as in the above-described embodiment will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiments 2 and 3 are assigned the same names as the members of Embodiments 2 and 3, and only the points different from Embodiments 2 and 3 will be described.

(Toner pack structure)

Referring to Figures 148 to 151, the toner pack 720 in this embodiment will be described. Figure 148 is an illustration of the entire toner pack 720 in this embodiment. Figure 149 is an exploded perspective view of a restriction releasing mechanism 704. Part (a) of Figure 149 is a view as seen from a second end side (nozzle side) in a first direction D1, and part (b) of Figure 149 is a view as seen from a first end side (accommodation portion side) in the first direction D1. Figure 150 is a detailed view of a first restriction releasing member 704A and a second restriction releasing member 704B. Part (a) of Figure 150 shows the first restriction releasing member 704A, and part (b) of Figure 150 shows the second restriction releasing member 704B. Figure 151 is a sectional view of the toner pack 720 after assembly, taken along a line X701-X701 shown in Figure 148 and along a pin 310 with the rotational axis A as the center.
As shown in Figure 148, in the toner pack 720 of this embodiment includes a restriction releasing mechanism 704 (projection portion) which partially projects in the direction (downward) of the arrow N from the end surface 203c of the pack-side shutter 203, in addition to the accommodating portion 201 for accommodating the toner, the nozzle 302, and the pack-side shutter 203.
Next, referring to Figure 149, the restriction releasing mechanism 704 will be described. The restriction releasing mechanism 704 comprises a first restriction releasing member 704A (first projection member), a second restriction releasing member 704B (second projection member), an initialization spring 730, and an advancing/retracting member 731 (moving member).
The first restriction releasing member 704A has a generally cylindrical shape including a cylindrical portion 704Af centered on the rotational axis A (central axis). The end portion of the cylindrical portion 704Af on the arrow N direction (lower) side is referred to as an end portion 704Ag, and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 704Af is referred to as an inner peripheral surface 704Ae (first inner peripheral surface). The inner peripheral surface 704Ae is a surface extending in the direction of the rotational axis A with the rotational axis A as the center. The cylindrical portion 704Af is provided with a pair of first restriction releasing portions 704Aa and 704Ab projecting from the end portion 704Ag in the direction of the arrow N (downward). Further, the cylindrical portion 704Af is provided with a pair of cut-away portions 704Ac and 704Ad (first guide groove, first slit). The first restriction releasing portion 704Ab and the cut-away portion 704Ad have 180-degree symmetric shapes of the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa and the cut-away portion 704Ac, respectively with respect to the rotational axis A. In addition, in a state in which the restriction releasing mechanism 704 which will be described hereinafter is assembled to the nozzle 302, the one of the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa and 704Ab that is closer to the opening 302a of the nozzle 302 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC is the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa. Similarly, of the cut-away portions 704Ac and 704Ad constituting the pair, the one closer to the opening 302a of the nozzle 302 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC is referred to as the cut-away portion 704Ac. Next, referring to part (a) of Figure 150, the detailed shapes of the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa and the cut-away portion 704Ac will be described. A first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1 (downstream end surface) substantially parallel to the rotational axis A is provided on the end surface, on the downstream side in the rotational direction K, of the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa. That is, the first restriction release surface 704a1 (first inner engaging surface, first force applying surface, first push surface) extends in the direction of the rotational axis A and faces downstream in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction). The cut-away portion 704Ac is formed by an entrance portion 704Ac1, an inclined portion 704Ac2, and a straight portion 704Ac3. The entrance portion 704Ac1 is a cut-away portion formed in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided on the end portion 704Ag on the downstream side in the rotational direction K from the first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1. The inclined portion 704Ac2 is a cut-away portion formed, on the upstream side in the rotational direction K, in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided connected with the entrance portion 704Ac1. The straight portion 704Ac3 is a cut-away portion formed substantially parallel to the rotational axis A in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided connected with the inclined portion 704Ac2. A width of the cut-away portion 704Ac is slightly larger than the diameter of the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731, which will be described hereinafter, and the pin 731b is selected to be able to path therethrough. The first restriction releasing portion 704Ab and the cut-away portion 704Ad have 180-degree symmetric shapes of the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa and the cut-away portion 704Ac as described above with respect to the rotational axis A, and therefore, the description thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, the cut-away portion 704Ac is provided so that the entrance portion 704Ac1 is on the downstream side of the first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1 in the rotational direction K, but this structure is not limiting to the present invention. The cut-away portion 704Ac may be provided at any position in the rotational direction K as long as it does not hinder the formation of the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa and the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba of the second restriction releasing member 704B which will be described hereinafter.
As shown in Figure 149, the second restriction releasing member 704B has a generally cylindrical shape including a cylindrical portion 704Bc centered on the rotational axis A. An end of the cylindrical portion 704Bc on the (lower) side in the arrow N is referred to as an end portion 704Bh, and an inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 704Bc is referred to as an inner peripheral surface 704Be (second inner peripheral surface). The inner peripheral surface 704Be is a surface extending in the direction of the rotational axis A with the rotational axis A as the center. An end portion 704Bf is on the arrow U direction (upper side) side of the cylindrical portion 704Bc. The end portion 704Bf is provided with a hole portion 704Bg centered on the rotational axis A. The cylindrical portion 704Bc is provided with a pair of projections 704Bd projecting in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. In addition, the pair of projections 704Bd are provided so as to have shapes 180-degree symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. The cylindrical portion 704Bc is provided with a pair of second restriction releasing portions 704Ba (first projections) and second restriction releasing portions 704Bb (second projections) projecting from the end portion 704Bh in the direction of the arrow N (downward). Further, the cylindrical portion 704Bc is provided with a pair of cut-away portions 704Bi (see Figure 150) and 704Bj (second guide groove, second slit). The second restriction releasing portion 704Bb and the cut-away portion 704Bj have shapes 180 degree symmetric about the rotational axis A with respect to the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba and the cut-away portion 704Bi, respectively. Further, in a state where the restriction releasing mechanism 704 which will be described hereinafter is assembled to the nozzle 302, of the second restriction releasing portions 704Ba and 704Bb constituting the pair, the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba is closer to the opening 302a of the nozzle 302 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC. Similarly, of the pair of cut-away portions 704Bi and 704Bj, the cut-away portion 704Bi is closer to the opening 302a of the nozzle 302 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC.
Next, referring to part (b) of Figure 150, the detailed shapes of the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba and the cut-away portion 704Bi will be described. The second restriction releasing portion 704Ba comprises a second slope 704Ba1, a flat surface 704Ba2, and an abutment surface 704Ba3. The second slope 704Ba1 (second outer engaging surface, second downward guide surface, second downward surface), flat surface 704Ba2 (second engaging surface, upward surface, upward engaging surface, upward push surface), abutment surface 704Ba3 (contacted surface) have the shapes similar to those of the second slope 304a2, the flat surface 304a3, and the second abutment surface 304a6 (see Figure 106), respectively in Embodiment 3, and therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The cut-away portion 704Bi is formed substantially parallel to the rotational axis A in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided on the end portion 704Bh on the downstream side, in the rotational direction K, of the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba. The cut-away portion part 704Bi has a function of determining the phase in the rotational direction K with the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa which will be described hereinafter, and therefore, it is determined by the position of the cut-away portion 704Ac of the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa. In addition, the surface of the end portion 704Bf of second restriction releasing member 704B on the arrow N direction (lower side) side is provided with a support cylinder 704Bk centered on the rotational axis A (see Figure 151).
As shown in Figure 149, the initialization spring 730 is a compression coil spring having a central axis aligned with the rotational axis A.
The advancing/retracting member 731 is a generally disk-shaped member including a disk portion 731c centered on the rotational axis A and a pair of pins 731b. An end surface of the disk portion 731c in the arrow N direction (downward) is provided as a pushed surface 731a. The pair of pins 731b are provided so as to project from the outer peripheral surface of the disk portion 731c in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The pair of pins 731b are arranged 180 degrees symmetrically with respect to the rotational axis A. A support cylinder 731d is provided at an end of the disk portion 731c in the arrow U direction (upward direction).

(Assembly of toner pack)

Referring to Figures 149 and 151, the assembling of the toner pack 720 according to this embodiment will be described. The assembling except for the restriction releasing mechanism 704 is similar to that of Embodiments 2 and 3, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 149, for the assembling of the restriction releasing mechanism 704, the second restriction releasing member 704B, the shaft ring 335, the first restriction releasing member 704A, the initialization spring 730, and the advancing/retracting member 731 are assembled to the nozzle 302 assembled up to the shaft ring 334, in this order in the direction of arrow U (upward). The assembly order of the first restriction releasing member 704A and the initialization spring 730 may be interchanged.
As shown in Figure 151, the second restriction releasing member 704B is telescoped on the small diameter shaft portion 331c of the shaft member 331 at the, the hole portion 704Bg until it abuts to the shaft ring 334, and the hole portion 704Bg and the small diameter shaft portion 331c are slidable relative to each other. In addition, for the second restriction releasing member 704B, the cylindrical portion 704Bc is telescoped on the cylindrical support portion 302b, and the projection 704Bd is inserted into the cut-away portion 302c of the nozzle 302 (see Figure 149). By the engagement between the projection 704Bd of the second restriction releasing member 704B and the cut-away portion 302c of the nozzle 302, the movement of the second restriction releasing member 704B relative to the nozzle 302 around the rotational axis A is restricted. Therefore, the second restriction releasing member 704B is supported movably only in the direction of the rotational axis A relative to the nozzle 302.
The shaft ring 335 is telescoped on the small diameter shaft portion 331c at the hole 335a until it abuts to the end portion 704Bf of the second restriction releasing member 704B with respect to the small diameter shaft portion 331c, and is fixed to the small diameter shaft portion 331c.
The first restriction releasing member 704A is inserted into the second restriction releasing member 704B so that the cylindrical portion 704Af is rotationally supported by the inner peripheral surface 704Be. In other words, the first restriction releasing member 704A is provided rotatably about the rotational axis A inside the inner peripheral surface 704Be of the second restriction releasing member 704B in the radial direction r. In addition, the first restriction releasing member 704A is inserted until it abuts to the end portion 704Bf of the second restriction releasing member 704B. And, a retaining portion (not shown) is provided on the inner peripheral surface 704Be of the second restriction releasing member 704B so as to project inward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. By engagement between the retaining portion and the first restriction releasing member 704A, the movement of the first restriction releasing member 704A in the rotational axis A direction is restricted. Therefore, the first restriction releasing member 704A is supported so as to be movable (rotatable) only about the rotational axis A relative to the second restriction releasing member 704B.
The initialization spring 730 is fixed to the support cylinder 704Bk of the second restriction releasing member 704B by press fitting or the like.
The advancing/retracting member 731 is inserted into the first restriction releasing member 704A so that the disk portion 731c is slidably supported by the inner peripheral surface 704Ae. In other words, the advancing/retracting member 731 is provided so as to be movable in the direction of the rotational axis A inside the inner peripheral surface 704Ae of the first restriction releasing member 704A in the radial direction r. At this time, the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 shown in Figure 149 is inserted into the entrance portions 704Ac1, 704Ad1 of the cut-away portions 704Ac, 704Ad of the first restriction releasing member 704A and into the cut-away portions 704Bi, 704Bj of the second restriction releasing member 704B (Figure See 150). By this, the position of the first restriction releasing member 704A relative to the second restriction releasing member 704B is restricted in the rotational direction K by the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731. In addition, by engaging the pin 731b with the cut-away portion 704Bi, the advancing/retracting member 731 is restricted in the rotation around the rotational axis A relative to the second restriction releasing member 704B. Therefore, the advancing/retracting member 731 is supported movably only in the direction of the rotational axis A relative to the second restriction releasing member 704B.
Finally, the advancing/retracting member 731 is fixed by fixing the support cylinder 731d to the end portion of the initialization spring 730 by press fitting, adhesion or the like. The restriction releasing mechanism 704 is assembled by the above process. The initialization spring 730 urges the advancing/retracting member 731 in the direction away from the accommodating portion 201 in the direction of the rotational axis A.

(Operation of restriction releasing mechanism)

Next, referring to Figure 152, the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 704 will be described. Figure 152 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 704. Part (a) of Figure 152 shows a state in which the advancing/retracting member 731 has moved in the direction of arrow N (downward) relative to the first restriction releasing member 704A, and the pin 731b is in the entrance portion 704Ac1. Part (b) of Figure 152 shows a state in which the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 is in contact with the inclined portion 704Ac2 of the first restriction releasing member 704A. Part (c) of Figure 152 shows a state in which the advancing/retracting member 731 has moved in the direction of the arrow U (upward) relative to the first restriction releasing member 704A, and the pin 731b is in the straight portion 704Ac3.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 152, when the advancing/retracting member 731 is placed in arrow N direction side of (below) the first restriction releasing member 704A, the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 is placed in the entrance portion 704Ac1 of the first restriction releasing member 704A. When a force F700 in the arrow U direction (upward) is applied to the pushed surface 731a of the advancing/retracting member 731, the advancing/retracting member 731 is moved in the arrow U direction (upward) against the spring force of the initialization spring 730 (see Figure 151) due to the force F700. The arrow U direction is the direction in which the advancing/retracting member 731 approaches the accommodating portion 201. At this time, since the pin 731b is restricted in the movement in the rotational direction K by the cut-away portion 704Bi of the second restriction releasing member 704B, the advancing/retracting member 731 moves only in the arrow U direction (upward).
When the advancing/retracting member 731 receives the force F700 in the arrow U direction (upward) and continues to move further in the arrow U direction (upward), the pin 731b abuts on the inclined portion 704Ac2 of the first restriction releasing member 704A, and the resultant state is shown in part (b) of Figure 152. As described above, the inclined portion 704Ac2 is inclined toward the upstream side in the rotational direction K and the arrow U direction (upward). Therefore, the first restriction releasing member 704A receives a force F701 including a component downstream in the rotational direction K from the pin 731b. Since the movement of the first restriction releasing member 704A in the rotational axis A direction is restricted, the first restriction releasing member 704A is rotated in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction) by the force F701. That is, the first restriction releasing member 704A rotates in the rotational direction K relative to the second restriction releasing member 704B. In Interrelation with this, the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa of the first restriction releasing member 704A also rotates in the rotational direction K. That is, as the advancing/retracting member 731 moves in the direction of the arrow U (upward), the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa of the first restriction releasing member 704A rotates in the rotational direction K relative to the second restriction releasing member 704B. That is, the advancing/retracting member 731 is structured to rotate the first restriction releasing member 704A and the second restriction releasing member 704B in the rotational direction K by being moved in the arrow U direction (upward).
When the advancing/retracting member 731 receives the force F700 in the arrow U direction (upward) and is moved in the arrow U direction (upward), the first restriction releasing member 704A further rotates in the rotational direction K, and the phases of the pin 731b the and the straight portion 704Ac3 match are aligned. And, the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 becomes in a state of being inserted up to the straight portion 704Ac3 as shown in part (c) of Figure 152. When the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 is inserted up to the straight portion 704Ac3, the first restriction releasing member 704A becomes in a state where the movement of the first restriction releasing member 704A relative to the second restriction releasing member 704B in the rotational direction K is restricted by the pin 731b.
When the force F700 on the pushed surface 731a of the advancing/retracting member 731 is released, the advancing/retracting member 731 moves in the arrow N direction (downward) by the force F702 from the initialization spring 730 (see Figure 151). Then, through the reverse process of the movement of the advancing/retracting member 731 in the arrow U direction (upward), the advancing/retracting member 731 shown in part (a) of Figure 152 becomes in the state of having been moved relative to the first restriction releasing member 704A and the arrow N direction (downward).
The foregoing is the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 704.

(Mounting and dismounting of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figure 153, mounting/dismounting of the toner pack 720 to/from the mounting portion 206 will be described. As for the mounting operation of the toner pack 720, only the operations different from those of Embodiments 2 and 3 will be described. Figure 153 is sectional views illustrating a process in which the restriction releasing mechanism 704 releases the rotation restricting mechanism 212 when the toner pack 720 is mounted to the mounting portion 206. Some portions are not shown for the sake of better illustration. Further, the states of part (a) of Figure 153 to part (e) of Figure 153 will be described hereinafter.
Part (a) of Figure 153 shows a state in which the pushed surface 731a of the advancing/retracting member 731 is in contact with a free end portion 209d70 of the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209. In this state, the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 is located at the entrance portion 704Ac1 of the first restriction releasing member 704A. At this time, the first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1 of the first restriction releasing member 704A is placed on the upstream side, in the rotational direction D, of the contact surface 214f of the releasing claw 214e. It is preferable that immediately before the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 enters the inclined portion 704Ac2 of the first restriction releasing member 704A, the first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1 is partly overlapped with the contact surface 214f of the releasing claw 214e is in the rotational axis A direction. Further, the second slope 704Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 704B is placed on the downstream side of the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e in the rotational direction D. In the Figure, the neighborhood of the second slope 704Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 704B and the neighborhood of the contact surface 214f of the releasing claw 214e appear to overlap, but there is a gap in the direction perpendicular to the sheet of the drawing (direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A), and therefore, the toner pack 720 can move in the N direction (downward) of the arrow without interfering.
When the toner pack 720 is further moved in the N direction (downward) of the arrow from this position, the pushed surface 731a of the advancing/retracting member 731 receives a force F703 from the free end portion 209d70 of the center boss 209d. By this, the advancing/retracting member 731 moves in the direction of arrow G (upward) relative to the first restriction releasing member 704A and the second restriction releasing member 704B. As described above, by the movement of the advancing/retracting member 731 in the arrow G direction (upward), the first restriction releasing member 704A is rotated in the rotational direction D (first rotational direction). By the rotation of the first restriction releasing member 704A, the first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1 abuts to the contact surface 214f of the releasing member 214, and a force F704 is applied to the releasing member 214. That is, the first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1 functions as a force applying surface. By the force F704, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D against the moment M202 provided by the releasing spring 216 (see Figure 50). As the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction D, the second guided surface 214e2 and the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e are exposed to the outside as shown in part (c) of Figure 66.
When the toner pack 720 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this position, the rotation of the releasing member 214 in the rotational direction D provides the state in which the second slope 704Ba1 of the restriction releasing portion 704Ba and the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e are overlapped as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis A, as shown in part (b) of Figure 153. That is, when the toner pack 720 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N (downward), the second slope 704Ba1 of the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba and the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e are brought into contact with each other. In addition, the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 at this time is inserted until it reaches the position of the straight portion 704Ac3 of the first restriction releasing member 704A. That is, even if the advancing/retracting member 731 moves in the arrow G direction (upward) relative to the first restriction releasing member 704A and the second restriction releasing member 704B by the force F703, the first restriction releasing member 704A does not rotate any more in the rotational direction D.
When the toner pack 720 is further moved in the direction (downward) of the arrow N from this position, the operation is the same as that of Embodiments 2 and 3, and therefore, detailed explanation is omitted, but the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by the contact between the second guided surface 214e2 and the second slope 704Ba1. The releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction D until the second guided surface 214e2 passes the downstream end of the second slope 704Ba1 in the rotational direction D, and the state shown in part (c) of Figure 153 results. Even in this state, the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 is placed at the straight portion 704Ac3 of the first restriction releasing member 704A. Then, when the toner pack 720 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this position, the advancing/retracting member 731 is moved in the arrow G direction (upward) relative to the first restriction releasing member 704A and the second restriction releasing member 704B by the force F703. Further, the third guided surface 204e3 of the releasing claw 214e passes in the flat surface 704Ba2 of the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba in the direction of the arrow N. Since the similar operation is performed in Embodiment 3, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the contact surface 214a of the releasing claw 214e abuts on the abutment surface 704Ba3 of the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba as shown in part (d) of Figure 153. Thereafter, since the operation is similar to that of Embodiment 3, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but by operating the operating member 330 (see Figure 149), the second restriction releasing member 704B is moved in the direction of the arrow G to move the claw 214e in the direction of arrow G. By this, as shown in part (e) of Figure 153, the restricting member 213 is moved in the direction of arrow G (upward) together with the releasing member 214, and the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released. With the foregoing, the toner pack 720 is in the mounted state.
The operation of dismounting the toner pack 720 from the mounting portion 206 is similar to that of Embodiment 3, the description thereof will be omitted.
In this embodiment, the flat surface 704Ba2 of the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba is structured as a surface substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A, but the structure similar to that of the third slope 204a3 (see Figure 65) of Embodiment 2 may be employed.

(Modified Example 1)

In this embodiment, the second slope 704Ba1 of the second restriction releasing portion 704Ba faces in the direction of the arrow N (downward), and extends such as to go in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction) about the rotational axis A. However, the present invention is not limited to such a structure. In this modified example, the second slope has a surface perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Referring to Figures 154 and 155 this modified example will be described in the following.
Referring to Figure 154, the first restriction releasing member 7104A and the second restriction releasing member 7104B in this modified example will be described. Figure 154 is a detailed view of the first restriction releasing member 7104A and the second restriction releasing member 7104B, in which part (a) thereof represents the first restriction releasing member 7104A, and part (b) thereof represents the second restriction releasing member 7104B.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 154, the first restriction releasing member 7104A is different from the first restriction releasing member 704A (see part (a) of Figure 150) of this embodiment which is a base of this modified example, more particularly the shapes of pair of cut-away portion portions 7104Ac and 7104Ad (first guide groove, first slit) are different. The pair of cut-away portions 7104Ac and 7104Ad have symmetric shapes centered on the rotational axis A as in this embodiment, and therefore, only the cut-away portion 7104Ac will be described, and the description of the cut-away portion 7104Ad will be omitted.
The cut-away portion 7104Ac is formed by an entrance portion 7104Ac1, an inclined portion 7104Ac2, a straight portion 7104Ac3, and a step portion 7104Ac4.
The entrance portion 7104Ac1 is a cut-away portion extended in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided on an end portion 7104Ag on a downstream side, in the rotational direction K, of a first restriction releasing surface 7104Aa1.
The inclined portion 7104Ac2 is a cut-away portion formed toward the upstream side in the rotational direction K and in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided in connection with the entrance portion 7104Ac1.
The straight portion 7104Ac3 is a cut-away portion formed substantially parallel to the rotational axis A in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided in connection with the inclined portion 704Ac2.
The step portion 7104Ac4 is a cut-away portion formed toward the downstream side in the rotational direction K, and is provided in connection with the straight portion 7104Ac3.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 154, the second restriction releasing member 7104B is different from the second restriction releasing member 704B (see part (b) of Figure 150) of the present embodiment which is a base of this modified example, and more particularly the shapes of pair of second restriction releasing portions 7104Ba and 7104Bb are different. The pair of second restriction releasing portions 7104Ba and 7104Bb have symmetric shapes centered on the rotational axis A as in the embodiment, and therefore, the second restriction releasing portion 7104Ba will be described, and the description of the second restriction releasing portion 7104Bb will be omitted.
The second restriction releasing portion 7104Ba comprises a downward surface 7104Ba1, a flat surface 7104Ba2 (upward surface, upward engaging surface, upward push surface), and an abutment surface 7104Ba3. The flat surface 7104Ba2 and the abutment surface 7104Ba3 of this modified example have the shapes similar to those of the flat surface 704Ba2 and the abutment surface 704Ba3 of the second restriction releasing member 704B (see part (b) of Figure 150) of the embodiment. The downward surface 7104Ba1 is substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis A. The pair of cut-away portions 7104Bi and 7104Bj (second guide groove, second slit) of the second restriction releasing member 7104B are the same as the pair of cut-away portions 704Bi and 704Bj, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, referring to Figure 155, the mounting of the toner pack 7120 on the mounting portion 206 in this modified example will be described. Figure 155 is a sectional view illustrating a process of releasing the rotation restricting mechanism 212 when the toner pack 7120 is mounted to the mounting portion 206. Some portions are not shown for the sake of better illustration. Further, the states shown in part (a) of Figure 153 to part (e) of Figure 153 will be described hereinafter as appropriate.
Part (a) of Figure 155 shows a state in which the toner pack 7120 is mounted on the mounting portion 206, and the pushed surface 731a of the advancing/retracting member 731 is in contact with the free end portion 209d70 of the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209. In addition, in this state, the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731 is at the entrance portion 7104Ac1 of the first restriction releasing member 7104A. At this time, the first restriction releasing surface 7104Aa1 of the first restriction releasing member 7104A is at a position upstream of the contact surface 214f of the releasing claw 214e in the rotational direction D. It is preferable that immediately before the pin 731b enters to the inclined portion 7104Ac2 of the first restriction releasing member 7104A, the contact surface 214f of the first restriction releasing surface 7104Aa1 and the releasing claw 214e partially overlap in the rotational axis A direction. Further, the downward surface 7104Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 7104B is at a position on the downstream side, in the rotational direction D, of the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e.
When the toner pack 7120 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this position, the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction D by the same operation as in the embodiment which is the base of this modified example. Then, when the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e rotates until it passes the downstream end portion, in the rotational direction D, of the downward surface 7104Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 7104B, the state becomes as shown in part (b) of Figure 155. In this state, the downward surface 7104Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 7104B is on the upstream side of the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e in the rotational direction D. Further, the first restriction releasing surface 7104Aa1 of the first restriction releasing member 7104A is placed on the same side as or downstream side of the downward surface 7104Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 7104B in the rotational direction D. At this time, the pin 731b is placed on the straight portion 7104Ac3 of the first restriction releasing member 7104A, and therefore, the rotation of the first restriction releasing member 7104A about the rotational axis A relative to the second restriction releasing member 7104B is restricted.
When the toner pack 7120 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this position, the flat surface 7104Ba2 of the second restriction releasing member 7104B passes the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e in the arrow N direction (downward). In addition, at this time, the pin 731b passes the straight portion 7104Ac3 of the first restriction releasing member 7104A in the direction of arrow G (upward) and moves to the step portion 7104Ac4. Since the step portion 7104Ac4 is a cut-away portion toward the downstream side in the rotational direction D, the first restriction releasing member 7104A becomes rotatable in the rotational direction E relative to the second restriction releasing member 7104B. The first restriction releasing surface 7104Aa1 of the first restriction releasing member 7104A is rotated in the rotational direction E by receiving the moment M202 provided by the releasing spring 216 (see Figure 50) from the contact surface 214f of the releasing member 214. The releasing claw 214e also rotates in the rotational direction E, and therefore, the contact surface 214a of the releasing claw 214e becomes in contact with the abutment surface 7104Ba3 of the second restriction releasing member 7104B as shown in part (c) of Figure 155.
Thereafter, the second restriction releasing member 7104B is moved in the arrow G direction, and the releasing claw 214e is moved in the arrow G direction by the same method as in this embodiment. By this, as shown in part (d) of Figure 155, the restricting member 213 is moved in the direction of arrow G (upward) together with the releasing member 214, and the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released. With the above-described operations, the mounting of the toner pack 7120 is completed.
The operation of removing the toner pack 7120 from the mounting portion 206 is the same as that of Embodiment 3, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Modified Example 2)

In, the restriction releasing mechanism 704 of this embodiment, the first restriction releasing member 704A and the advancing/retracting member 731 are separate members. However, the first restriction releasing member 704A and the advancing/retracting member 731 may be parts of one component. In such a case, the first restriction releasing member integrated with the advancing/retracting member is moved in the direction of the rotational axis A together with a rotation about the rotational axis A. Referring to Figures 156 to 158, such a structure will be described in the following as a next modified example.
Referring to Figure 156, the restriction releasing mechanism 7204 in this modified example will be described. Figure 156 is an exploded perspective view of the restriction releasing mechanism 7204.
The restriction releasing mechanism 7204 comprises a first restriction releasing member 7204A, a second restriction releasing member 7204B, and an initialization spring 730.
The first restriction releasing member 7204A has a substantially cylindrical shape including a cylindrical portion 7204Af centered on the rotational axis A (central axis). The cylindrical portion 7204Af is provided with a pair of pins 7204Ah projecting in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A and provided symmetrically with respect to the rotational axis A. The surface of the cylindrical portion 7204Af on the arrow N direction (downward) side is a pushed surface 7204Ai, and there are provided first restriction releasing portions 7204Aa and 7204Ab projecting from the pushed surface 7204Ai in the arrow N direction (downward). The first restriction releasing portion 7204Aa and 7204Ab have the same shapes as the first restriction releasing portion 704Aa and 704Ab, respectively of this embodiment which is a base of this modified example.
The second restriction releasing member 7204B is different from the second restriction releasing member 704B of this embodiment in the shapes of cut-away portions 7204Bi (guide grooves) constituting the pair. The pair of cut-away portions 7204Bi and 7204Bj have symmetric shapes with respect to the rotational axis A similarly to the embodiment, the cut-away portion 7204Bi will be described in this modified example, and the description of the cut-away portion 7204Bj will be omitted.
The cut-away portion 7204Bi comprises an entrance portion 7204B11, an inclined portion 7204Bi2, and a straight portion 7204Bi3. The entrance portion 7204Bi1 is a cut-away portion formed in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided on the end portion 7204Bg on the downstream side, in the rotational direction K, of the abutment surface 7204Ba3 of the second restriction releasing portion 7204Ba. The inclined portion 7204Bi2 is a cut-away portion formed on the downstream side in the rotational direction K and in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided in connection with the entrance portion 7204Bi1. The straight portion 7204Bi3 is a cut-away portion formed substantially parallel to the rotational axis A in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided in connection with the inclined portion 7204Bi2.
Next, the assembling of the restriction releasing mechanism 7204 in this modified example will be described.
The initialization spring 730 is assembled in the direction of arrow U to the second restriction releasing member 7204B. At this time, the end portion of the initialization spring 730 is fixed to the cylindrical portion (see Figure 151) of the second restriction releasing member 7204B, which is not shown, by adhesion or press fitting, as in the embodiment which is a base of this modified example.
The first restriction releasing member 7204A is assembled to the second restriction releasing member 7204B in the direction of arrow U. At this time, the cylindrical portion 7204Af of the first restriction releasing member 7204A is inserted to slide on the inner peripheral surface 7204Be of the second restriction releasing member 7204B, thus it is slidably supported. Further, the pin 7204Ah of the first restriction releasing member 7204A is inserted into the entrance portion 7204Bi1 of the second restriction releasing member 7204B. At this time, the end portion of the initialization spring 730 and the surface on the back side of the pushed surface 7204Ai of the first restriction releasing member 7204A in the direction of the rotational axis A are fixed by adhesive or the like. By this, the first restriction releasing member 7204A is supported by the second restriction releasing member 7204B without disengaging in the direction of the rotational axis A. The means by which the first restriction releasing member 7204A is supported by the second restriction releasing member 7204B may be replaced with a different structure. For example, a retaining portion may be provided which projects inward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A from the inner peripheral surface 7204Be of the second restriction releasing member 7204B to be engaged with the first restriction releasing member 7204A. However, in such a case, it is necessary to provide the retaining portion at a position where the retaining portion does not interfere with the center boss 209d during the mounting operation of the toner pack 7220 which operation will be described hereinafter.
Next, referring to Figure 157, the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 7204 will be described. Figure 157 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 7204. Part (a) of Figure 157 shows a state in which the first restriction releasing member 7204A has moved in the arrow N direction (downward) relative to the second restriction releasing member 7204B, and part (b) of Figure 157 shows a state in which the first restriction releasing member 7204A has moved in the arrow U direction (upward).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 157, when the first restriction releasing member 7204A is placed on the arrow N direction side of (below) the second restriction releasing member 7204B, the pin 7204Ah is at the entrance portion 7204Bi1 the second restriction releasing member 7204B. When a force F720 in the arrow U direction (upward) is applied to the pushed surface 7204Ai in this state, the first restriction releasing member 7204A is moved in the direction of the arrow U (upward) by the force F720 against the spring force of the initialization spring 730 (not shown, see Figure 156). When the first restriction releasing member 7204A is moved in the direction of the arrow U (upward), the pin 7204Ah comes into contact with the inclined portion 7204Bi2 of the second restriction releasing member 7204B. Since the inclined portion 7204Bi2 is inclined toward the downstream side (in the rotational direction K) and in the arrow U direction (upward) as described above, the first restriction releasing member 7204A rotates in the rotational direction K. The first restriction releasing member 7204A rotates in the rotational direction K while moving in the arrow U direction (upward), and therefore, the first restriction releasing portion 7204Aa also moves similarly. When the first restriction releasing member 7204A is further moved in the arrow U direction (upward) from this state, the pin 7204Ah is placed at the straight portion 7204Bi3, so that the rotation of the first restriction releasing member 7204A in the rotational direction K stops. When the first restriction releasing member 7204A is further moved in the arrow U direction (upward) from this state, as shown in Figure 157, the result is that the first restriction releasing member 7204A has moved in the arrow U direction (upward) relative to the second restriction releasing member 7204B.
When the force F720 on the pushed surface 7204Ai of the first restriction releasing member 7204A is removed, the first restriction releasing member 7204A is subjected to the force F722 from the initialization spring 730 (not shown, see Figure 156) to move in the arrow N direction (downward). Then, through the reverse process of the movement of the first restriction releasing member 7204A in the arrow U direction (upward), the first restriction releasing member 7204A shown in part (a) of Figure 157 is moved in the N direction (downward) relative to the second restriction releasing member 7204B.
The foregoing is the operation of the restriction releasing mechanism 7204.
Next, referring to Figure 158, the operation of mounting the toner pack 7220 on the mounting portion 206 in this modified example will be described. Figure 158 is sectional views illustrating a process of releasing the rotation restricting mechanism 212 when the toner pack 7220 is mounted to the mounting portion 206. Some portions are not shown for the sake of better illustration. The states of part (a) of Figure 158 to part (e) of Figure 158 will be described hereinafter as appropriate.
Here, when the toner pack is mounted on the mounting portion, in the basic embodiment, the first restriction releasing member 704A is rotated by the cut-away portion 704Ac being acted on by the pin 731b of the advancing/retracting member 731. On the other hand, in this modified example, the first restriction releasing member 7204A is rotated by the pin 7204Ah acting on the cut-away portion 7204Bc of the second restriction releasing member 7204B. Other operations are the same as in this embodiment. Therefore, only the states shown in part (a) of Figure 158 and part (e) of Figure 158 will be described, and the detailed operation thereof will be omitted. Part (a) of Figure 158 shows a state in which the toner pack 7220 is mounted on the mounting portion 206, and the pushed surface 7204Ai of the first restriction releasing member 7204A is brought into contact with the free end portion 209d70 of the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209. In part (b) of Figure 158, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by the first restriction releasing member 7204A, and the second slope 7204Ba1 of the second restriction releasing portion 7204Ba and the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e are overlapped in the rotational direction D. Part (c) of Figure 158 shows a state in which the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e is rotated in the rotational direction D until it passes the downstream end of the second slope 7204Ba1 of the second restriction releasing member 7204B in the rotational direction D. Part (d) of Figure 158 shows a state in which the contact surface 214a of the releasing claw 214e is in contact with the abutment surface 7204Ba3 of the second restriction releasing portion 7204Ba. In part (e) of Figure 158, the second restriction releasing member 7204B is moved in the arrow G direction, the restricting member 213 is moved in the arrow G direction (upward) together with the releasing member 214, and the restriction of the rotation of the apparatus-side shutter 209 by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 is released.

(Modified Example 3)

In the present embodiment, the first restriction releasing surface 704Aa1 of the first restriction releasing member 704A is structured to abut on the contact surface 214f of the releasing member 214. The first restriction releasing member may be brought into contact with another part of the releasing member 214. In such a case, a structure can be considered in which the first restriction releasing member abuts to the toner pack side end of the releasing member 214 or the releasing claw 214e as an example, referring to Figures 159 to 161 this structure will be described below as a modified example.
Referring to Figure 159 a restriction releasing mechanism 7304 of this modified example will be described. Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the restriction releasing mechanism 7304. The restriction releasing mechanism 7304 of this modified example has different structures in the first restriction releasing member 7304A and the second restriction releasing member 7304B of Modified Example 2 of this embodiment, and therefore, the different part thereof will be described.
The first restriction releasing member 7304A is different from the first restriction releasing member 7204A of Modified Example 2 of this embodiment in the shape of a pair of first restriction releasing portions 7304Aa and 7304Ab. Similarly to Modified Example 2 of this embodiment, the pair of first restriction releasing portions 7304Aa and 7304Ab have shapes symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. Therefore, in this modified example, the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa will be described, and the description of the first restriction releasing portion 7304Ab will be omitted.
The first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa projects from the pushed surface 7304Ai in the direction of the arrow N. A friction member 7304Aa1 is provided at the end on the arrow N direction (lower) side. A material such as silicon rubber is used for the friction member 7304Aa1.
The second restriction releasing member 7304B is different from the second restriction releasing member 7204B of Modified Example 2 of this embodiment in the shapes of the pair of cut-away portions 7304Bi and 7304Bj. The pair of cut-away portions 7304Bi and 7304Bj have symmetric shapes with respect to the rotational axis A as in Modified Example 2 of this embodiment, and therefore, the cut-away portion 7304Bi will be described in this modified example, and the description of the cut-away portion 7304Bj will be omitted.
The cut-away portion 7304Bi comprises an entrance portion 7304Bi1, an inclined portion 7304Bi2, and a straight portion 7304Bi3. The entrance portion 7304Bi1 and the inclined portion 7304Bi2 have structures similar to those of the entrance portions 7204Bi 1 and the inclined portion 7204Bi2 of Modified Example 3 of this embodiment (see Figure 156), and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
The straight portion 7304Bi3 is a cut-away portion formed substantially parallel to the rotational axis A in the direction of the arrow U (upward), and is provided in connection with the inclined portion 7304Bi2. Further, a width of the straight portion 7304Bi3 measured in the rotational direction K is selected to be larger than a width of the second slope 7304Ba1 of the second restriction releasing portion 7304Ba measured in the rotational direction K.
Next, referring to Figures 160 and 161, the operation of mounting the toner pack 7320 on the mounting portion 206 in this modified example will be described. Figure 160 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a process of releasing the rotation restricting mechanism 212 when the toner pack 7320 is mounted to the mounting portion 206. Some portions are not shown for the sake of better illustration. The states of part (a) of Figure 160 to part (e) of Figure 160 will be described hereinafter as appropriate. Figure 161 shows a position of a pin 7304Ah on the straight portion 7304Bi3 when the toner pack 7320 is mounted to the mounting portion 206.
Part (a) of Figure 160 shows a state in which the toner pack 7320 is mounted on the mounting portion 206, and the releasing member 214 is in contact with the friction member 7304Aa1 of the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa. An end of the releasing member 214 in contact with the friction member 7304Aa1 in the arrow G direction (upward direction) is referred to as a contact surface 214e70. At this time, the contact surface 214e70 of the releasing member 214 is in a state of entering the friction member 7304Aa1 of the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa in the direction of arrow G (upward). By this, the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa is in a state that a force F730 is applied to the contact surface 214e70 of the releasing member 214. The force of the initialization spring 730 (not shown, see Figure 159) acts as the force F730. When the toner pack 7320 is further moved in the N direction (downward) of the arrow from this position, the first restriction releasing member 7304A moves relative to the second restriction releasing member 7304B in the direction of arrow G (upward) by the reaction force F732 from the contact surface 214e70 of the releasing member 214. Thus, the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa is rotated in the rotational direction D by the action between the pin 7304Ah of the first restriction releasing member 7304A and the inclined portion 7304Bi2 of the second restriction releasing member 7304B. When the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa rotates in the rotational direction D, a frictional force F731 due to the force F730 is produced on the contact surface 214e70 of the releasing member 214. The releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D by the frictional force F731. When the toner pack 7320 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this state, as shown in part (b) of Figure 160, the second slope 7204Ba1 of the second restriction releasing portion 7204Ba and the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e are overlapped in the rotational direction D. In addition, the pin 7304Ah is at the straight portion 7304Bi3 of the second restriction releasing member 7304B. At this time, as shown in Figure 161, the pin 7304Ah is in the position P70, and the downstream side thereof in the rotational direction D is not restricted by the straight portion 7304Bi3. As shown in part (b) of Figure 160, when the toner pack 7320 is further moved in the arrow N direction (downward) from this state, the second slope 7304Ba1 of the second restriction releasing portion 7304Ba is brought into contact with the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e so that the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction D. At this time, the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa receives a frictional force F734 due to a reaction force F733 from the contact surface 214e70 of the releasing member 214. Since the pin 7304Ah is not restricted from rotating in the rotational direction D as described above, the first restriction releasing member 7304A rotates in the rotational direction D due to the frictional force F734.
When the toner pack 7320 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N (downward) from this state, as shown in part (c) of Figure 160, the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e passes the downstream end of the second slope 7304Ba1 of the second restriction releasing portion 7304Ba in the rotational direction D. At this time, the pin 7304Ah is placed at the position P71 as shown in Figure 161 and is not restricted to the downstream side in the rotational direction E by the straight portion 7304Bi3.
When the toner pack 7320 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N (downward) from this state, as shown in part (d) of Figure 160, the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e passes a flat surface 7304Ba2 of the second restriction releasing portion 7304Ba in the direction of arrow G (upward). Thereafter, the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction E until the contact surface 214a of the releasing claw 214e abuts to the abutment surface 7304Ba3 of the second restriction releasing member 7304B by the moment M202 provided by to the releasing spring 216 (not shown, see Figure 50). At this time, the first restriction releasing portion 7304Aa receives a frictional force F736 due to the reaction force F735 from the contact surface 214e70 of the releasing member 214. Since the pin 7304Ah is not restricted from rotating in the rotational direction E as described above, the first restriction releasing member 7304A rotates in the rotational direction E by the frictional force F736. Then, as shown in Figure 161, the pin 7304Ah moves to the position P72 on the downstream side, in the rotational direction E, of the position P71.
Thereafter, by moving the second restriction releasing member 7304B in the arrow G direction as in the basic embodiment of this modified example, the restricting member 213 is moved together with the releasing member 214 in the arrow G direction (upward), and as shown in part (d) of Figure 160, the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released.
The operation of removing the toner pack 7320 from the mounting portion 206 is the same as that of Embodiment 3, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to Figures 162 to 175, Embodiment 8 will be described in the following. As compared with the restriction releasing portion of Embodiment 3, this embodiment is different in that the first slope and the second slope of the restriction releasing member are equidistant in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. In addition, the second slope is movable between a first position the same as the radial position of the first slope in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, and a second position radially outside the radial direction r relative to the first slope. The description of the same points as in the above-described embodiment will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members described in Embodiments 2 and 3 are assigned the same names as those of the members of Embodiments 2 and 3, and only the points different from Embodiment 3 will be described.

(Toner pack structure)

Referring to Figures 162 to 165, a toner pack 820 according to this embodiment will be described. Figure 162 is an illustration showing the entire toner pack 820 in this embodiment. Figure 163 is an exploded perspective view of a restriction releasing member 804 and a shaft ring 335 before being assembled to a nozzle 302, and is a view as seen from a second end side (nozzle side) in a first direction D1. Figure 164 is illustrations showing a detailed shape of the restriction releasing member 804. Part (a) of Figure 164 is a view as seen from an orthogonal direction of the first direction D1. Part (b) of Figure 164 is a view as seen from a second end side (nozzle side) in the first direction D1. Part (c) of Figure 164 is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the shape of a pushed surface 804a7 of the restriction releasing member 804. Figure 165 is sectional views of the restriction releasing member 804. Part (a) of Figure 165 is a sectional view taken along a line X802-X802 shown in part (b) of Figure 164, which is a sectional view taken along the cutting line passing through the rotating axis A and the pushed surface 804a7 in the direction of the rotating axis A (central axis). Part (b) of Figure 165 is a sectional view taken along a line X803-X803 shown in part (b) of Figure 164, which is a sectional view taken along a cutting line passing through the pushed surface 804a7 in a direction perpendicular to the cutting line X802-X802.
As shown in Figure 162, the toner pack 820 in this embodiment comprises an accommodating portion 201 for accommodating toner, a nozzle 302, and a pack-side shutter 203, and in addition, a restriction releasing member 804 (projecting portion, protruding portion) partially projecting from an end surface 203c of the pack-side shutter 203 in an arrow N direction.
Next, referring to Figures 163 to 165, the restriction releasing member 804 will be described.
As shown in Figure 163, the restriction releasing member 804 has a cylindrical shape centered on the rotational axis A and including a cylindrical portion 804c. A disk-shaped end portion 804f is provided at the end of the cylindrical portion 804c in the arrow U direction (upward direction) with the rotational axis A as the center. The end portion 804f is provided with a hole portion 804g centered on the rotational axis A. In addition, the cylindrical portion 804c is provided with a pair of projections 804d projecting outward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The projections 804d constituting the pair have shapes which are 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. The end of the cylindrical portion 804c in the arrow N direction (downward) is referred to as an end portion 804e, then, the end portion 804e is provided with a pair of restriction releasing portions 804a (first projection) and 804b (second projection) projecting in the arrow N direction (downward). The pair of restriction releasing portions 804a and 804b have shapes which are 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A. In addition, in the state where the restriction releasing member 804 which will be described hereinafter is assembled to the nozzle 302, such a restriction releasing portion of the pair of restriction releasing portions 804a and 804b as is closer to the opening 302a of the nozzle 302 in the circumferential direction of the imaginary circle VC is referred to as the restriction releasing portion 804a.
Next, referring to Figures 164 and 165, the detailed shapes of the pair of restriction releasing portions 804a and 804b will be described. However, since the paired restriction releasing portions 804a and 804b have shapes which are 180-degree rotationally symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A as described above, only the restriction releasing portion 804a will be described in detail, and the description of the restriction releasing portion 804b will be omitted.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 164, the restriction releasing portion 804a is divided into an upstream side portion and a downstream side portion in the rotational direction K by a slit 804a6 extending in the arrow N direction (downward) from the end portion 804e. An upstream portion in the rotational direction K is referred to as an upstream restriction releasing portion 804a9, and a portion downstream in the rotational direction K is referred to as a downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10.
The upstream restriction releasing portion 804a9 comprises a first slope 804a1 (first downward surface, first downward guide surface, first downward force applying surface, first downward push surface) and a first abutment surface 804a12.
The first slope 804a1 is provided on the downstream side in the rotational direction K of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 804a9 and at the end portion in the arrow N direction (downward). The first slope 804a1 is a surface extending so as to go in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the rotational direction K (first rotational direction) and is a surface facing the arrow N direction (downward).
The first abutment surface 804a12 is a surface parallel to the rotational axis A, and is provided at the downstream end portion of the first slope 804a1 in the rotational direction K. The first abutment surface 804a12 is a surface extending in the direction of the rotational axis A.
The downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 comprises a second slope 804a2 (second downward surface, second downward guide surface, second force applying surface, second push surface), a flat surface 804a3 (upward surface, upward engaging surface, upward push surface, upward force applying surface), a second abutment surface 804a4, and a deformed portion 804a5, and in addition, the pushed surface 804a7 and a projection 804a8 shown in part (b) of Figure 164.
The second slope 804a2 is provided at the end of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 in the direction of the arrow N (downward). The second slope 804a2 is a surface extending so as to go in the arrow U direction (upward) as goes in the rotational direction K, and is a surface facing the arrow N direction (downward). In addition, the second slope 804a2 and the first slope 804a1 are provided so as to be equidistant in the radial direction r (see part (b) of Figure 164) of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. In other words, the second slope 804a2 and the first slope 804a1 is provided so as to be at the same position in the radial direction r (part (b) of Figure 164). That is, the second slope 804a2 and the first slope 804a1 are provided in the same distant region in the radial direction r from the rotational axis A. Although the second slope 804a2 in this embodiment is shown in the Figure as being flush with the first slope 804a1, at lease a part of it may be off-set in the arrow N direction (downward) or the arrow U direction (upper side) with respect to the first slope 804a1.
The flat surface 804a3 is a surface perpendicular to the rotational axis A and facing in the arrow U direction (upward). In addition, the flat surface 804a3 is placed on the arrow U direction side of (above) at least a part of the second slope 804a2.
The second abutment surface 804a4 is on the upstream side of the flat surface 804a3 in the rotational direction K, extends in the arrow U direction (upward) from the flat surface 804a3 to the end portion 804e, and faces the downstream side in the rotational direction K.
The deformed portion 804a5 is a portion of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 from the end portion 804e to the flat surface 804a3 in the rotational axis A direction.
As shown in part (c) of Figure 164, the pushed surface 804a7 is on the upstream side of at least a part of the second slope 804a2 in the rotational direction K and inside thereof in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis. As shown in part (a) of Figure 165, the pushed surface 804a7 extends so as to go inward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A as goes in the arrow U direction (upward) and is inclined so as to go in the direction of arrow N (downward) as goes toward the downstream side in the rotational direction K, as shown in part (b) of Figure 165.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 165, the projection 804a8 projects from the inner peripheral surface 804a1 1 inward in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, and is provided on the deformed portion 804a5. In addition, the end surface of the projection 804a8 in the arrow N direction (lower surface) is a surface so as to go radially inward of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A as goes in the direction of the arrow U (upward).

(Assembling of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figures 163 and 166, the assembling of the toner pack 820 in this embodiment will be described. Figure 166 is a sectional view of the toner pack 820 taken along a line X801-X801 shown in Figure 162, which is along the pin 310 with the rotational axis A as the center. The pack-side seal 205 (see Figure 56) is not shown.
As shown in Figure 163, in the toner pack 820, the shaft ring 334 is assembled to the shaft member 331 by the same assembling method as in Embodiment 3. Thereafter, the hole portion 804g of the restriction releasing member 804 is fitted on the small diameter shaft portion 331c of the shaft member 331 in the direction of the arrow U (upward). At this time, the cylindrical portion 804c of the restriction releasing member 804 is inserted into the cylindrical support portion 302b of the nozzle 302. In addition, the projection 804d of the restriction releasing member 804 is inserted into the cut-away portion 302c of the nozzle 302. By engaging the projection 804d of the restriction releasing member 804 with the cut-away portion 302c, the restriction releasing member 804 is restricted in the movement around the rotational axis A relative to the nozzle 302. Therefore, the restriction releasing member 804 is supported movably only in the direction of the rotational axis A relative to the nozzle 302. Thereafter, in the toner pack 820, the shaft ring 335 is assembled to the small diameter shaft portion 331c of the shaft member 331 by the same assembly method as in Embodiment 3.
Here, as shown in Figure 166, the hole through which the restriction releasing member 804 of the end surface 203c of the pack side shutter 203 passes is referred to as the hole portion 203c80. At this time, in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, a radius R81 of the hole portion 203c80 of the pack side shutter 203 is larger than a maximum radius R80 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 of the restriction releasing member 804. This prevents interference when the second slope 804a2 of the restriction releasing member 804 moves from the first position to the second position outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A, as will be described hereinafter.

(Operation of restriction releasing member)

Referring to part (b) of Figure 164, the operation of the restriction releasing member 804 will be described.
In the initial state, the restriction releasing portion 804a is placed at the first position where the second slope 804a2 is equally distant with the first slope 804a1 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. From this state, the deformed portion 804a5 is deformed by applying a force in the radial direction r to the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10. By this, as shown by the broken line in the Figure, the second slope 804a2 of the restriction releasing portion 804a moves to the second position outside the first slope 804a1 in the radial direction r. The details of the force applied to the restriction releasing portion 804a will be described in the description of mounting/dismounting the toner pack. That is, the second slope 804a2 is movable between the first position at the same position as the first slope 804a1 in the radial direction r and the second position outside the first slope 804a1 in the radial direction r. The second slope 804a2 is in the first position when the toner pack 820 is not mounted on the mounting portion 206.
When the force applied to the restriction releasing portion 804a is removed, the deformed portion 804a5 is restored the deformed state. Then, the second slope 804a2 shown by the solid line in the Figure moves to the first position which is equally distant, in the radial direction r, as the first slope 804a1.

(Mounting and dismounting of toner pack)

Next, referring to Figures 167 to 172, mounting/dismounting of the toner pack 820 to/from the mounting portion 206 will be described. In the mounting/dismounting operation, only the operation different from that of Embodiment 3 will be described. Figure 167 to 172 show a process in which the restriction releasing member 804 releases the rotation restricting mechanism 212 when the toner pack 820 is mounted to the mounting portion 206. The pack-side shutter 203 is not shown for the sake of better illustration. The detailed states of Figures 167 to 172 will be appropriately described together with the description of the operation. Part (b) of Figure 168 shows a sectional view taken along a line X804-X804 of part (a) of Figure 168. Part (c) of Figure 168 shows a sectional view taken along a line X809-X809 of part (b) of Figure 168. Part (b) of Figure 169 is a sectional view taken along a line X806-X806 of part (a) of Figure 169, part (b) of Figure 170 is a sectional view taken along a line of X805-X805 of part (a) of Figure 170, and part (b) of Figure 171 is a sectional view taken along a line an X808-X808 of part (a) of Figure 171.
First, when the toner pack 820 is mounted on the mounting portion 206, the second slope 804a2 of the restriction releasing member 804 is in the first position in a situation that the restriction releasing member 804 is not in contact with the restriction releasing member 214 of the mounting portion 206. Figure 167 shows a state in which the toner pack 820 is moved in the N direction (downward) of the arrow, and the first slope 804a1 of the restriction releasing portion 804a and the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing claw 214e are in contact with each other. At this time, the slit 804a6 of the restriction releasing portion 804a is placed on the downstream side, in the rotational direction D, of the eave portion 210n of the cover 210. When the toner pack 820 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N from this stage, the releasing member 214 is rotated in the rotational direction D (first rotational direction) against the urging force of the releasing spring 216 (not shown) by the first guided surface 214e1 being pressed against the first slope 804a1, as in Embodiment 3.
Here, at least a part of the pushed surface 804a7 is placed at the position on the arrow U direction side (upper side) with respect to the first slope 804a1 and the second slope 804a2 (see part (a) of Figure 165). In addition, there is a space S80 in the direction of the arrow N (downward) of the pushed surface 804a7 (see part (a) of Figure 165). Further, the end portion of the releasing claw 214e in the arrow G direction (upward direction) and the downstream end portion in the rotational direction D are referred to as the push surface 214e80. When the toner pack 820 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N from this state, the first guided surface 214e1 of the releasing claw 214e passes the downstream end in the rotational direction D of the first slope 804a1 of the restriction releasing portion 804a. Thereafter, the releasing claw 214e enters the space S80 (see part (b) of Figure 168). At this time, as shown in Figure 168, the push surface 214e80 of the releasing claw 214e and the pushed surface 804a7 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 are in contact with each other. In this state, since the releasing claw 214e is not in contact with the first slope 804a1 and the second slope 804a2 of the restriction releasing portion 804a, it is not rotated any more in the rotational direction D. At this time, as in Embodiment 3, the releasing member 214 of the releasing claw 214e is rotated in the rotational direction E by the urging force of the releasing spring 216 (not shown). Then, as the releasing member 214 rotates in the rotational direction E, the contact surface 214f abuts to the first abutment surface 804a12 of the restriction releasing portion 804a in the rotational direction E.
When the toner pack 820 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N from this state, the pushed surface 804a7 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 receives a force F800 perpendicular to the pushed surface 804a7 from the push surface 214e80 of the releasing claw 214e. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 168, the force F800 received by the pushed surface 804a7 from the push surface 214e80 of the releasing claw 214e includes a component in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. Therefore, the force F800 elastically deforms the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 in the direction toward the outside in the radial direction r. Further, as shown in part (c) of Figure 168, the force F800 received by the pushed surface 804a7 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 from the push surface 214e80 of the releasing claw 214e includes a rotational direction D component. On the other hand, a reaction force F801 produced on the push surface 214e80 of the releasing claw 214e includes the rotational direction E component. The reaction force F801 causes the releasing claw 214e to bring the contact surface 214f into contact with the first abutment surface 804a12 of the restriction releasing portion 804a. Therefore, the releasing claw 214e is in a state where the rotation is restricted in the rotational direction D.
When the toner pack 820 is further moved in the direction of arrow N from this position, the deformed portion 804a5 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 shown in part (b) of Figure 168 is deformed toward the outside of the radial direction r by the force F800. By this, the second slope 804a2 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 moves from the first position to the second position.
When the toner pack 820 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N (downward) from this state, as shown in part (a) of Figure 169, the second slope 804a2 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 moved to the second position and the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e are brought into contact with each other. In this state, as shown in part (b) of Figure 169, the inner peripheral surface 804a11 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 is in contact with the releasing claw 214e. This is because the contact point between the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 and the releasing claw 214e moves from the pushed surface 804a7 to the inner peripheral surface 804a1 1 as the toner pack 820 moves in the direction of the arrow N (downward). By this, the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 receives the force F802 including the radial r component. The downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 maintains the deformation of the deformed portion 804a5 in the radial direction r by the force F802 from the releasing claw 214e. Therefore, the second slope 804a2 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 is maintained at the second position. Further, since the releasing claw 214e is released from the contact between the push surface 214e80 and the pushed surface 804a7 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 (see part (c) of Figure 168), the releasing claw 214e can move in the rotational direction D.
When the toner pack 820 is further moved in the direction of the arrow N from the state of part (a) of Figure 169, the releasing claw 214e of the releasing member 214 is pressed to the second slope 804a2 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10, similarly to Embodiment 3. By the releasing claw 214e being pressed, the releasing member 214 moves in the rotational direction D against the urging force of the releasing spring 216 (not shown). Then, as shown in part (a) of Figure 170, the second guided surface 214e2 of the releasing claw 214e passes the downstream end of the second slope 804a2 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 in the rotational direction D. In addition, the releasing claw 214e is completely on the downstream side, in the rotational direction D, of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 170, in the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10, the projection 804a8 provided on the inner peripheral surface 804a1 1 abuts on the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209 in the radial direction r. By this, even if the contact state between the inner peripheral surface 804a11 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 and the releasing claw 214e (not shown) in the radial direction r is lost, the deformation of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 is maintained. For this reason, the second slope 804a2 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 maintains the second position.
When the toner pack 820 is further moved in the arrow N direction from the state shown in part (a) of Figure 170, the third guided surface 214e3 of the releasing claw 214e passes the flat surface 804a3 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 in the arrow N direction (downward). And, the releasing claw 214e rotates in the rotational direction E (second rotational direction) by the moment M202 (urging force) produced by the releasing spring 216 (not shown). Then, as shown in part (a) of Figure 171, the contact surface 214a of the releasing claw 214e is in contact with the second abutment surface 804a4 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 171, the projection 804a8 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 maintains the contact state with the center boss 209d of the apparatus-side shutter 209. By this, the deformed portion 804a5 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 is maintained in the radial direction r. Therefore, the second slope 804a2 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 maintains the second position. In addition, the flat surface 804a3 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 is also placed at the second position in the radial direction r. By this, the surface of the releasing claw 214e connected to the downstream end of the third guided surface 214e3 in the rotational direction K is referred to as the lower surface 214e81 (see also part (a) of Figure 171), and the flat surface 804a3 of the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 and the lower surface 214e81 become able to face each other.
Thereafter, the operation is the same as that of Embodiment 3, and therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but by operating the operating member 330 (see Figure 104), the restriction releasing member 804 is moved in the direction of the arrow G, and the releasing claw 214e is moved in the direction of arrow G. That is, the flat surface 804a3 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 functions as a force applying surface for applying a force for lifting the releasing member 214 upward to the lower surface 214e81 of the releasing claw 214e. By this, as shown in Figure 172, the restricting member 213 is moved in the direction of arrow G (upward) together with the releasing member 214, and the rotation restriction by the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 is released. By the above-described operation, the toner pack 820 mounting is completed.
Further, the operation of removing the toner pack 820 from the mounting portion 206 is the same as that of Embodiment 3, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. When the removal of the toner pack 820 is completed, the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 is restored from the deformed state, and the second slope 804a2 is in a state of being moved to the first position.

(Modified Example 1)

In this embodiment, the upstream restriction releasing portions 804a9, 804b9 and the downstream restriction releasing portions 804a10, 804b10 of the restriction releasing member 804 are parts of one member and are separated by slits 804a6 and 804b6. However, the present invention is not limited to such an example, and the upstream side restriction releasing portion 804a9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10, 804b10 may be separate members. In this case, a structure in which the downstream restriction releasing portion having the deformable portion is a separate portion can be considered as an example. Referring to Figure 173, this structure will be described below as a modified example.
Figure 173 is a perspective view of the restriction releasing member 8104 in this modified example, (a) thereof shows an assembled state, and (b) thereof shows a disassembled state. As shown in part (a) of Figure 173, in the restriction releasing member 8104 in this modified example, a first restriction releasing member 8104Ba including a downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ba10 a second restriction releasing member 8104Bb including a downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Bb10 are connected with a main assembly member 8104A including upstream restriction releasing portions 8104Aa9 and 8104Ab9. As shown in part (b) of Figure 173, the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba is provided with an engaging portion 8104Ba20 on the arrow U direction side (thereabove). Similarly, the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb is provided with an engaging portion 8104Bb20 on the arrow U direction side (thereabove). The engaging portion 8104Ba20 of the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba and the engaging portion 8104Bb20 of the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb are engaged with the groove portion 8104Ac provided in the main assembly member 8104A and fixed by means such as adhesion or press fitting.
Here, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Aa9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ba10, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ab9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Bb 10 are symmetric with respect to the rotational axis A (central axis). Therefore, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Aa9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ba10 will be described, and the description of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ab9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Bb10 will be omitted.
The upstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Aa9 has a first abutment surface 8104Aa12 as in this embodiment which is a base embodiment of this modified example. The other structures of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Aa9 are the same as those in this embodiment, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
The downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ba10 has a second slope 8104Ba2 and a deformed portion 8104Ba5 as in the base embodiment, and the second slope 8104Ba2 can be moved to the first position and the second position as in the base embodiment.
Further, in a state in which the second slope 8104Ba2 is in the first position, an end surface of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ba10 facing the first abutment surface 8104Aa12 of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Aa9 in the rotational direction K is the end surface 8104Ba13. The other structures of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8104Ba10 are the same as those in the base embodiment, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
In a state where the second slope 8104Ba2 is in the first position, the first abutment surface 8104Aa12 and the end surface 8104Ba13 are in contact with each other. That is, there is no gap corresponding to the slit of the base embodiment.
The above-described structure is peculiar to this modified example, and other structures are the same as those of the above-described embodiment.
Therefore, the description of the operation of the second slope 8104Ba2 moving from the first position to the second position and the description of the mounting/dismounting of the toner pack 820 with the movement of the toner pack 820 in the arrow N direction are omitted.
In this modified example, materials different from that of the main assembly member 8104A can be applied to the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba and the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb as compared with the base embodiment. It is possible that a material having high rigidity is used for the main assembly member 8104A, and a material having toughness and having advantages for elastic deformation is used for the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba and the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb.
As compared with the base embodiment of this modified example, this modified example has no slit (gap) between the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba and the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb and the main assembly member 8104A in the rotational direction K. That is, in the state that the second slopes 8104Ba2 and 8104Bb2 in the first position, the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba and the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb are supported by the main assembly member 8104A.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of damage when an unexpected external force is applied to the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba and the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb inadvertently by the user. In addition, the free end positions of the first restriction releasing member 8104Ba and the second restriction releasing member 8104Bb, which are elongated in the rotational axis A direction, can be protected from being displaced, and therefore, the mounting operation is further stabilized.
As for the method of dividing each of the restriction releasing portions, the base embodiment and this modified example may be appropriately selected according to the processing technique to be used.

(Modified Example 2)

In the base embodiment, the upstream restriction releasing portion 804a9 and the downstream restriction releasing portion 804a10 of the restriction releasing member 804 are divided in the rotational direction K by the slit 804a6. However, the present invention is not limited to such an example, and at least parts of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 804a9 and of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 may overlap in the rotational direction K. Referring to Figure 174, such a structure will be described in the following as an example of this modified example.
Figure 174 is a view of a restriction releasing member in this modified example as viewed from a second end side (nozzle side) of a first direction D1, wherein part (a) shows a restriction releasing member 8204 and part (b) shows another structure of the restriction releasing member 82104.
Referring to part (a) of Figure 174, the structure of the restriction releasing member 8204 will be described. In the restriction releasing member 8204, the first end portion 8204a13 on the downstream side in the rotational direction K of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8204a9 and the second end portion 8204a14 on the upstream side in the rotational direction K of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8204a10 overlap in the rotational direction K. In addition, the second end portion 8204a14 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8204a10 is outside the first end portion 8204a13 of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8204a9 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A (central axis). Further, the slit 8204a6 is inclined so as to go in the direction opposite to the radial direction r as goes in the rotational direction K. By this, the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8204a10 can be deformed in the radial direction r.
Referring to part (b) of Figure 174, the structure of the restriction releasing member 82104 will be described. The restriction releasing member 82104 is provided with a first end portion 82104a13 on the downstream side, in the rotational direction K, of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a9, and a first end portion 82104a15 on the upstream side, in the rotational direction K, of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a10. In addition, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a9 has a second end portion 82104a14 recessed toward the upstream side in the rotational direction K, on an outside of the first end portion 82104a13 in the radial direction r. Further, the downstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a10 has a second end portion 82104a16 projecting toward the upstream side in the rotational direction K, on an outside of the first end portion 82104a15 in the radial direction r.
The first end portion 82104a13 of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a9 and the first end portion 82104a15 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a10 are opposed and are close to each other in the rotational direction K. In addition, the second end portion 82104a14 of the upstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a9 and the second end portion 82104a16 of the downstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a10 are opposed and are close to each other in the rotational direction K. By this, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a10 are partially overlapped in the rotational direction K and in the radial direction r. Also in this structure, the downstream side restriction releasing portion 82104a10 can be deformed in the radial direction r.
In this modified example, similarly to Modified Example 1 of the base embodiment, if it is difficult to process the slit, the upstream side restriction releasing portion and the downstream side restriction releasing portion may be made as separate portions.

(Modified Example 3)

In Modified Example 2 of this base embodiment, the upstream side restriction releasing portions 8204a9 and 82104a9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portions 8204a10 and 82104a10 are partly overlapped in the radial direction r and the rotational direction K of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The present invention is not limited to such an example, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 804a9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 804a10 may be structured to overlap the rotational direction K with respect to the direction of the rotational axis A (central axis). Referring to Figure 175, the structure in this case will be described in the following as such a modified example.
Figure 175 is an illustration of a restriction releasing member in this modified example, wherein part (a) shows a restriction releasing member 8304, part (b) show the a restriction releasing member 83104 having a different structure, and part (c) is an another different structure of the restriction releasing member 83204.
Referring to part (a) of Figure 175, the structure of the restriction releasing member 8304 will be described. The slit 8304a6 (consisting of a gap of about 0.2 to 0.5) of the restriction releasing member 8304 goes in the rotational direction K as goes the in the direction of the arrow U (upward). By this, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 8304a9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 8304a10 are structured to overlap with each other in the rotational direction K.
Referring to part (b) of Figure 175, the structure of the restriction releasing member 83104 will be described. The slit 83104a6 (consisting of a gap of about 0.2 to 0.5) of the restriction releasing member 83104 extends so as to go in the rotational direction K as goes in the direction of the arrow N (downward). By this, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 83104a9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 83104a10 are structured to overlap with each other in the rotational direction K.
Referring to part (c) of Figure 175, the structure of the restriction releasing member 83204 will be described. The slit 83204a6 (consisting of a gap of about 0.2 to 0.5) of the restriction releasing member 83204 extends so as to snake upstream and downstream in the rotational direction K as goes in the direction of the arrow U (upward). By this, the upstream side restriction releasing portion 83204a9 and the downstream side restriction releasing portion 83204a10 are structured to overlap with each other in the rotational direction K.
In this modified example, as in Modified Example 1 of this embodiment, if it is difficult to process the slit, the upstream side restriction releasing portion and the downstream side restriction releasing portion may be made as separate portions.

Next, referring to Figures 176 to 182, another structure will be described. The same points as those of the above-described embodiments and modified examples will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the above-mentioned members will be assigned the same names as the above-mentioned members, and only the points different from the above-mentioned members will be described.
In Embodiment 2, the structure of a toner pack in which a projection is provided on the nozzle has been described. In this modified example, a structure in which a projection is provided on a rotatable member which is rotatable relative to the nozzle, not on the nozzle, will be described. This will be described in the following.
Referring to Figures 176, 177, 178, and 179, the structure of a toner pack 920 will be described. Figure 176 is a perspective view of the toner pack 920 having the structure of this embodiment. Figure 177 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack 920. Figure 178 is an exploded perspective view of the nozzle of this embodiment, and part (a) of Figure 178 and part (b) of Figure 178 are exploded perspective views a seen in different directions. Figure 179 is an exploded perspective view of the pack-side shutter of this embodiment, and part (a) of Figure 179 and part (b) of Figure 179 are exploded perspective views as seen in different directions.
As shown in Figures 176 and 177, the toner pack 920 comprises an accommodating portion 901 (first accommodating portion), a connecting ring 930, a shutter portion 903A (rotatable member), an opening seal 931, a first nozzle portion 902A, the second nozzle portion 902B, a shutter seal 922, and a projecting portion unit 903B, in this order from the first end side in the first direction D1. A shutter unit 903 assembled so that the shutter portion 903A and the projecting portion unit 903B are integrated with the nozzle 902 (discharge portion) including the first nozzle portion 902A and the second nozzle portion 902B which are assembled to be integral with each other, is rotatable around the rotational axis A (central axis).
The connecting ring 930 has a generally cylindrical shape coaxial with the rotational axis A, and the accommodating portion 901 is connected to the outer peripheral portion 930b with hermetical sealing. The shutter portion 903A is connected to the connecting ring 930 from the second end portion side in the first direction D1. The connecting ring 930 and the shutter portion 903A are integrally coupled.
As shown in Figure 178, the shutter portion 903A has a generally cylindrical shape coaxial with the rotational axis A, and includes an end surface 903Aa, a cylindrical portion 903Ab, and an end surface 903Ac perpendicular to the rotational axis A and provided on the second end side in the first direction D1, in this order in the first direction D1 from the first end portion side. The shutter portion 903A is provided with a through hole 903Ad penetrating in the first direction D1. The through hole 903Ad has a sector shape centered on the rotational axis A, and the sector angle thereof V90 is at about 75 °. A hollow flat plate-shaped opening seal 931 is mounted to the through hole 903Ad from the second end side in the first direction D1 by adhesion. The opening seal 931 is made of an elastic sponge or the like, and is provided so as to surround the sector-shaped through hole 903Ad.
The end surface 903Aa is provided with a cylindrical recess 903Ag which is substantially coaxial with the rotational axis A recessed toward the second end side in the first direction D1. A surface 903Ah is provided at the bottom portion of the recess 903Ag. The surface 903Ah is a surface inclined toward the second end portion side of the first direction D 1 as goes toward the through hole 903Ad.
In addition, the end surface 903Ac is provided with two-sided recess portions 903Ae coaxial with the rotational axis A and recessed toward the first end portion in the first direction D1. A surface 903Af perpendicular to the rotational axis A is provided at the bottom portion of the recess 903Ae.
As shown in Figure 179, the first nozzle portion 902A has a hollow cylindrical shape coaxial with the rotational axis A, and includes an end surface 902Aa and a first cylindrical portion 902Ah and a disk portion 902Ab having a diameter larger than that of the first cylindrical portion 902Ah and a second cylinder portion 902Ac having a diameter smaller than that of the disk portion 902Ab provided coaxially with the rotational axis A, in this order from the first end side in the first direction D1, and an end surface 902Af is provided on the second end side of the first direction D 1. In addition, the first nozzle portion 902A is provided with a through hole 902Ae coaxial with the rotational axis A. Further, a through hole 902Ad, which is a sector-shaped through hole centered on the rotational axis A is provided. The end surface 902Aa is provided with a cylindrical recess 902Am coaxial with the rotational axis A and recessed toward the second end in the first direction D1, and a surface 902Ak perpendicular to the rotational axis A at the bottom portion of the recess 902Am. In addition, the end surface 902Af is provided with a D-cut recess 902Ag on the first end side in the first direction D1, and the bottom portion of the recess 902Ag is provided with a surface 902An perpendicular to the rotational axis A.
In the second nozzle portion 902B, a hollow outer cylindrical portion 902Ba and an inner cylindrical portion 902Bb which are coaxial with the rotational axis A are connected by an end surface 902Bc placed on the second end side in the first direction D1. On the outer surface of the outer cylindrical portion 902Ba, a recess 902Bj recessed inside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC is provided. The recess 902Bj is structured to engage with the drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208 and the driven transmission portion 209e of the apparatus-side shutter 209, when the toner pack 920 is mounted to the mounting portion 206.
The inner cylindrical portion 902Bb is provided with an end surface 902Be on the first end portion side in the first direction D1. The outer peripheral portion 902Bf of the end surface 902Be has a D-cut shape, is fitted into the recess 902Ag of the first nozzle portion 902A from the second end side in the first direction D1, and the end surface 902Be abuts to the surface 902An of the first nozzle portion 902A, and the second nozzle portion 902B is fixed to the first nozzle portion 902A by adhesive.
The end surface 902Be is provided with a recess 902Bd recessed toward the second end side in the first direction D1. In addition, the side surface portion 902Bh of the inner cylindrical portion 902Bb is provided with a discharge opening 902Bk which is in fluid communication with the recess 902Bd and is directed to the outside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The recess 902Bd is a toner passage leading to the discharge opening 902Bk. A discharge seal 933 is mounted on the side surface portion 902Bh of the second nozzle portion 902B. The discharge seal 933 has a hollow flat plate shape, and is mounted by adhesive along the side surface portion 902Bh so that the through hole portion 933a surrounds the discharge opening 902Bk. The discharge seal 933 is made of an elastic sponge. The recess 902Bj of the outer cylindrical portion 902Ba is provided on the outer surface on the opposite side of the discharge opening 902Bk with the rotational axis A interposed therebetween.
The end surface 902Bc is provided with a first recess portion 902Bg having a cylindrical shape which is coaxial with the rotational axis A and which is recessed toward the first end portion in the first direction D1. In addition, a second recess portion 902Bp having a cylindrical recess shape which has a diameter smaller than that of the first recess portion 902Bg and which is coaxial with the rotational axis A, is provided on the first end side, in the first direction D1, of the first recess portion 902Bg. The first recess portion 902Bg and the second recess portion 902Bp are connected by a surface 902Bn which is a flat surface perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Further, the second nozzle portion 902B is provided with a through hole 902Bm penetrating in the first direction D1 coaxially with the rotational axis A.
As shown in Figure 178, the projecting portion unit 903B has a cylindrical shape, and includes a shaft portion 903Ba, a first cylindrical portion 903Bb having a diameter larger than that of the shaft portion 903Ba, a second cylindrical portion 903Bc having a diameter larger than that of the first cylindrical portion 903Bb, and a cylindrical projecting portion 903Bg (projecting portion, engaging portion) which are coaxial with the rotational axis A, in this order from the first end side in the first direction D1. That is, in this embodiment, the projecting portion 903Bg is provided on the shutter unit 903 (shutter portion 903A), not on the nozzle 902.
The projecting portion 903Bg has the same shape as the projecting portion 202b of Embodiment 2 described above, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
An end surface 903Bf and a two-way shaped two-sided cut portion 903Be are provided on the first end side of the shaft portion 903Ba on the first end side in the first direction D1. The second cylindrical portion 903Bc is provided with an end surface 903Bh perpendicular to the rotational axis A on the first end side in the first direction D1.
A hollow cylindrical shutter seal 922 is fitted on the outer periphery of the first cylindrical portion 903Bb from the first end portion side of the first direction D1. The shutter seal 922 is made of an elastic sponge. The inner diameter of the shutter seal 922 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the first cylindrical portion 903Bb, and therefore, the shutter seal 922 is mounted in close contact therewith, while expanding the inner diameter. Further, the shutter seal 922 is pushed toward the second end portion side in the first direction D1 and is abutted against the end surface 903Bh.
Here, as shown in Figure 177, the first nozzle portion 902A and the second nozzle portion 902B are fixed by adhesive as described above. The shutter portion 903A and the projecting portion unit 903B are mounted, in the first direction D1, to the first nozzle portion 902A and the second nozzle portion 902B fixed to each other.
Specifically, the shaft portion 903Ba of the projecting portion unit 903B penetrates a through hole 902m (see Figure 182) of the second nozzle portion 902B and the through hole 902Ae of the first nozzle portion 902A from the second end side in the first direction D1. Thereafter, the two-sided cut portion 903Be of the projecting portion unit 903B is fitted into the recess 903Ae of the shutter portion 903A, and the end surface 903Bf abuts to the surface 903Af (see Figure 182) and is fixed by adhesive. In addition, at this time, the shutter seal 922 mounted on the projecting portion unit 903B is pushed into the first recess portion 902Bg of the second nozzle portion 902B from the second end side in the first direction D1 (see Figure 182). Here, the outer diameter of the shutter seal 922 is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the first recess portion 902Bg of the second nozzle portion 902B, and the shutter seal 922 is closely mounted while being packed at the outer diameter portion. In addition, the shutter seal 922 is mounted so as to be abutted against the surface 902Bn of the second nozzle portion 902B and packed in the first direction D1.
Further, the opening seal 931 (see Figure 178) mounted to the shutter portion 903A is compressed between in the first direction between the end surface 903Ac of the shutter portion 903A and the surface 902Ak of the first nozzle portion 902A (see Figure 179), and therefore is mounted without gap.

(Mounting operation)

Next, referring to Figures 180, 181 and 182, the mounting to the image forming apparatus 1 will be described in the following. The operation of the mounting portion 206 in the mounting is the same as that of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
Figure 180 is a top view and a side view illustrating a state in which the toner pack 920 is mounted on the mounting portion 206. Part (a) of Figure 180 and part (b) of Figure 180 are top views in a state in which the toner pack 920 is mounted and a state in which toner is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32, respectively. Part (c) of Figure 180 and part (d) of Figure 180 are side views in a state in which the toner pack 920 is mounted and a state in which toner is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32, respectively.
Figure 181 and Figure 182 are cross-sectional views showing each cross-section along the sectional line shown in Figure 180.
Part (a) of Figure 181, part (b) of Figure 181, part (c) of Figure 181, and part (d) of Figure 181 are cross-sectional views taken along a line X901-X901, a cross-sectional view taken along a line X903-X903, a cross-sectional view taken along a line X902-X902, and a cross-sectional view taken along a line X904-X904 in Figure 180, respectively. Part (a) of Figure 182 and part (b) of Figure 182 are a sectional view taken along a line X905-X905 and a sectional view taken along a line X906-X906 in Figure 180.
As shown in Figure 180, the toner pack 920 is mounted on the mounting portion 206 in the same manner as in Embodiment 2. At this time, as shown in part (c) of Figure 181, the discharge seal 933 mounted to the second nozzle portion 902B is mounted while being packed by the cover 210 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC.
At this time, as shown in part (a) of Figure 181, the through hole 903Ad of the shutter portion 903A and the through hole 902Ad of the first nozzle portion 902A are placed at positions deviated from each other in the rotational direction about the rotational axis A. Here, as shown in part (a) of Figure 182, an opening seal 931 is mounted to the second end side of the first direction D1 of the through hole 903Ad of the shutter portion 903A, and the toner in the through hole 903Ad prevented from leaking, by the shutter portion 903A, an opening seal 931 and a first nozzle portion 902A.
As shown in Figure 181, after the toner pack 920 is mounted on the mounting portion 206, the user rotates the operating lever 208 in the arrow D direction as in Embodiment 2.
At this time, the first nozzle portion 902A and the second nozzle portion 902B rotate integrally with each other with the operating lever 208 in the same manner as the pack side shutter 203 of Embodiment 2. This is because the recess 902Bj of the second nozzle portion 902B of the nozzle 902 engages with the drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208 and the driven transmission portion 209e of the apparatus-side shutter 209.
By the rotation of the first nozzle portion 902A and the second nozzle portion 902B, as shown in part (b) of Figure 181, the through hole 903Ad of the shutter portion 903A and the through hole 902Ad of the first nozzle portion 902A become opposed. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 182, the toner of the toner pack 920 slides down the surface 903Ah, passes through the through hole 903Ad of the shutter portion 903A, passes through the inside of the opening seal 931, passes through the through hole 902Ad of the first nozzle portion 902A, and flows into the recess 902Bd of the second nozzle portion 902B.
At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 182, an opening seal 931 is mounted to the second end side of the first direction D 1 of the through hole 903Ad of the shutter portion 903A so as to surround the through hole 902Ad of the first nozzle portion 902A. Therefore, the toner flowing in from the through hole 903Ad of the shutter portion 903A is prevented from leaking, by the opening seal 931 and does not flow out to other than the through hole 902Ad.
Further, as shown in part (d) of Figure 181, as the operating lever 208 rotates, the discharge seal 933 mounted to the second nozzle portion 902B also rotates and moves in the arrow D direction together with the second nozzle portion 902B, so that the discharge opening 902Bk moves to a position facing the receiving opening 209a of the apparatus-side shutter 209. At this time, the discharge seal 933 is in a state of being compressed to the receiving opening 209a in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. Therefore, the discharge seal 933 seals between the discharge opening 902Bk of the second nozzle portion 902B and the receiving opening 209a of the apparatus-side shutter 209, and the toner is prevented from leaking thereby.
Further, as shown in part (d) of Figure 182, even when toner flows through the slight gap between the through hole 902m of the second nozzle portion 902B and the shaft portion 903Ba of the projecting portion unit 903B along the shaft portion 903Ba toward the second end portion side, the toner does not flow out to the outside of 920 in the first direction D1, because the shutter seal 922 seals between the second nozzle portion 902B and the projecting portion unit 903B in a compressed state.
Thus, the toner in the accommodating portion 901 is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32 through the discharge opening 902Bk of the second nozzle portion 902B as in Embodiment 2.
In addition, after the toner replenishment is finished, the operating lever 208 is rotated in the direction of arrow E in the same manner as in Embodiment 2, by which the toner pack 920 becomes able to be removed from the main assembly of the apparatus, but it is the same as that described above, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
As described foregoing, in the toner pack 920 of this embodiment, the projection 903Bg is provided on the shutter unit 903 which is structured to be rotatable relative to the nozzle 902.
In this embodiment, the opening seal 931 seals between the shutter portion 903A and the first nozzle portion 902A, but as described above, it is also possible to employ a structure in which the toner seal provided at the nozzle opening is broken or pulled out.
Further, in this embodiment, since the toner pack 920 does not seal the discharge opening 902Bk after finishing the toner replenishment, it is conceivable that the deposited toner may flow out from the discharge opening 902Bk.
Therefore, an adhesive seal (not shown) which closes the discharge opening 902Bk after use by the user may be mounted.

Next, referring to Figures 183 to 191, another structure will be described. The same points as those of the above-described embodiments and modified examples will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the above-mentioned members will be assigned the same names as the above-mentioned members, and only the points different from the above-mentioned members will be described.
In the structure shown in Embodiment 2, the projecting portion 202b is provided at the nozzle 202, but it is also possible to provide the projection on the rotatable member which is rotatable relative to the accommodating portion 201 and the nozzle 202. Hereinafter, a structure in which a projecting portion is provided on the rotatable member will be described.
Referring to Figures 183, 184, 185, and 186, the structure of the toner pack 10020 will be described. Figure 183 is a perspective view of a toner pack 10020 of this embodiment. Figure 184 is an exploded perspective view of the toner pack 10020. Figure 185 is exploded views of the nozzle of this embodiment, in which part (a) of Figure 185 and part (b) of Figure 185 are exploded perspective views as seen in different directions, part (c) of Figure 185 is a side view, and part (d) of Figure 185 is a sectional view taken along a line X1001-X1001 in part (c) of Figure 185. Figure 186 is an exploded perspective view of the pack-side shutter in this embodiment, and part (a) of Figure 186 and part (b) of Figure 186 are exploded perspective views as seen in different directions.
As shown in Figure 184, the toner pack 10020 includes an accommodating portion 201 (first accommodating portion), a first nozzle portion 1002A, a second nozzle portion 1002B, a shutter 1003 and a screw 1030, in this order from the side of the first end portion in the first direction D 1.
As shown in Figure 185, the first nozzle portion 1002A has a cylindrical shape coaxial with the rotational axis A (central axis), and includes a first cylindrical portion 1002Aa a disk portion 1002Ab having a diameter larger than that of the first cylindrical portion 1002Aa, a second cylindrical portion 1002Ad having a diameter smaller than that of the disk portion 1002Ab (see part (d) of Figure 185), in this order from the first end portion side in the first direction D1. Inside the second cylindrical portion 1002Ad, a through hole 1002Af coaxial with the rotational axis A is provided.
The disk portion 1002Ab is provided with a third cylindrical portion 1002Ac which projects toward the second end portion in the first direction D1 and has a diameter larger than that of the second cylindrical portion 1002Ad, coaxially with the rotational axis A. The third cylindrical portion 1002Ac projects beyond the second cylindrical portion 1002Ad toward the second end portion in the first direction D1.
In addition, the disk portion 1002Ab is provided with a fourth cylindrical portion 1002Ag, which projects toward the second end portion in the first direction D 1 and has a diameter larger than that of the third cylindrical portion 1002Ac, coaxially with the rotational axis A.
A D-cut portion 1002Ak is provided on the first end portion side in the first direction D1 inside the third cylindrical portion 1002Ac. Inside the first cylindrical portion 1002Aa, a slope 1002Ah inclined toward the through hole 1002Af is provided so as to approach the rotational axis A toward the second end portion side in the first direction D1. In the first nozzle portion 1002A, the first cylindrical portion 1002Aa is integrally coupled with the accommodating portion 201 (see Figure 184).
As shown in part (a) of Figure 185 and part (b) of Figure 185 , in the second nozzle portion 1002B, the outer cylindrical portion 1002Ba and the inner cylindrical portion 1002Bb coaxial with the rotational axis A are connected at an end surface 1002Bc placed on the second end portion side in the first direction D1. The inner cylindrical portion 1002Bb has a cylindrical shape, and as shown in part (d) of Figure 185, It is provided with a partition plate 1002Bn so as to partition the inside of the cylindrical portion perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Here, a cylindrical recess on the first end portion side in the first direction D1 partitioned by the partition plate 1002Bn is referred to as a recess 1002Bf, and a cylindrical recess on the second end portion is referred to as a recess 1002Bg. The outer peripheral surface 1002Bd of the inner cylindrical portion 1002Bb is provided with a discharge opening 1002Be (opening) which communicates with the recess 1002Bf. On the second end portals the of the partition plate 1002Bn in the first direction D1, a screw hole portion 1002Bh recessed toward the first end portion side in the first direction D1 is provided coaxially with the rotational axis A. A D-cut portion 1002Bk and an end surface 1002Bm are provided on the outer diameter portion on the first end portion side of the inner cylindrical portion 1002Bb in the first direction D1. On the outer surface of the outer cylindrical portion 1002Ba, a recess 1002Bj recessed inside in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC is provided. The recess 1002Bj is structured to engage the drive transmission portion 208a of the operating lever 208 and the driven transmission portion 209e of the apparatus-side shutter 209 when the toner pack 10020 is mounted to the mounting portion 206.
The D-cut portion 1002Bk of the second nozzle portion 1002B is fitted into the D-cut portion 1002Ak of the first nozzle portion 1002A from the second end portion side in the first direction D1. Then, in a state that the end surface 1002Bm abuts on the disk portion 1002Ab, the second nozzle portion 1002B is integrally bonded to the first nozzle portion 1002A by adhesive or the like.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 186, the shutter 1003 has a cylindrical shape and includes, a cylindrical portion 1003a and a projecting portion 1003b (projection portion, engagement) in this order from the first end portion side in the first direction D1, coaxially with the rotational axis A. The projecting portion 1003b has the same shape as the projecting portion 202b of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. A through hole 1003c is provided coaxially with the rotational axis A in the cylindrical portion 1003a. A semi-cylindrical shutter portion 1003d (rotatable member) is provided coaxially with the rotational axis A on the outside of the cylindrical portion 1003a. The shutter portion 1003d of the shutter 1003 is rotatable relative to the second nozzle portion 1002B between an open position for opening the discharge opening 1002Be (opening) provided in the outer peripheral surface 1002Bd of the second nozzle portion 1002B and a shielding position for shielding the discharge opening 1002Be (opening). As shown in part (b) of Figure 186, the shutter portion 1003d and the cylindrical portion 1003a are connected by an end surface 1003e placed on the second end portion side of the shutter portion 1003d in the first direction D1. The shutter portion 1003d is provided with a through hole 1003f which penetrates in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A.
The first discharge seal 1031 is mounted to the shutter portion 1003d of the shutter 1003 from the opposite side in the radial direction r. The first discharge seal 1031 has a flat plate shape having a through hole 1031a, and is formed of an elastic sponge or the like. The first discharge seal 1031 is mounted on the shutter 1003 by adhesive or the like so that the through hole 1031a surrounds the through hole 1003f on the outer peripheral surface side of the shutter portion 1003d.
In addition, a second discharge seal 1032 is mounted to the shutter portion 1003d from the side in the radial direction r. The second discharge seal 1032 has a flat plate shape including a through hole 1032a, and is formed of an elastic sponge or the like. The second discharge seal 1032 is mounted to the shutter 1003 on the inner peripheral surface side of the shutter portion 1003d by adhesive or the like so that the through hole 1032a surrounds the through hole 1003f. Further, as shown in part (b) of Figure 186, two projections 1003m and 1003n projecting toward the radial direction r are provided on the second end portion side of the first direction D1 of the shutter portion 1003d.
Next, referring to Figure 187, the mounting of the shutter 1003 will be described. Part (a) of Figure 187 is a side view of the toner pack 10020, and part (b) of Figure 187 is a sectional view taken along a line X1002-X1002 in part (a) of Figure 187.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 187, the shutter 1003 is coaxially mounted to the second nozzle portion 1002B from the second end portion side in the first direction D1 along the rotational axis A. At this time, the cylindrical portion 1003a of the shutter 1003 is inserted into the recess 1002Bg of the second nozzle portion 1002B. The shutter 1003 is inserted until the end surface 1003h on the side of the first end portion of the cylindrical portion 1003a in the first direction D1 abuts to the partition plate 1002Bn of the second nozzle portion 1002B. At the same time, the shutter 1003 is mounted to the second nozzle portion 1002B while packing the first discharge seal 1031 between the outer cylindrical portion 1002Ba of the second nozzle portion 1002B and the shutter portion 1003d of the shutter 1003. Similarly, the shutter 1003 is mounted to the second nozzle portion 1002B while packing the second discharge seal 1032 between the shutter portion 1003d of the shutter 1003 and the inner cylindrical portion 1002Bb of the second nozzle portion 1002B.
Thereafter, in the shutter 1003, the first end portion side of the shutter portion 1003d in the first direction D1 is fitted between the third cylindrical portion 1002Ac and the fourth cylindrical portion 1002Ag of the first nozzle portion 1002A. In this manner, the cylindrical portion 1003a engages with the recess 1002Bg, and the shutter portion 1003d engages with the third cylindrical portion 1002Ac and the fourth cylindrical portion 1002Ag, so that the shutter 1003 is supported so as to be rotatable about the rotational axis A relative to the second nozzle portion 1002B. That is, the shutter 1003 is a rotatable member which is rotatable about the rotational axis A relative to the first nozzle portion 1002A and the second nozzle portion 1002B, which are discharge portions.
Next, on the shutter 1003, a screw 1030 is threaded coaxially with the rotational axis A from the second end portion side in the first direction D1. As shown in part (b) of Figure 187, the screw 1030 includes, the threaded portion 1030b and a disk portion 1030a having a diameter larger than that of the threaded portion 1030b coaxially with the rotational axis A, in this order from the first end portion side in the first direction D1. The screw 1030 penetrates the through hole 1003f of the shutter 1003 and is screwed into the screw hole portion 1002Bh of the second nozzle portion 1002B. The outer diameter of the threaded portion 1030b of the screw 1030 is smaller than the through hole 1003f of the shutter 1003 and does not come into contact with each other. In this manner, the shutter 1003 is supported so as to be sandwiched between the partition plate 1002Bn of the second nozzle portion 1002B and the disk portion 1030a of the screw 1030.
At this time, in the direction of the rotational axis A, the shutter 1003 is supported with a slight gap between the second nozzle portion 1002B and the screw 1030. In this manner, the shutter 1003 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the second nozzle portion 1002B about the rotational axis A against the friction produced by the first discharge seal 1031 and the second discharge seal 1032.
With the above-described structure, as shown in part (b) of Figure 187, the toner of the accommodating portion 201 slides down the slope 1002Ah of the first nozzle portion 1002A and flows into the recess 1002Bf by way of the through hole 1002Af. The discharge opening 1002Be leading to the recess 1002Bf is sealed by the second discharge seal 1032 mounted in the shutter portion 1003d of the shutter 1003. This is the case where the shutter 1003 is in the shielded position relative to the second nozzle portion 1002B.
Next, referring to Figures 188 to 191, mounting the toner pack 10020 on the image forming apparatus 1 will be described. Figure 188 and 189 are illustrations of a state in which the toner pack 10020 is mounted on the mounting portion 206. Part (a) of Figure 188 is a top view, part (b) of Figure 188 is a side view, part (c) of Figure 188, parts (a) and (b) of Figure 189 are sectional views taken along lines X1003-X1003, X1004-X1004 and X1005-X1005 in part (b) of Figure 188, respectively. Figure 190 and 191 are illustrations of a state in which the toner of the toner pack 10020 is being supplied into the toner accommodating chamber 36 of the developer container 32. Part (a) of Figure 190 is a top view, part (b) of Figure 190 is a side view, and part (c) of Figure 190 and Figure 191 are sectional and cross-sectional views taken along lines X1006-X1006 and X1007-X1007 in part (b) of Figure 190, respectively.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 188 and part (a) of Figure 190, the toner pack 10020 is mounted on the mounting portion 206 in the same manner as in Embodiment 2. At this time, as shown in part (b) of Figure 189, the projections 1003m and 1003n of the shutter 1003 are mounted so as to sandwich the cover 210 on the apparatus-side in the rotational direction about the center of the rotational axis A. In this manner, the shutter 1003 is positioned relative to the mounting portion 206 in the rotational direction about the rotational axis A.
In addition, as shown in part (a) of Figure 189, the discharge opening 1002Be of the second nozzle portion 1002B is sealed with the second discharge seal 1032 mounted on the shutter portion 1003d of the shutter 1003 as described above.
Next, as shown in part (a) of Figure 190, when the user rotates the operating lever 208 in the rotational direction D the apparatus side shutter 209, the nozzle portion 1002B, the first nozzle portion 1002A, and the accommodating portion 201 rotate integrally with the operating lever 208 (see part (a) of Figure 190), as shown in part (c) of Figure 190 and Figure 191. At this time, as described above, the shutter 1003 does not rotate relative to the mounting portion 206 because the shutter 1003 is positioned with respect to the cover 210 (see part (b) of Figure 189) in the rotational direction centered on the rotational axis A. Even when the accommodating portion 201 is formed of a bag or the like, the second nozzle portion 1002B, the first nozzle portion 1002A, and the accommodating portion 201 are integrally rotated by rotating the operating lever 208, according to this embodiment, and therefore, it is easy to operate.
Therefore, as shown in Figure 191, the second nozzle portion 1002B rotates relative to the shutter 1003 which does not move and rotate in the rotational direction D, and the discharge opening 1002Be becomes opposed to the through hole 1003f of the shutter 1003 in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. This position is when the shutter 1003 is in the open position for the second nozzle portion 1002B.
At this time, between the second nozzle portion 1002B and the shutter 1003, and the second discharge seal 1032 surrounding the discharge opening 1002Be and the through hole 1003f is in the state of being compressed in the radial direction r and they are in close contact with each other. Similarly, the apparatus-side shutter 209 also rotates relative to the shutter 1003 in the rotational direction D, and the receiving opening 209a is placed to oppose the through hole 1003f of the shutter 1003 in the radial direction r. At this time, between the apparatus-side shutter 209 and the shutter 1003, are surrounded, and the first discharge seal 1031 surrounding the receiving opening 209a and the through hole 1003f is in a state of being compressed in the radial direction r and they are in close contact with each other.
Therefore, the toner discharged from the discharge opening 1002Be of the second nozzle portion 1002B is discharged to the receiving opening 209a of the apparatus-side shutter 209 through the through hole 1003f of the shutter 1003.
Thus, the toner in the accommodating portion 201 is replenished into the toner accommodating chamber 36 in the developer container 32 through the first nozzle portion 1002A, the second nozzle portion 1002B, the shutter 1003, and the apparatus-side shutter 209.
Further, after the toner is replenished, the operating lever 208 can be rotated in the direction of arrow E as in Embodiment 2, and the toner pack 10020 can be removed from the main assembly of the apparatus, and it is only the reverse of the above-described operations, and therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to Figures 192 to 195, the structure of the toner pack 1120 of this embodiment will be described. The same points as those of the above-described embodiments and modified examples will be omitted. In particular, of the elements disclosed in this embodiment, those corresponding to the members of Embodiment 2 will be assigned the same names as the members of Embodiment 2, and only the points different from the above-mentioned points will be described.
In the structure shown in Embodiment 2, the nozzle 202 of the toner pack 220 is integrally provided with the projecting portion 202b, but by making the nozzle as a movable separate portion, the toner pack 220 can be downsized. The structure in which the nozzle is provided as a movable separate component will be described in the following.
Figure 192 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a free end member 1132 of the toner pack 1120 of this embodiment is in a second attitude. Figure 193 is a partially exploded perspective view of the toner pack 1120 according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, the toner pack 1120 has the same structure as that of Embodiment 2 except for the projecting portion of the nozzle and the shutter on the pack side. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 193, the projecting member 1130 is mounted to the nozzle 1102 from the second end side in the first direction D1.
Referring to Figures 193 and 194, the structure of the projecting member 1130 will be described. Figure 194 is an exploded perspective view of the projecting member 1130 of this embodiment, and part (a) of Figure 194 and part (b) of Figure 194 are exploded perspective views as seen from different directions.
As shown in part (a) of Figure 194, the projecting member 1130 comprises a fixed shaft 1131 and a free end member 1132, in this order from the first end side in the first direction D1. The structure is such that the free end member 1132 is movable between a second attitude in which the axis of a cylindrical portion 1132a intersects the rotational axis A (central axis) and a first attitude in which the axis of the cylindrical portion 1132a is substantially aligned with the rotational axis A. Details will be described hereinafter.
The fixed shaft 1131 has a shaft shape and is coaxial with the rotational axis A. The fixed shaft 1131 is provided with an end surface 1131a on the first end side in the first direction D1, and a shaft portion 1131b having a double sided flat shape. In addition, the fixed shaft 1131 is provided with a through hole 1131c perpendicular to the rotational axis A. A curved end surface 1131d coaxial with the through hole 1131c is provided on the second end side of the fixed shaft 1131 in the first direction D1. Further, a slit portion 1131e is provided on the second end side of the fixed shaft 1131 in the first direction D1 in parallel with the rotational axis A and perpendicular to the axis direction of the through hole 1131c. The end surface 1131d is provided with a plurality of projections (1131f, 1131g, 1131h) projecting in a direction away from the axis of the through hole 1131c. Here, the plurality of projections are symmetrically provided with the slit portion 1131e interposed therebetween, and therefore, The description will be made as to only one side thereof. The end surface 1131d is provided with a projection 1131f projecting in a direction away from the axis of the through hole 1131c and in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A. Further, the end surface 1131d is provided with projections 1131g and 1131h projecting in the direction away from the axis of the through hole 1131c and in the direction of the rotational axis A at intervals from each other.
The free end member 1132 has a cylindrical shape, and is provided in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A and the axial direction of the through hole 1131c of the fixed shaft 1131.
The free end member 1132 is provided so that the cylindrical portion 1132a and the projecting portion 1132b projecting from the cylindrical portion 1132a are coaxial with each other in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. Here, the projecting portion 1132b has the same shape as the projecting portion 202b of the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.
From the cylindrical portion 1132a, a support plate portion 1132c (support portion) projecting in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 1132a is provided. The support plate portion 1132c has a flat plate shape symmetric with respect to the axis of the cylindrical portion 1132a, and is provided in a direction perpendicular to the axis direction of the through hole 1131c. The support plate portion 1132c is provided with a through hole 1132d and a spherical projection 1132e in the radial direction r of the imaginary circle VC centered on the rotational axis A. The spherical projections 1132e are provided symmetrically at two positions with the support plate portion 1132c interposed therebetween.
As shown in Figure 194, the support plate portion 1132c of the free end member 1132 is inserted into the slit portion 1131e of the fixed shaft 1131 in the direction perpendicular to the rotational axis A and the through hole 1131c (direction of arrow 11B). Further, a parallel pin 1133, which is a rod-shaped member, is coaxially inserted into the through hole 1132d of the support plate portion 1132c and the through hole 1131c of the fixed shaft 1131.
In this manner, the free end member 1132 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the fixed shaft 1131 by way of the parallel pin 1133. In addition, at this time, the projection 1132e mounted on the support plate portion 1132c of the free end member 1132 is in contact with the projection 113 1f of the fixed shaft 1131 and is constrained from rotating in the rotational direction 11A centered on the through hole 1131c (see part (b) of Figure 195).
As shown in Figure 193, in the fixed shaft 1131, the shaft portion 1131b is inserted into the hole 1102a which has the double sided flat in the rotational axis direction A and which is provided in the nozzle 1102 of the toner pack 1120, from the second end side of the first direction D1, until abutting to the end surface 1131a, and then it is fixed by adhesive or the like.
Next, referring to Figure 195, the user's operation before use will be described.
Figure 195 is a side view and a sectional view illustrating a user operation of the projecting member 1130.
Part (a) of Figure 195 is a side view illustrating the projecting member 1130. Part (b) of Figure 195 is a sectional view taken along a line X1101-X1101 in part (a) of Figure 195, showing a state in which the free end member 1132 is in the second attitude. Part (c) of Figure 195 shows a state in which the free end member 1132 has moved to the first attitude from the position of part (b) of Figure 195.
As shown in part (b) of Figure 195, before the user operation, the free end member 1132 (and the cylindrical portion 1132a) of the projecting member 1130 is provided on the fixed shaft 1131 so as to cross the rotational axis A.
At this time, as described above, the projection 1132e of the free end member 1132 contacts the projection 113 1f of the fixed shaft 1131 in the rotational direction 11A centered on the through hole 1131c, so that the rotation in the rotational direction of the rotational direction 11A is restricted.
Next, the user rotates the free end member 1132 in the rotational direction 11A relative to the fixed shaft 1131. The projection 1132e of the free end member 1132 rides on the projection 113 1f and rotates in the rotational direction 11A while expanding between the two projections 1131f away from each other (through hole 1131c axial direction). The user further rotates the free end member 1132, and the projection 1132e rides on the projection 1131g while expanding between the two projections 1131g in the direction away from each other (through hole 1131c axial direction) in the same manner as the projection 1131f, until the projection 1132e abuts against the projection 1131h, by which the rotation in the rotational direction 11A stops. At this time, the projection 1132e of the free end member 1132 is sandwiched between the projection 1131g and the projection 1131h of the fixed shaft 1131 in the rotational direction about the through hole 1131c, so that the free end member 1132 is fixedly supported coaxially with the rotational axis A.
Thereafter, the toner pack 1120 is mounted to the image forming apparatus 1.
In this modified example, the nozzle 202 of Embodiment 2 has the same structure as that of Embodiment 2 except that the nozzle 202 is replaced with the nozzle 1102 and the projecting member 1130, and other description thereof will be omitted.
As described in the foregoing, by making the free end member 1132 movable between the second attitude and the second attitude, and by making it possible to transport the toner pack 1129 the second attitude, the packing size of the toner pack 1120 can be reduced in the direction of the rotational axis A. When the toner pack 1120 is used, the user shifts the free end member 1132 to the first attitude, so that the rotation restricting mechanism 212 of the apparatus-side shutter 209 can be released with the mounting of the toner pack 1120 as in other embodiments.
Further, in this embodiment, the structure in which the free end member 1132 is one component has been described, but by employing the engaging means divided into two or more portions as separate movable portions, the outer shape is reduce, with the similar advantageous effect.
The structures of Embodiments 1 to 11 and the modified examples of each embodiment may be usable with combination with each other.

[INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY]

According to the present invention, there is provided a toner container mountable to an image forming apparatus, and an image forming system.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as defined by the appended claims.

Claims

A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) comprising:
an accommodating portion (201, 2401, 501, 901) configured to accommodate toner;

a discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) configured to be provided with an opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be) for discharging the toner in the accommodating portion (201, 2401, 501, 901) to an outside of the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120);

a rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) rotatable about a rotational axis (A) relative to the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) in a first rotational direction (K, D) and a second rotational direction (L, E) opposite to the first rotational direction (K, D); and

characterized in that

a projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is provided below the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be) of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) and having an inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) facing inward in a radial direction (r) of an imaginary circle (VC) centered on the rotational axis (A), when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in a predetermined direction in which the rotational axis (A) extends in a direction of gravity and at least a part of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) is below the accommodating portion (201, 2401, 501, 901), wherein the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be) of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) faces in the radial direction (r),

wherein when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction,

the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) has a first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) and a second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) which face downward, and an upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) which faces upward, outside the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) and inside the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be) of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) in the radial direction (r),

the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) and the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) extend so as to go up as go in the first rotational direction (K, D), and at least a part of the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) is provided at a position which is closer to the rotational axis (A) in the radial direction (r) than the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is and which is different from a position at which the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is provided in a circumferential direction of the imaginary circle (VC), and

at least a part of the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is above the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 1, wherein when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction, the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) extends so as to go up as goes in the second rotational direction (L, E).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 2, wherein the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) inclines with respect to the rotational axis (A) by an angle not less than 30 degrees and not more than 60 degrees, as the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is viewed in the radial direction (r) in a state in which the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 1, wherein the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is a surface perpendicular to the rotational axis (A).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 1, wherein when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction, the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) extends so as to go on as goes in the first rotational direction (K, D).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 5, wherein the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is configured to be exposed to the outside of the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 6, wherein a cavity is provided above the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) of the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b), when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 7, wherein the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) has a downstream side end surface which extends upward along the rotational axis (A) from a downstream end of the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) in the second rotational direction (L, E) and which faces a downstream side in the first rotational direction (K, D), when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 8, wherein the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) overlaps the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) as viewed in the direction of the rotational axis (A).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 9, wherein the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) has a connecting portion connecting a downstream end of the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) in the first rotational direction (K, D) and an upstream end of the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) in the second rotational direction (L, E) with each other.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 10, wherein the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) and the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) are provided at positions closer to the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) than to the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be) in the radial direction (r).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 11, wherein a distance from the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) to the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) and a distance from the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) to the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) are not more than 30 % of a distance from the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) to the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 12, wherein the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is movable relative to the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) between an alignment position in which the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is aligned with the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) in the circumferential direction, and a non-alignment position in which the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is not aligned with the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) in the circumferential direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1- 12, wherein the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is movable relative to the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) between an alignment position in which the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is aligned with the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) in the radial direction (r) and a non-alignment position in which the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is not aligned with the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) in the radial direction (r).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 14, wherein the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) includes a first projection (204a) and a second projection (204b) which is provided at a position different from a position at which the first projection (204a) is provided in the circumferential direction,
wherein the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is a first upward surface,

the first projection (204a) includes the first upward surface, the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) and the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2),

the second projection (204b) includes a second upward surface, a third downward surface and a fourth downward surface, wherein when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction, the third downward surface and the fourth downward surface extend so as to go as go in the first rotational direction (K, D), and at least a part of the third downward surface is provided at a position which is closer to the rotational axis (A) than the fourth downward surface in the radial direction (r) and which is different from a position of the fourth downward surface in the circumferential direction, and

at least a part of the second upward surface is above the fourth downward surface.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 15, wherein in the first projection (204a), a part of the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) is upstream of the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) in the first rotational direction (K, D), and
wherein in the second projection (204b), a part of the third downward surface is upstream of the fourth downward surface in the first rotational direction (K, D).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 14, wherein when the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is a first upward surface, the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) has a third downward surface, a fourth downward surface and a second upward surface having 150 - 210 degree inclusive rotational symmetry shapes, about the rotational axis (A), of the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1), the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) and the first upward surface, respectively.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 14, wherein when the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is a first upward surface, the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) has a third downward surface, a fourth downward surface and a second upward surface having 180 degree rotational symmetry shapes, about the rotational axis (A), of the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1), the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) and the first upward surface, respectively.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 14, wherein the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) includes a first projection (204a) and a second projection (204b) which is provided at a position different from a position at which the first projection is provided in the circumferential direction,
wherein the first projection (204a) has the upward surface and the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2), and

the second projection (204b) has the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 19, wherein the second projection (204b) is provided at a position opposite to the first projection (204a) across the rotational axis (A) in the radial direction (r).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 20, wherein the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1) inclines with respect to the rotational axis (A) by an angle not less than 30 degrees and not more than 60 degrees, as the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is viewed in the radial direction (r) in a state in which the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 21, wherein the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) inclines with respect to the rotational axis (A) by an angle not less than 30 degrees and not more than 60 degrees, as the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is viewed in the radial direction (r) in a state in which the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 22, wherein the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2) is longer than the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1), as the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is viewed in the radial direction (r) in a state in which the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 23, wherein the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is longer than the first downward surface (204a1, 304a1, 604Aa1, 804a1, 204b1, 304b1, 604Ab1, 804b1), as the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is viewed in the radial direction (r) in a state in which the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 24, wherein the upward surface (204a3, 204b3, 2604a3, 304a3, 304b3, 3104a3, 3104b3, 604Ba2, 604Bb2, 804a3) is longer than the second downward surface (204a2, 304a2, 604Ba1, 804a2, 204b2, 304b2, 604Bb1, 804b2), as the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is viewed in the radial direction (r) in a state in which the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 25, wherein the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) is provided outside the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) in the radial direction (r).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 26, wherein the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) is configured to rotate about the rotational axis (A) between a close position for closing the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be) and an open position for opening the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 27, wherein an outer surface of the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) extending in the direction of the rotational axis (A) is provided with a rotatable member opening (203a) for exposing the opening (202a, 2402Ag, 2502k2, 2503k2, 302a, 502a, 902Bk, 10020Be) of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) to the outside of the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) when the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) is in the open position, and
wherein an outer surface of the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) opposite from the rotatable member opening (203a) across the rotational axis (A) is provided with a recess (203b) recessing inward in the radial direction (r).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 28, wherein the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is provided at a position closer to the rotational axis (A) than to the recess (203b) in the radial direction (r), as the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is viewed in the direction of the rotational axis (A).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 28 or 29, wherein the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is inside a width of the rotatable member opening (203a) in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis (A), as viewed in the radial direction (r).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 30, wherein the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) has a first opposing surface (202d1) and a second opposing surface (202d2) at an outer surface of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) extending in the direction of the rotational axis (A), the first opposing surface (202d1) and the second opposing surface (202d2) being opposed to each other with a gap therebetween,
wherein the first opposing surface (202d1) and the second opposing surface (202d2) are exposed through the rotatable member opening (203a), when the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) is in the close position.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 31, wherein the first opposing surface (202d1) and the second opposing surface (202d2) are parallel with each other, and
wherein when a line parallel with the first opposing surface (202d1) and passing through a center between the first opposing surface (202d1) and the second opposing surface (202d2) is a first imaginary line (CL1), and a line provided by rotating the first imaginary line (CL1) about the rotational axis (A) by 90 degree is a second imaginary line (CL2), the second imaginary line (CL2) passes through the opening of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 27 - 32, wherein the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) is rotatable in the first rotational direction (K, D) from the close position to the open position.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 33, further comprising a seal (205) for sealing between the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) and the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102) when the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003) is in the close position.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 34, wherein the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) of the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is centered on the rotational axis (A).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 35, wherein the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) of the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is cylindrical.
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 35, wherein the inner peripheral surface (202b1, 202b10, 804a11) of the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is constituted by a plurality of flat surfaces (202b10) surrounding the rotational axis (A).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to any one of Claims 1 - 37, wherein when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction, the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is configured to project downward with respect to a lower surface (202j) of the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 38, wherein, when the toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) is oriented in the predetermined direction, the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is provided on the lower surface (202j) of the discharge portion (202, 2402A, 2502, 2503, 302, 502, 5102, 902, 1002A, 1102).
A toner container (220, 2420, 2520, 2530, 320, 520, 5120, 620, 820, 920, 10020, 1120) according to Claim 39, wherein the projection (202b, 2402Bb, 2502b, 2503b, 304, 3104, 502b, 5102b, 604, 804, 8104, 8204, 8304, 903Bg, 1003b, 1132b) is projected downward through a hole provided in a bottom surface (203c) of the rotatable member (203, 903A, 1003).